ML20107G030
| ML20107G030 | |
| Person / Time | |
|---|---|
| Site: | Waterford  |
| Issue date: | 10/30/1984 |
| From: | VIRGINIA CORP. OF RICHMOND |
| To: | |
| Shared Package | |
| ML20107F890 | List:
|
| References | |
| NUDOCS 8411070204 | |
| Download: ML20107G030 (396) | |
Text
_ _ _ ,
Procedu G Revision / -
No. Procedure Title Field Change No. Date VC-ADMIN-100 Management Interf ace for Waterford #3 PSI Rev. 0 12/27/82 VC-ADMIN-101 Field Document Control Rev. 0 1/20/82 F.C. 1 1/28/82 F.C. 2 2/19/82 Rev. 1 3/01/83 E' VC-ADMIN-102 Notification of Reportable Indications for Waterford #3 Rev. 0 1/20/82 RD "-
F.C. 1 9/13/82 k U, Rev. 1 3/01/83 G. $tt
, VC-QA-101 Site Quality Assurance for Waterford #3 Preservice Inspection Rev. 0 1/20/82 h
.F.C.
Rev. 1 1 5/05/82 3/01/83 g
g VC-QA-102 Procedural Noncomformance Rev. 0 F.C. I 1/20/82 1/28/82 k.
Skt i
- Rev. 1 3/01/83 Q O
I VC-QA-103 Ceneration and Control of Procedures for Waterford #3 PSI Rev. 0 1/20/82 M F.C. 1 1/28/82
! F.C. 2 7/09/82 Rev. 1
~
3/01/83
, ISI-1.1 System Verification and Marking for Waterford #3 PSI Rev. 0 1/20/82 2
F.C. 1 7/01/82 F.C. 2 10/21/82 %
Rev. 1 3/01/83 N m Y ISI-1.2 Preservice Inspection Documentation Rev. 0 1/27/82 $* r*
F.C. I 1/28/82 O F.C. 2 8/10/82 H H F.C. 3 9/.15/82 , @
Rev. 1 3/01/83 lw m l E
, ISI-2.1 Ultrasonic Equipment Calibration Confirmation Rev. 0 2/10/82 0 F.C. 1 12/15/82 E Rev. 1 3/01/83 @
us e411070204 e41030 PDRADOCKOS000g
, G l.
i 1
4
' Procedure Revision /
No. Procedure Title Field Change No. Date ISl-2.2 Manual Ultrasonic Examination of Full Penetration Rev. 0 2/10/82 @
Circumferential and Longitudinal Ferritic Butt Welds F.C. 1 4/01/82 f4 F.C. 2 7/06/82 Rev. 1 3/01/83 ISI-2.3 Manual Ultrasonic Examination of Circumferential and Rev. 0 2/10/82 Longitudinal Butt Welds in Clad Ferritic Vessels and F.C. 1 4/01/82 EN Class 1 Loop Piping F.C. 2 5/11/82 g g'
~
Rev. 1 3/01/83 g g-ISI-2.4 Ultrasonic Examination of Studs and Bolts Rev. 0 F.C. 1 2/10/82 8/05/82 g
F.C. 2 Rev. 1 12/16/82 3/01/83 q k
ISI-2.5 Ultrasonic Thickness Measurement "ev. 0 2/10/82 F.C. 1 Rev. 1 1G/14/82 3/01/83 k
~-
ISI-2.6 Manual Ultrasonic Examination of Steam Cenerator Stay Rev. 0 5/26/82 Cylinder Welds Rev. 1 7/15/82 I
Rev. 2 8/23/82 F.C. I 10/18/82 Rev. 3 3/01/83 ISI-2.7 Manual Ultrasonic Examination of Full Penetration Rev. 0 2/10/82 Circumferential and Longitudinal Austenitic Butt Welds F.C. 1 3/08/82 g l
F.C. 2 4/01/82 g F.C. 3 6/16/82 m m F.C. 4 10/14/82 $
Rev. 1 3/01/83 h H
ISI-2.8 Manual Ultrasonic Examination of Circumferential Butt Rev. 0 2/15/82 S o Welds Between Clad Ferritic Piping and Austenitic Safe Ends Rev. 1 4/29/82 Iw ,
F.C. 1 6/18/82 g
- F.C. 2 7/14/82 g Rev. 2 3/01/83 g E
m O O 9
Procedurtr Rt. vision / -
No. Procedure Title Field Change No. Date ISI-3.1 Liquid Penetrant Examination Using the Color-Contrast Rev. 0 1/08/82 @
Solvent Removable Technique F.C. I 1/28/82 PD F.C. 2 2/04/82 F.C. 3 7/16/82 F.C. 4 9/13/82 ,,
Rev. 1 3/01/83 M EN ISI-4.1 Magnetic Particle Examination of Bolting Utilizing the Rev. 0 2/10/82 g g"'
Dry Continuous Method - m.
O $38 I
ISI-4.2 Magnetic Particle Examination of Bolting by Continuous Method Utilizing Wet, Fluorescent Medium Rev. 0 2/10/82 g ISI-4.3 Magnetic Particle Examination of Welds Utilizing the Dry, Rev. 0 2/10/82 g Continuous Method F.C. 1 Rev. 1 7/16/82 3/01/83 g-ISI 4.4 Magnetic Particle Examination of Welds by Continuous Rev. 0 2/11/82 N.
Method Utilizing Wet, Fluorescent Medium Rev. 1 4/29/82 F.C. 1 7/16/82 Rev. 2 3/01/83 ISI-5.1 VT-1 Visual Examination Rev. 0 6/25/82 i
l i
k
~ n a Si j tu E H
l R
! lu O l @
8 e
3 w
I
m fy. .
m p The (804) 266 8741 T (/ Virginia Corp. P. O. Box 9474 y j e m*=e 5809 takeside Ave.
v Richmond, Virginia 23228 1
Proced,ure Title nagement nterface for
~
INC0f1PORATED OUALITY ASsunaw w **
ENGINEERING Procedure No.: VC-ADMIN-100
@ecument1s:
CrM*: w%em.,- -
O a= == = wie e % s. ,,
Wo me:en = ,oor c ,,,
W Reswbenet; Proc e wig,3 Plant Site Waterford No. 3 "*
o MWetted; R*vlee and Me NOTE:
{'=T g 8&n** ate. la for generng" <nas doaume Customer: Louisiana Power and Light ** ""wace = % e% . ,c. m
- v aad ia no w.,
Ebasco Services. Inc. - Agent ,, d*f, 'j,"*"' LEU **'"'" QC ge- .'s me. r.,1 ..
gg ~' '"* =J UGWrnearanon Approved for Use Jea c', *.,*,* '* t'>2-*-
Virginia. Corporation: - -
B:- M bNwn % . <N.in s Y
Doga xe l YO~,
Approved for Us Customer: ,
.//ycy/ga Rev. n
- Date: 19 / 97 /A 7 Rev. Date: i Prepared by: AF M a Prepared by: j Reviewed by -
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:M Reviewed by: I
/ I Customer:
Rev. _
Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer Customer:
Rev. Date Rev. Date:
Prepared by:- Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by: ,
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer: Customer:
~- -- _ - -
l VC-ADMIN-100 O
, , , Proc.No. ROV.
Efje "t7ttstuta Corporation of Rishmonb Date: 1/27/82 Page 1 of 4 )
l 1.0 Purpose l The purpose of this procedure is to establish administrative .
l guidelines for Virginia Corporation of Richmond (VCR) site supervision and management to interface with Ebasco site management, Ebasco corporate management Louisiana Power and Light, site authorized inspector, and other regulatory personnel that may become involved' .
2.0 Scope The scope of this procedure is applicable to the preservice inspection Program, Waterford #3, and will encompass all administrative activities from contract siFaing to final report. Technically, the examination of class I and class II nuclear piping systems will be in accordance with Ebasco Services Inc. project identification #1564-1001, ammended
! as per Aug. 26, 1981, joint meeting between the Nuclear Regulatory
- Commission Ebasco Services, Inc., Louisiana Power and Light, and VCR. Contractually, the procedure recognizes the instructions and guidelines set forth in contract #NY-403685 between Ebasco Services.
Inc. and The Virginia Corporation of Richmond.
j 3.0 References
3.1 Contract
NY-403685 3.2 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section XI 1977, addenda through summer, 1978 3.3 10CFR-50 3.4 VCR Quality Assurance Manual 3.5 VCR Quality Assurance Procedures and NDE Procedures for Waterford Preservice Inspection .
3.6 VCR Program Plan and Schedule O
l
Proc.No. VC-ADMIN-100 0 ROV p Efje E,rgm, fa Corporation of RW Date: u2n82 Page 2 of 4 1
'4.0 Responsibilities 4.1 It will be the responsibility of the VCR site supervisor to report all contract activities to the Ebasco PSI construction coordinator. He will interface only with this individual. He will interface with Louisiana Power and Light, the authorized inspector, regulatory bodies, or other departments of Ebasco, only when requested to do so by the Ebasco PSI construction coordinator. When such requests are made, he will endeavor to assist in every manner possible to resolve any question concerning the preservice examination or necessary repairs.
4.2 It will be the responsibility of the site supervisor to present personnel certifications and equipment certifications to the Ebasco construction coordinator immediately upon their arrival at the job site.
4.3 He will make all weld report data available to the coordinator on a daily basis.
4.4 He will report immediately any field changes _to ISI NDE procedures or Q.A. procedures to the coordinator.
4.5 The site supervisor will report immediately all reportable indications concerning the NDE examinations, non-conformance with any procedure, and any suspicion of mininnam wall violation, to the coordinator. It will be his responsibility to resolve, or assist in resolving, any of the above as expeditiously as possible.
4.6 ' The site supervisor will report all deviations in geometry or veld identification on the initial program isometrics.
He will obtain the approval of the coordinator before making permanent changes to the geometry or veld numbers. He will also obtain approval before making necessary additions or deletions to the isometrics. Once data collection has O started, it will be the responsibility of the site supervisor to assure that no weld numbers are changed (refer to VCR procedure ISI 1.1).
i
~
"-^D"I"-l 0
, . Proc.No. Rev Eije Virginia Corporation of Ristunent 4
Date. 1/27/82 Page 3 of '
4.7 The site supervisor will assist Ebasco in all Q.A. or technical audit of his contract activities.
4.8 The site supervisor will refer all technical questions promptly to the Ebasco PSI construction coordinator and VCR management.
4.9 It will be a responsibility of the site supervisor to present his schedule of examination sufficiently in advance, and in sufficient detail, to enable the coordinator to arrange the necessary support system for an uninterrupted flow of work.
4.10 In all cases involving incomplete examination, it will be the responsibility of the site supervisor to supply the coordinator with a comprehensive report of existing conditions in order that a relief request may be filed through proper channels.
5.0 Responsibilities - VCR Management 5.1 It will be the responsibility of management to assure that the joint contract for preservice examination is completed in a competent, professional manner and that a final report is submitted in accordance with contract requirements.
In accrrdance with contract obligations, management will develop NDE procedures, QA procedures, a program plan and schedule that will satisfy the governing codes and contract commitments.
5.2 Management will assune the responsibility for timely site audits to assure that our commitment is being fulfilled.
5.3 Management will instruct the VCR Quality Ass' urance ManIger to conduct sufficient site audits of the program to assure that the quality of the work performed meets the intent and letter of the VCR Quality Assurance Manual and the specific Waterford QA procedures.
'. j
.. r-- ,
Proc. No. 'C-#"*-1 0 5tev Ci .
" "'*8'Ric$ntent"'" of *"*" Date. 1/27/82 Pagef' of '
5.4 Management will limit communication, to the extent practicable. l to the following (1) Ebasco Technical Section (corporate) l (2) Ebasco Site Coordinator (through site manager)
(3) Ebasco Contracts Section (corporate and site)
All telephone costversations will be confirmed in writing .
if requested.
5.5 It will be the responsibility of management to resolv'e all technical questions from the site with Mr. B. Baril and advise the site supervisor accordingly.
5.6 Hanagement is responsible for assisting Ebasco, upon request, concerning the resolution of any problem that may arise during the preservice inspection and with Louisiana Power and Light or the regulatory authorities.
5.7 It will be the responsibility of management to direct all correspondence and invoice submittal to the designates set forth in the contract.
,~,,-,w_ , , , . , , _ . , _ - - , - . . - _ _ - . , . , , _ , , _ , , . . , , , - - - . , , , . , . , . . , , . , , , , , , _ _ , , .,,,_,,,,,.-.-,___.,,,,-_,..-,_,,_..,,.n,, w___,,
..m. e sh=w
- 1
/ ,-m\
p The (804) 266 8741 ,
- ]LV y Virginia Corp.
- man ==e P. O. Box 9474 5809 Lakeside Ave.
l
%s 7 Richmond, Virginia 23228 mae~n ewwree
. Procedure
Title:
Field Documentation Control INCC3iMtA1ED QUld?!TY
. . IX.ULECE EliC S F i!u n c m . n ,.. ..i..
Procedure No.: [n w win t c.-.is VC-ADMIN-101 g n - ,we,:,com ,,,,,, ,,.. . ,
n~ mms,c: uteu <
. ..u ..w. .
'":d' "a "
O "'d an Resubmit. ,
Plant Site: Waterford No.~3 NOTE: 8
)
n .e in, e. wm . .n.
est temeants. is far ganarse se,itarsavise
=mm w.imie:o v ,
, -,,~.:. . . , - , . ,
. true ,e- n.ii ,n = r..ia, ,,
deti.ery of all es?#a:s.
.,,,,,,,,,,m,,.,'M.
+
Customer: Louisiana Power and Light %,, ..,
Ebasco Servicc.s Corporation - Agent "a'8== 9 m' P,muia (es*.
BYE 4m '!!I 5.a$ t *-
Approved for Use DATd:....ib..L..d.i.'.... ...
Virginia.Corporetions [
' s, *?>'%~ % ~h) t w
_- c a Approved for Use Customer:
Rev. 0
- Date: 1/20/82 Rev. Date:
Prepared by:~M- d repared by:
Reviewed by: ') '>- .> h / 6 s - I J- . Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: "/ b d We- e_ Reviewed by:
Customer:
Rev. 1 Date: 3/1/83 Rev. Date:
Prepared by: b'Mb% - Prepared by:
v -
Reviewed by b--- 4 N ^ - - M3 Reviewed by:
Reviewed b d =- Reviewed by:
Customer $J / Customer:
l' Hio6/bt.
Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
4 Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer Customer:
! s. I g
- { "[ ,, _, _ , , , , , , , _ , , _ _ , , ,, ,, _
Proc. No. VC-ADMIN-101 ggy 1 Efje Virgtuta Corporation dWM Date' 3 /8 3 Page 1 of 6 g 1.0 Purpose 1.1 The intent of this procedure is to establish a workable system for the control of documentation pertaining to field administration of the preservice inspection. Waterford No. 3.
1.2 The procedure addresses document control of NDE procedures, QA procedures, administrative procedures, non-conformance reports, program plan, examination data reports, personnel certification, reportable indications, job correspondence, equipment certification, and site audits.
2.0 References 2.1 VCR ISI Procedures - Waterford 2.2 VCR QA Procedures - Waterford 2.3 VCR Admin. Procedures - Waterford 2.4 ANSI N-45.2 j 2.5 VCR Program Plan - Waterford
! 2.6 VCR QA Manual, VC-QA-100, Rev. 4, dated 12/7/81 l
l 3.0 Responsibility l 3.1 The Virginia Corporation of Richmond (VCR) field supervisor will be responsible for the implementation of this procedure.
l 4.0 Control of NDE Procedures Documentation l 4.1 Procedure documentation will comprise a master file of l procedures, an active file of procedures, and an inactive file of procedures.
- 4.lA The master file will be the latest revision of l all NDE procedures, with field changes attached.
l The master file will also include a master log i
[
of procedure revision, and a master log of field change.
O
Proc. No. VC- A DMIN-101ReV- 1 EIJe Virgtuta Corporation i I of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 2 of 6 1
4.lB The active file will be comprised of those pro-cedures issued to I.evel Il examiners. The proce-dures will reflect latest revisions and field changes. The active file will be checked for accuracy against the master file and controlled in accordance with item 5.0 of VC-QA-103. Ac-curacy checks will be on a scheduled weekly bas.is as well as with the issuance of a new procedure, revi-sion, or field chan8e.
4.1C The inactive file will be comprised of procedures rendered inactive by revision. The procedures affected by field changes, and superseded by a revision, will be transferred to the inactive file with field changes attached. All proced'ures shall be marked or stamped " VOID" when transferred I q g to the inactive file.
5.0 Control of Site Quality Assurance Procedures Documentation 5.1 Procedure documentation will comprise a master file of procedures, an active file of procedures, and an inactive file.
5.lA The master file will be the latest revision of all QA procedures, with field changes attached. The master file will also include a master log of procedure revision, and a master log of field changes.
5.lB The active file will be a working list of pro-cedures issued to Level II examiners (VT-2 and VT-3). The procedures will reflect latest revi-sions and field changes. The active file will be checked for accuracy against the master file when a new procedure, revision or field change is is-
.I I sued. The file will also be checked against the master on a scheduled weekly basis.
- _ _ _ _ - _ _ - , _ . , _ _ , -,,m . - - - - - - , - - -- - __.
- * - . Prec. N o. vC- A DMI N-101 Rey, 1 tlEfje "t7ttgtnta Corporation of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 3 of 6 l
5.1C The inactive file will include procedures made obsolete by revision. The procedures affected by field changes and superseded by a revision will be transferred to the inactive file with field changes attached. All procedures shall I
be marked or stamped " VOID" when transferred to the inactive file.
6.0 Control of Administrative Procedure Documentation 6.1 Procedure documentation will include a master file, active file, and an inactive file.
6.lA The master file will include latest revisions of all administrative procedures. A master log will be maintained of procedure revisions and field changes.
6.lB The active file will contain administrative pro-cedures used by site supervision. Ac' curacy of the active file will be compared to the master file.
6.lC When a procedure has been rendered inactive by revision, it will be filed in the inactive sec-tion. All procedures shall be marked or stamped
" VOID" when transferred to the inactive file.
7.0 Program Plan Documentation Control 7.1 The program plan will be handled in a similar manner as procedures. The documentation will include a master of each zone, an active file of each zone, and an inactive file.
7.lA The master file of each zone will reflect the latest revisions and/or field changes. A master log will be maintained of revisions and field
, changes.
Proc. No.vc- i nM T N-101 Rev~ 1 q Efje "t7trginia Corporation of 3Mchnunb Date: 3/1/83 ..Page 4 of 6 7.1B The active file will be the respective zone examination sheets and isometrics. The master file will serve as an accuracy check. The final zone drawings will become part of the PSI final report.
7.lC The inactive file will comprise zone information rendered obsolete by revision. All zone informa-tion shall be marked or stamped " VOID" when trans- l ferred to the inactive file.
8.0 Control of Examination Data Documentation 8.1 Examination data sheets will be reviewed and cleared by ;
the VCR supervisor. Examination sheets will be filed daily in a " hold" file for review. After review by the
{ } VCR supervisor, a copy will be forwarded to the Ebasco g PSI construction coordinator and the Louisiana Power and Light PSI coordinator. The examination information will be entered on the VCR zone examination control log.
The data sheet will then be filed under the proper zone in the VCR " data sheet complete" file. This file will be available to the ANI for review at all times.
9.0 Control of Reportable Indication Documentation 9.1 When an exanination report indication record is submitted on a point of examination, the record will be reviewed by the VCR supervisor. A copy will then be forwarded to the Ebasco PSI construction coordinator and the Loui-siana Power and Light PSI coordinator. The site super-visor will file the original with the examination data sheet and place a copy in the VCR " Reportable Indications Active" file, 9.2 When the owner has decided on disposition, the VCR site l l
. supervisor will take appropriate action as directed by the Ebasco PSI construction coordinator. If disposition
1
~
Proc. No.VC- A DMIN-101 Rey 1 Efje "Firginia Corporation of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page s of 6 involves repair, a re-examination sheet will be issued.
If repair and examination result in a disposition, the indication record will be removed from the active to a
" Reportable Indication Inactive" file.
9.3 Should the owner decide that disposition is passive, upon proper notification from the owner the VCR supervisor will remove the indication record from the active file and place it in the " Reportable Indications Inactive" file. When notification is received from the owner regarding passive disposition, the owner's statement will be attached to the original indication record and will become a permanent record of the preservice examination.
10.0 Control of Personnel Certification Documentation 10.1 Certification of personnel will be controlled by a master file.
10.lA The master file will include certification on VCR personnel that may be assigned to the in-spection. All changes in level of certification will be forwarded to the site and entered in the master file.
11.0 Control of Equipment and Materials Certification Documentation 11.1 The certification of equipment will include a master file, active file, and inactive file.
11.1A The master file will contain certification of VCR equipment likely to be employed in the inspection.
11.lB The active file will include all equipment cur-rently used in the inspection program.
ll.1C The inactive file will comprise equipment trans-ferred from the job for any reason. The file will also contain terminated certification.
- - - Proc.No. VC-ADMIN-101 f{gy 1 I
, Efje Virgtnta Corporatiott 6 6 of Ekbmont Date: 3/1/83 Page of 12.0 Control of Documentation of Non-Conformance 12.1 All non-conformance reports will be contained in a single file, arranged in chronological older, and filed by report number.
13.0 Centrol of Documentation of Site Audits 13.1 Records of site audits and corrective action will be filed under separate cover in chronoleTica'l order.
14.0 Control of Job Correspondence 14.1 All correspondence pertaining to the preservice inspection emanating from Richmond management will be filed under separate cover in chronological order.
14.2 All correspondence emanating from Ebasco or Louisiana Power I k and Light will be filed under separate cover.
/m\ ,
g The (804) 266 8741 f, i y Virginia Corp. P. O. Box 9474 y 8h*=='d 5809 Lakeside Ave.
g%sjr Richmond, Virginia 23228 1
, mv senvu es Procedure
Title:
~
Notification of Reportable Indications foqNCORPORATED j Waterford No. 3
' *
- QUALITY 1 ABSURANCE
- i ENC.INEERING 1 I
smjvocument es:
VC-ADMIN-102
)
- i Procedure No.: ((a=*.=* mtsi e c O ,*""" "'* c.='-'i a. : ;
-,:~..
l
- c'**~' '
D *W a Asada,it.
Plant Site: Waterford No. 3 NOE-n-= .a im me. e. .ni, , ,,,,,,.
est someents. r= fue gene.a sosisessense
= = , i, ~.,,,u,; ;
- == i . . ia. ,,,
Customer: Louisiana Power and Light *'=re e' a =+mei. . , -
Ebasco Services Corporation - Agent ,Z "" *
-..7-.....-
Approved for Use g ,,,,_jp: j"p - g[
% h.\ni-c~_
Virsinia. Corporation:
o c,1 a
Approved for Use r-Customer ,
l Rev. 0
- Date: 1/20/82 Rev. 1 Date: 1/1 /R1 Prepared by: '7/<%4 % ' y ~_ u y , Prepared by: b I. #Ib ee- _
v Reviewed by: O E LAr Reviewed by: 6 '* ^'--l.l2E Reviewed by: Yb f3, h -- Reviewed by: 8 M _8_ m7 Customer: 4//e /4 3 t /*
I Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
. Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
- - Reviewed hy
- Reviewed by:
l Customer Customer:
i i Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewsd by:
Customer: Customer:
'- --_ ___ _1_1.1_ _ _ _ . ____... _. - ,__ _ . _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ . _
1
. . . \
, =
~
Proc.No. vc-mm-T o ? Rev. 1 Efje "TrTirgmta Corporation a1 of Ric$ntonb Date: 3/1/83 Page1 of 9 W l.0 Purpose 1.1 To establish a written procedure for the reporting and disposition of reportable indications, preservice inspection, Waterford #3.
2.0 References 2.1 VCR ISI Procedures - Waterford 2.2 VCR QA Procedures - Waterford 2.3 VCR Administration Procedures - Waterford 2.4 ASME Section XI, Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Summer, 1978 2.5 VCR Program Plan - Waterford 2.6 Ebasco Administrative Procedure ASP-IV-81 3.0 Responsibility The responsibility for reporting, documenting, and disposition at owner's discretion, of reportable indications will rest solely with the VCR site supervisor.
I 4.0 Reporting .
4.1 When reportable indications are encountered du ing the preservice inspection, the VCR site supervisor will review l the examination report data sheet and the examination report l indication sheet before any action is taken.
4.2 Af ter the information on the above documents has been verified.
l the original data sheet and indication sheet will be filed under the proper zone in the VCR master data file. A copy of I the indication sheet will be forwarded to the Ebasco PSI construction coordinator and the Louisiana Power and Light l PSI coordinator within twenty-four hours. A copy of the l indication sheet will be placed in the VCR " Reportable l , Indications Acitve" file.
I wrr *
- - - - , , ,w--- - - w q+ w---o--ww-v r - --e w---,--wv--,--++-~ w g->~ - - , - - - - - ~ -m---- -y
P' ' N VC-^""'"-l 2 I I DC Virginia CorporatiOH of Rkbmont Date: 3/1/83 Page 9 of 9 5.0 Disposition 5.1 Method of disposition will be the responsibility of the owner.
5.2 Should disposition involve repair, re-examination will be accomplished at the direction of the Ebasco PSI construction coordinator when repair is completed. A re-examination report data sheet will be filed in the VCR master data file. I When disposition has been verified, the indication sheet will be removed from the active file and placed in the
" Reportable Indications Inactive" file.
5.3 When the owner's decision on disposition is passive (no repair), the owner's statement will be attached to the original indication. sheet and returned to the master data file. I and thus will become a part of the preservice examination record. The indication sheet copy will then be removed from the " Reportable Indications Active" file and placed in the inactive file.
l
\:
l D.
t
~
o
'I . -_. . -_-- -____ - .--__ . - . - .. . ...- -- . - - .-- . - - . . - - - -- -- - - - -
/-s\ The (804) 266 8741 s -
H g Virginia .e em Corp. P. O. Box 9474 5809 Lakeside Ave.
%s y j Richmond, Virginia 23228 Procedure
Title:
, Site Quality Assurance for Waterford No. 3 Preservice Inspection l EBA3Co SERVICES fliCCTIPCRATED QUICIT
- ~.un.a E
- iCWEE2:::a Procedure No.: VC-QA-101 - - - - -
This, Document is:
l g am aes mir ec ,
O i".c.*..*'m c- - * - =.+w:
c.,,,,,,u.,,,,
r-I F1 ant Site: Waterford No. 3 aa.a.,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
l O newtw n ans anu6eit
~
"^ ':.
a== or m. i. . ,, ,,,
Louisiana Power and Light "' *'"a i"w wa=8 c r,*
I Cuseoner. .
- m m'"eamic.w ..,, n.,, ,
- - Ebasco Services Corporation - Agent av s. . , ., ,,,,
l '. W ntracte fr.a f.nl e.g.,cij3 ty, py I
l =*a =s e= m m ,i,2
- Approved for Use , ===s-o, ,m n,,,.. a,,,,.
Virginia. Corporation:" 7 J& ,% i .
,, BY:...U,b[hi,y,1'-
0 DAJEL,,;,,-2 ,2,g,,,,f;;,g,,,,,,
Approved for Use Customer: ,-
I I- Rev.
0 .
Date: 1/20/82 Rev. 1 Date: 1/1/83 Prepared by: h T M '-M 279 Prepared by: Aba-V
/
Reviewed byb '/>Je hN~? d'A' Reviewed by: 7 *S 9 & "- EE Reviewed by Y de e --: : Reviewed by: ;-
Customer: 4//fh??
j /*
Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer Customer:
Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Frepared by: Prepared by: r i Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
l Customer: Customer:
" ~ ~ ' -
,. . - - . . . . . - - , - , . - - - - . - . , - - - - - _ - - . . . _ . _ _ _ _ - .- ~ - ------ - - --~_
Proc.No. VC-OA-101 Rey, EI)e E.rgtnta Corporation 1 of Rithmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 1 of 5 4
1.0 Purpose To insure that the site activities of the Virginia Corporation of Richmond (herein after referred to as VCR) comply with quality requirements as set forth by the VCR Quality Assurance Manual and contre:t requirements-of contract #NY-403685 between Ebasco Services Corporation and VCR.
2.0 Scope 2.1 To insure that site activities comply with procedures generated for Waterford No. 3 preservice inspection.
2.2 To insure that site activities comply with the VCR Quality Assurance Manual.
2.3 To insure that personnel, materials, and equipment used at the Waterford site are properly certified and qualified.
3.0 References
! 3.1 The VCR Quality Assurance Manual, VC-QA-100, Rev. 3.
{ }
3.2 Waterford #3 NDE Procedures 3.3 Waterford #3 QA Procedures 3.4 Waterford #3 Administrative Procedures 4.0 General 4.1 - In' the case of conflicts which arise between the VCR Quality Assurance Manual (reference 3.1) and the Waterford procedures (references 3.2, 3.3, and 3.4), the Waterford Site Procedures shall take precedence over the QA Manual.
5.0 Responsibilities 5.1 It shall be the responsibility of the VCR site job supervisor to implement the site Quality Control program in accordance with the requirements of references 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, and 3.4.
5.2 It shall be the responsibility of an NDE Level III to approve all technical reports requiring Level III sign-off at the Waterford site. In addition, he shall assure that all technical reports are signed by an NDE Level III as required.
y ,
Proc. No. VC-O A-101 Qgy 1 EIJe "t7trgtnta Corporation i I of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Pa ge.2__of s 5.3 It shall be the responsibility of the corporate Quality Assurance Manager to visit the site monthly, at a minimum, during VCR work progress to insure the program compliance with quality assurance requirements. The corporate Quality Assurance Manager may designate this responsibility to one who has been appropriately trained and who does not have responsibility in the area being audited.
5.4 It shall be the responsibility of Ebasco Services. Inc. to provide adequate storage facilities for records, equipment, and materials.
It shall be the VCR site supervisor's responsibility to insure that records, equipment and material are properly stored.
5.5 It shall be the responsibility of Ebasco Services Inc. to maintain a duplicate storage of quality records pertaining to the preservice inspection.
5.6 It shall be the responsibility of the VCR site supervisor to insure that the dual storage system is complete through timely
{ } checks in accordance with reference 3.4.
5.7 It shall be the responsibility of the VCR site supervisor to g receipt inspect and complete a controlled material log sheet for all materials or equipment shipped from the Richmond office to the field office.
5.7.1 Equipment and/or materials shall be checked for shipping damages.
5.7.2 Equipment and/or materials shall be checked to insure that certification sheets are complete and not out of date.
5.7.3 Any non-conforming equipment and/or materials shall be removed from the jobsite.
6.0 Frequency of Site, Audits 6.1 The frequency of site audits shall be adequate to detect quality related problems promptly. Site audits shall occur at the initiation of inspection activities, at monthly intervals during the inspection program, and at the completion of the inspection program. Follow-up
1
, , Proc. No~ *^-1 Rev' i Efje E,rstnta Corporation of Echmonb Date: 1/1/a3 Page , of s g audits of deficient items or are s shall be performed to verify implementation of corrective action in a timely manner.
7.0 Quality Assurance Activities .
7.1 During the jobsite visit, a suf ficient sample of the job activities shall be reviewed in accordance with a prepared audit check list which details the specific elements to be audited in order to insure compliance with the procedures referenced in paragraph 3.0.
7.2 Job activities to be sampled should be (but are not limited to):
7.2.1 Weld centerline marking 7.2.2 Weld identification 7.2.3 Personnel, material, and equipment certifications 7.2.4 Examination reports 7.2.5 Field changes 7.2.6 Nonconformance reports and dispositions 7.2.7 Procedure implementation (personnel performance) 7.3 Any discrepancies noted shall be reported in an exit interview. The exit interview will confirm that the audit team has:
, a. been correctly informed l b. correctly interpreted communication
- c. interviewed appropriate personnel.
- d. examined the significant documents.
. e. clearly stated the findings.
8.0 Reports 8.1 Results of the site visits shall be reported on forms similar to Figure 1. The report shall identify the areas or items audited, the identification of the audit
/
, , , Proc.No. VC-QA-101 Rgy= .
Efje "t7ttstnia Corporation O Of3RiChn10Rb () ctg
- 3/1/83 F;agg 4 of 5 team member (s), reflect the conditions as found during the audit, and any specific deficiencies that have been
~
ob se rved. The report shall be signed by the audit team leader. The report shall require a date by which a written response is required, outlining the actions ,
taken to correct the deficiency, actions taken to preclude recurrence, and date by which full compliance was or will be achieved. The' report shall be transmitted to the appropriate level of management being audited.
8.2 There shall be a follow-up audit to verify that correctJve actions have been implemented for those instances when the observed discrepancies were of a serious nature.
At the discretion of the audit team leader, submittal O of documentation such as procedures, instructions, and corrective action reports may satisfy the reaudit requirement. Deficiencies in implementing effective corrective action shall~ be brought to the attention of The Virginia Corporation president by letter.
Continued deficiencies, or failure to implement effective corrective action, shall be considered a significant condition adverse to quality, and forwarded to The Virginia Corporation president by letter.
8.3 All significant conditions adverb- to quality shall be resolved by the president uith ; thirty calendar days of his notification t ' .ul recommendations will be by letter to both parties snvolved. Procedural nonconformances shall be reported in accordance with VC-QA-102.
8.4 Copies of all Q.A. documentation will be provided to Ebasco Q.A., L.P.6L. Q.A., and L.P.6L. PSI coordinator.
v - . - . -. , . _ _ - - , - - - w,, , ,--_.9 y.- , , , - - , . -
, , , Proc. No. VC-OA-101 Rgy_ 1-Eije "t7ttstnia Corporation of Richmont Date: 3/1/83 Page.1__of s
{ }
QUALITY ASSURANCE SITE AUDIT REPORT Facility Audited: Dates of Visiti From To Personnel Contacted:
Procedural
Reference:
Extent and Depth of Audit-Summary of General Impressions:
l I Corrective Action Recommended:
Closure or Rejection of Audit Findings (show NCR No.):
l l
Team Members: ,
Signed: Date:
Copies:
I l
l Figure 1 I I
/m\
p The (804) 266 8741
') 1(-[y[ jVirginia Corp.
.e ni e P. O. Box 9474 5809 Lakeside Ave.
%s Richmond, Virginia 23228 Procedure
Title:
Procedural Nonconformance
- . EBASCO SERVICES IUCORPOP.ATc0 Qull,1TY Nisu w Gn Procedure No.: VC-QA-102
! This Oncer net ie?
l Q Renewed without Ceemeats
c"-*"" "'*d :
Plsnt Site: Waterford No. 3 O'"'"'**'C""*"'
Resotait: Practed with order.
] Rejected: Revese and Resubmit.
- NOIE:
Review of this documet, with er enth.
Cuscomer: Louisiana Power and Light t e m ee is,wwe.i s.ie. m e Ebasco Services Corporation - Agent *
' " , * , ', ,""j.,'J,%"",*,".'j w cutmeter free est rewsernis.a. tw deetM Gl 4. . 4 . n t, Approved for Use em and dec . tsiu, 3 itect 6
^ ~ ^ ^
^^~';
Virginia. Corporation ****""f *' 'j'**y* , ,' ,,
l BY:. . 'W.J .../ .. .'
f Approved for Use OATE:. . ... ../.c.L.. 9.. .
l Custoner: ,
i Rev. ,O_
Date: 1/20/82 Rev. Date:
Prepared by: 7b d h Prepared by:
Reviewed by: b u_ 6 h :_ / nrr- Reviewed by:
7
! Reviewed by: hhdM : wwa -. % Reviewed by:
Customer:
Rev. 1 Date: 3/1/83 Rev. Date:
Prepared by: b ,'. B d b ,- Prepared by:
I v l
Reviewed by: N h d M '"- ' itv/ F Reviewed by:
Reviewed by*#A Reviewed by:
Customer: 4//?/'!3! Customer:
/'
Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer: Custorer:
I _ -_.--
, , , Prcc.ND. VC-QA-102 ggy~ 1 Efje Virgtuta Corporation of Richmont Date: 3/1/s, Page, of a l l 1.0 Purpose 1.1 This procedure covers the actions required of The Virginia Corporation of Richmond (herein af ter referred to as VCR) should any question regarding procedural nonconformance arise during the field operations of ,
Waterford #3 PSI.
1.2 It is not the intent of this procedure to delineate the processing of NDE reports stating rejectable or questionable indications as detailed in Ebasco procedure ASP-IV-81.
2.0 References 2.1 Ebasco procedure ASP-III-7, " Corrective Action".
2.2 Ebasco Nonconformance Report, form 6009 - 11/5/77.
l l 3.0 Initiation 3.1 Questions of nonconformance may be raised by VCR examiners, VCR field supervisor or Level III examiner, the customer, the authorized inspector, regulatory personnel, or other designated responsible authorities.
~
3.2 Upon an apparent nonconformance, procedural work shall terminate immediately to the extent deemed necessary by the VCR supervisor.
4.0 Reporting 4.1 The VCR supervisor will make a decision as to whether i
the apparent nonconf ormance is major or minor.
! 4.2 Major nonconformance 4.2.1 A major nonconformance is defined as a deviation from the established procedure that affects or detracts from the quality or completeness i of the examination. Repeated minor nonconformances may be considered a major nonconformance.
l I
, , , Proc. No. vc-na in, Rev 1 TEI.Je Yttstma Corporation 9 of Risbmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page o of a 4.2.2 An immediate report of the apparent major nonconformance (Figure 1) shall be made to the customer, and the VCR Quality Assurance Manager, or his designee, by the VCR supervisor.
4.2.3 Each major nonconformance report (Figure 1) shall be given a sequential number, and logged in the nonconformance report file. This number shall be recorded under item one (1) of the report .
4.2.4 For major nonconformances, the VCR supervisor, or his designee, shall complete items two (2) through nine (9) of the report, fully describing the nonconforming condition.
4.3 Minor nonconformance
(_s 4.3.1 A minor nonconformance is defined as any nonconformance that does not meet the criteria of paragraph 4.2.1.
4.3.2 , An immediate report of the apparent minor nonconformance (Figure 2) shall be made to the VCR Quality Assurance Manager by the VCR supervisor.
4.3.3 Each minor nonconformance report (Figure 2) shall be given a sequential number, and logged in the nonconformance report file.
5.0 Disposition - major nonconformance 5.1 When a major nonconformance report is completed, it will be forwarded promptly to the EBASCO Q.A. site supervisor for further processing. A copy will also be forwarded to the VCR Q. A. Manager.
I
~,/
Proc. INo. VC-0A-102 Rey 1 Efje Virstma Corporation of3&fsbaumb Date: 3/1/83 Page 3 of 4 4
5.2 The nonconformance report shall then be evaluated by Ebasco, Louisiana Power and Light and their authorized inspector. The report will also be evaluated promptly by the VCR Q.A. Manager.
5.3 When items thirteen and fifteen are completed, the Ebasco Q.A. site supervisor shall indicate whether corrective action and/or verification of disposition are required, by checking the blocks of the form for items fourteen (14) and sixteen (16). He shall then transmit the yellow and pink copies of the nonconformance report to the VCR supervisor for further processing.
5.4 If corrective action and verification of disposition is required of VCR, the VCR field supervisor shall insure that corrective action and verification of disposition is accomplished within twenty working days. It will be the responsibility of the VCR Q.A. Mana8er to insure that disposition is accomplished by the VCR supervisor.
If this cannot be accomplished within twenty working days, the VCR field supervisor shall transmit a request for extension to the Ebasco contract administrator.
5.5 The VCR field supervisor, or his designee, shall document corrective action (item 14) and verification of disposi-tion (item 17) on the nonconformance report form, and transmit the pink copy of the form to the Ebasco Q.A.
site supervisor. A copy of the corrective action shall l , be forwarded to the VCR Q.A. Manager and the Louisiana f Power and Light PSI coordinator. The yellow copy shall be retained by VCR for permanent record filing.
l l
6.0 Disposition - minor nonconformance 6.1 Determination shall be made of the legitimacy and extent of the nonconformance.
l 1
1
, , , Proc. No. VC-QA-102 ReV. 1 Efje Virgtuta Corporation Of Richmetth Date' 3/1/83 Page 4 of 4 6.2 The disposition of a minor nonconformance shall be.
evaluated by the VCR field supervisor and the VCR Quality Assurance Manager, as applicable.
6.3 Corrective action resulting from the evaluation shall be initiated by the VCR Field Supervisor, and reviewed -
by the VCR Quality Assurance Manager to ensure that follow-up action will be taken.
6.4 The resulting disposition shall be documented (Figure 2), and signed by the VCR Field Supervisor, and approved by the VCR Quality Assurance Manager.
6.5 The nonconformance and corrective actions taken shall be reviewed by the VCR Quality Assurance Manager for the identification of conditions adverse to quality. If actions need to be taken to prevent recurrence, these
\s actions shall be reported on the appropriate nonconformance report.
l l
l l
t C
4009 11/5 77 CCASC3 $ERVICIS INC%:PORATED "
Distribution:
QU ALITY ASSURANCE -
HONCONFORMANCE REPORT **"*"*
(. ~ ' PORT NO.ti
'""*"*""**"""*"#d"'
disposition W
i
- 1NSTRUCTIONS: (See bc.ek of formi Pink . Initiator of NCR ELI NT OR PROJECT 82 8 DRAWING 9 tO./S P E C NO. 533 LU A LIE R. C ONS T RUC TION OC OR CONTRACTOR lea P.O. NO. 458 L A C RIP TION OF COMPONENT. PART OR SYSTEta(Si I,
DESCRIPTION OF NONCONFORMANCE (IremS Innived, Specification, Code or Standard 90 Which Items Do Not Comply, Submit Sketch if AppIlcobiel
- G N AME AND StGN ATURE OF PERSON REPORTING NONCONFORMANCE 1 n\\ \?
ft / P NY DATE 893 h . % .
I I. RECOMMENDED Dl5P051T10N " (SvinRif Sk ch p do
^
A
( GC\ b W
>W v
Nf M 1 AND SIGN A TURE OP PERSON REC OMM ENOING DIS POSIT 80N 8118 T IT LE /C OMP A N Y DATE 0128 111. EVALUATION OF Dl5P051T10N BY EBASCO,-REASON FOR Dl5P05tT10N tiss I V. CORRECTIVE ACTION t '*) Required Not Required Vf C ENGINEERING QU ALITY ASSU R ANCE CONSTRUCTION OTHER NLME 1544N ATURE) NAME (SIG N A TUR EI NAME (SIGN A TURE) NAME IStGN A TURE)
DATO DATE DATE DATE
] ACCEPTED REJECT EO CEPTED REJECTED C ACCEPTED O aE>ECTEo O accEPTEo O aEJECTED ACCEPTED WITH CCMMENTS ] ACCEPTED WITH COMMENTS O ACCEPTED WITN COMMENTS ] ACCEPTED WITH COMMENTS V I, VERIFICATION OF DISPOSITION C REoUIRED NOT REQUIRED '
st ?) Cy si r,N A T U R r TITLE DATr FIGURE 1
i.
l O
9 INSTRUCTIONS To Be Completed By:
Item (1) - Ebasco Quality Assurance Engineering.
- Items (2) through (9) - Person initiating Nonconformance Report, eg, Ebasco Vendor QA Representative, Ebasco QA Engineering, etc.
Items (10), (II) and (12) - Supplier, Ebasco Construction Quality Control or other authorized responsible personnel. , ,
'O~' ', f Item (13) - Personnel 1 firs'ignat'edhy'QA Engineering as indicated in the appropriate box in Part V.I ll,o,,
.< l lf)
~ . - ' l // rl -j ,' .,.
Itsm (14) - Ebasco QuYity As'su/an'ce'Engin94/iy.
N' .
'/i i.
Item (15) - Responsible engineer lblMb d partment designa'esd by Q appropriate box. 'N' ' , ,
~ _ , p,/ ;. ,
Item (16) - QA Engineering after completion of Parr'III.' j^
S Item (17) - Ebasco Vendor QA Representative when NCR is generated in Supplier's facility, or QA Engineering when generated at the construction site or engineering offices.
NOTE: Completed form to be incorporated into Ebasco QA Records.
O s
'-*e.es me e- *. p eepere , w ee .ww, -.
/ \g, MINOR NONCONFORMANCE REPORT #
p 09 Page of Minor Nonconformance Reported by:
Date:
Description of Minor Nonconictmance:
Disposition / Corrective Action:
h Verification of Disposition /Cor tv c -
VCR Field Supervisor m \\\ .
Date:
VCR Quality Assurance Man g d k D . M Date:
\1 '
Action to Prevent Recurrance:
Required Not Required QC:
O Figure 2
/m\ The (804)266 8741 .
Virginio Corp. p. o. sex 9474 i
.\ N'
.e aw *d 58o9 Lakeside Ave.
v/
NT Redwnond, Virginia 23228 Procedure.
Title:
'. Generation and Control of Procedures for Waterford No. 3 Preservice Inspection
, , .EBASCO SEf Vicgs INCC11itfMTED Ques tin m.. s. uun si E!
=====dr;"mynn 0 Procedure No.: VC-QA-103 7 This, Ducer e it is:
gam wwe ew.ne.
O """" :~a-a a' **'*:
lacersara4 Cwme: as.4 Plant Site: Waterford No. 3 a~n : ex,, .. n.,
.O .**e*amn w
. _ ' :* ' ~ . ~
no.,,,,,%,,,,,,,,,, 1 Customer: Louisiana Power and Light 5 m~[~2. 2 , *"
- Ebasco Services Corporation - Agent "#j,y,yr*g**w=,=,,x.[
- a,e p;c ^"'-
Approved for Use .. ,.
s Virginia. Corporations krm OE-- ,
Approved for Use M' GU .'...W' k. ..
Customer: i Rev. 0 .
Date: 1/20/82 Rev. Date:
l Prepared by: b D M er- Prepared by:
Reviewed by: N - = 5 # ^^ -- M 22f Reviewed by: '
Reviewed by: - )2%~ h .IM
~
Reviewed by:
Customer:
Rev. 1 Date: 3/1/83 Rev. Date:
Prepared by b). OMb m - Prepared by:
v Reviewed by: Ih d M- - -- 4.42!r Reviewed by:
- Reviewed by Reviewed by:
Customer ,
4//d/A's Customers t-Rev. Dates Rev. Date:
I Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer: Customer:
_-,v@ h W C- -
. . _ = _ . . , . - . , . _ , , _ . _ . , _ . _ , , , _ _ _ - - _ - . _ _ ~ _ . , . _ , . _ . . . . . - . _ _ . _ _~m
1
, , Prcc.N3 vc-oA-103 Flev__1 tEIje E,rstuta Corporation Of 3%IC$ntonb Date' 3/1/83 Pode ~1~ of 4 1.0 Purpose To provide a system for the preparation, review, approval, issue, and control of nondestructive examination procedures, administrative procedures, and site quality assurance procedures generated by The Virginia Corporation of Richmond (herein af ter -
referred to as VCR) for the Waterford #3 PSI.
2.0 References 2.1 VCR OA Manual, VC-QA-100, Rev. 4, dated 12/7/81.
2.2 Ebasco procedure ASP-IV-81.
3.0 Definitions 3.1 NDE Procedures -
Documents which establish administrative and technical requirements for conducting nondestructive examinations. l l
3.2 Administrative Procedures -
Documents which establish management control over site activities and establish necessary interfaces with the customer.
3.3 Site Quality Assurance Procedures -
Documents which establish policies to ensure adequate control of quality during the conduct of field activities.
4.0 Preparation, Review and Approval of Procedures 4.1 Preparation The originator shall be a member of the appropriate department; i.e., NDE department for NDE procedures, QA department for site Q.A. procedures, or VCR management for administrative procedures.
t l h
9
, , , Proc. No. VC-OA-103 Rey _ 1 EI.je "tTirgtnta Corporation OfRithm0Hb Date* 3/1/83 Page 2 of 4 8
4.2 Review The procedure shall be reviewed by a member of the appropriate department; i.e., a Level III shall review
~
NDE procedures, the QA Manager, or his designate, shall review QA procedures, and VCR management shall review administrative procedures. The procedure shall then ,
undergo an additional review by the Quality Assurance Manager or his designate. All VCR comments shall be resolved prior to the final reviewer's signature being placed on the procedure cover sheet (Figure 1).
4.3 Final procedure When all review has been completed, the procedure shall be issued and controlled as designated in paragraph 5.0.
G 5.0 Issue and Control of Procedures 5.1 Initial procedure prepared for customer review, upon the completion of all steps in paragraph 4.0, shall be marked " Draft" and shall be designated Revision A.
Each draft revision, upon receipt of customer comments, will be given a sequential alphabetical designation.
5.2 Each draft revision will be required to complete all steps in paragraph 4.0.
5.3 Upon customer acceptance, the procedure will be given the designation " Revision 0", and will not be marked
" Draft". All subsequent revisions will be given a s'equential numerical designation.
5.4 The procedure will then undergo a final review for completeness, and will be signed on the cover sheet in the block " Approved for use - Virginia Corporation",
by a responsible VCR official.
i f \
t
\
l r
,--w gw . ++- . + -
, , Prce.N2. vc-o^-103 Rev. I tEfje E,rgittia Corporation -
of Richmont Date: 3/1/83 Page 3 of 4 5.5 Three copies of the procedure, (one controlled and two uncontrolled), will be transmitted to the Ebasco Site Manager in accordance with Reference 2.2, for Louisiana Power & Light approval in the appropriate block on the cover sheet marked " Approved for Use, Customer:". Ebasco .
will also document acceptance of the procedure by stamping the cover sheet. .
5.6 Ebasco will ' retain one controlled copy and one uncontrolled copy, and transmit the approved *:ncone. rolled copy to VCR for internal controlled distribution.
5.7 All NDE field test procedures will be controlled on the job site by the VCR Field Supervisor. All field test procedures, before being used for examination, will be reviewed for proper revision and completeness, and will then be stamped " Approved for Field Use". No I procedure will be used for NDE examination without this stamp.
5.8 Prior to examination, each Level II technician at the job site will be issued a controlled copy of the applicable field test procedures. A log will be maintained of the procedure copy number, and to whom issued. Any revisions to the procedures, or field change, will be immediately inserted into all applicable procedures and so recorded in the log. Upon leaving the job site, the technicians shall return all controlled procedures to the VCR field supervisor.
I I
6-=
me a e we Proc.No. VC-Q A-103 Rey 1
, , Efje E,rstuta Corporation of Rk$monb Date: 3/1/83 Poge 4 Of 4
! 6.0 Field Changes 6.1 Procedures may be revised in the field to reflect practical considerations. The field change may be ,
originated by the VCR Field Supervisor or Level III.
The field change must be approved by a VCR level III, VCR QA Manager or his designate, an authorized Louisiana 1 Power and Light representative, and reviewed by an authorized Ebasco representative. Field changes shall be documented on VCR Field Change Form (Figure 2), and Continuation Sheet (Figure 3), if necessary, and shall be attached to the procedure. The procedure will be marked to reflect the paragraph affected by the field change. The field. change will be controlled eer para,-
graph 5.8.
l I 6.2 A controlled copy of the procedure and field change shall be transmitted to the Ebasco Site Manager. At no time shall there be more than five field changes I to an individual procedure. All field chan8es must be incorporated into the final issue of the procedure.
7.0 Revisions 7.1 The initiation, review, and approval for revisions of procedures shall be the same as for the original issue. ,
i Revisions may include field chan8es made to the previous issue, as specific circumstances dictate.
l l
Figura 1 .
/ \
( . The (804) 266 8741
!L Virginia Corp. -
P. O. Box 9474 - -
.e n.w 5809 Lakeside Ave. I ss 7 Richmond, Virginia 23228 Procedure
Title:
Procedure No.:
Plant Site:
A Customer: 9
^ k Approved for Use Virginia Corporation:
V Approved for Use Customer Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by:. Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer:
Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer Customer Rev. Date Rev. Date:
Prepared by: --
Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customers Customer:
i
. f
/*'\ FIELD CHANGE
{ ,} L % to.
1 U Vyakwia Corp. Page of Procedure No: Revision No: Dates Procedure
Title:
Field Change Not Date:
Change Action:
\
Originated by: Date:
Approved by: Date:
Virginia Corp. of Richmend - Level III Approved by: Date:
Virginia Corp. of Richmond - QA LP&L Approval: Date:
Ebasco Review: Date:
Figure 2 t
e'< - -.---,-.-,,_,,,_,..,an.,, , . - , - - , _ , _,.n_,. . . .--__,---,a,._.-- .
i / 7% \ FIELD CHANGE (Continuation Shast)
'4
( p 4m 1 U #*8* '
1 V @ne wCorP.
%,ms8 Procedure Not Revision No: Date:
Procedure
Title:
Field Change No: Dates Continuation:
i Q I >
k l
[
Originated by: Date:
Approved by: Date:
Virginia Corp. of Richmond - Level III
' Approved by: Date:
, Virginia Corp. of Richmond - QA i LP8L Approval: Date: q g Ebasco Review: Date:
Figure 3
/, -s\
L p The (804) 266-8741 (m -
t V Virginia Corp. P. O. Box 9474 y/ g vy j ew 5809 Lakeside Ave.
Richmond, Virginia 23228 Procedure
Title:
System Verification and Marking for Waterford #3 Preservice Inspection i
~
- EUAGC0 SERVICES INC0".FCRfiTED .
AShURAUCZ Procedure No.: ISI 1.1 EttGINEEntfc L.; i .. . . . . . .
g n ime w.e e ca e.
Plant Site: Waterford No. 3 O *";dllf,7"l ,,
"d n ... : em.w n .
O "'! a
!'"d' "a t,c w.,"'
NOTE:
Custoner: Louisiana Power and Light am. .eeni su . m . .
Ebasco Services Corporation - Agent "'[ "","*'%',[ ",", *', '*,#",,*j,' ,
and in r . u . <e .
- e se , .< .n ..e-is .o-i.
Approved for Use O) g v -
Virginia. Corporation: - - >
~ 77 %"-
% (- %' - e .- .."".p"'._' __
c
). r=n. I( w.a) e, tn"W*".*
s
- . 7 . . , . . . ,.j . . . . . . _ . . . . .j.
Approved for Use DATE:. .8/.k.Ni. ..
I Customer:
Rev. 0 -
Date: 1/20/82 Rev. 1 Date: 3/1/83 i
Prepared by: h m-c/
Prepared by: b [. O v Reviewed by: * : d h bT Reviewed by: YL O M* 4 LIRE Reviewed by ' h 7 % c h , % Reviewed by: AMN,((M Customer: [ , _ . _ __ 1/d h' -T
/
Rev. Date: Rev.
Date:
l Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
1
- Customer
- Customers Rev. Dates Rev. Date Prepared by - Prepared by:
! Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
l Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
! Customer Customer:
1
, , , Proc.No. m 1 1 Rev i 1EIje Virgtuta Corporation of Richmont Date: 3/1/s3 Page 1 of _16._ q ,
1.0 Scope 1.1 This document describes the method and procedures.for performing system walk downs and zone drawing verifications, marking of weld centerlines for examination start points and scan direc-tions, and marking of weld identification numbers on circum-ferential, longitudinal, and branch connection welds in order to ensure that the PSI program be conducted in accordance with the requirements of Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
2.0 Purpose 2.1 To ensure uniformity of the manner in which system walk down and zone drawing verification are performed.
2.2 To ensure uniformity of the manner in which weld centerlines are marked so their locations can be used as an identifiable l I datum point.
2.3 To ensure uniformity of the manner in which weld identification numbers are marked.
3.0 References 3.1 1977 Edition of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section XI, with addenda through summer, 1978, Article III-4300, Appendix III.
i 3.2 VCR Program Plan - Waterford #3.
l
- l. 3.3 Virginia Corporation Quality Assurance Manual, VC-QA-100, Rev. 4, 12/7/81.
3.4 The Virginia Corporation of Richmond Procedure ISI 1.2, I
Preservice Inspection Documentation (latest revision) 1 4.0 Personnel Qualifications 4.1 Personnel shall have the ability to identify and to locate vessel components and piping systems through the use of construction, assembly or zone drawings of the preservice l I inspection plan.
l l
, , , Proc.No. ISI 1.1 q,y 3 EIje Virgtuta Corporation g of Richmont Date: ,/1/s' Page? of_ li 5.0 Equipment and Material Requirements
, 5.1 Low stress stamps and/or vibratool shall be used t'o permanently identify each weld and weld centerline.
5.2 Stamps shall be supplied with certifications from the manu-facturer stating that the stamps are manufactured in accordance with ASME,Section III requirements.
6.0 Initial Conditions 6.1 Surface conditioning shall be done prior to marking weld identification numbers and weld centerlines.
6.2 Surface condition shall be acceptable for the appropriate NDE method for that specific weld as defined in the preservice inspection plan.
7.0 Instructions for System Walk Down and Zone Drawing Verification 7.1 Each zone drawing shall be walked down completely.
7.2 During systen. walk downs the following items shall be verified.
7.2.1 Zone drawing configuration.
7.2.2 Location of all welds on the piping system including butt welds, socket welds, branch connections and welded attachments.
7.2.3 Pipe diameter.
7.2.4 Valve numbers.
7.2.5 Wall and floor penetrations.
7.2.6 Surface condition of all welds with respect to subsequent nondestructive examinations.
7.3 Any 'rariation of the items in paragraph 7.2 on the zone drawing shall be marked in " red" on the zone drawing.
7.4 Upon completion of the system walk down and zone drawing verification, a current zone drawing will be generated.
7.5 Upon completion of the current zone drawing,.a final system walk down and zone drawing verification will be performed U by another technician and any necessary changes will be made.
Efje TTirginia Corporation of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 3 of_l6.J )
7.6 Upon completion of the final system walk down and zone drawing verification, an approved zone drawing shall be generated and stamped " Approved for Field Use", and initialed and dated by the field supervisor.
7.7 Any subsequent changes shall be brought to the attention of the field supervisor and he shall nake the appropriate changes on the zone drawings.
7.7.1 Once data has been generated on a specific zone drawing and a weld is added, the weld shall be designated the next highest number in the weld number sequence.
7.7.2 Any welds that have been cut out and replaced by another spool piece shall be designated a "900" series number, starting with "900" for that particular zone drawing, and continuing with that number sequence for subsequent veld cutouts only.
(Reference figure 1).
7.7.3 All lines designated for hydrostatic testing only shall be designated a "600" series number, following l the weld I.D. number (Reference figure 2) .
7.8 All longitudinal welds in piping systems shall be designated an Alpha letter "L" after the numerical designation.
7.8.1 When more than one longitudinal weld exists on a spool piece, valve, or fitting, the first longitu-dinal weld in the clockwise direction f rom the veld centerline mark "V" stamp, when looking in the direc-tion of zone drawing flow, shall be designated an Alpha letter "A" af ter the "L" designation. The second longitudinal weld in a. piping system shall
\
O
- ee - -
e 9 6m . -. ..
, , , Proc. No. ISI 1 1 Rev i Efje Virgtuta Corporation f' of R(t$mont Date: 3 /' 1/s 3 Pagee of 16 sj be designated an Alpha letter "B" after the "L" designation, etc. (Note: If there is a longitu-dinal weld in the same location as the "V" stamp mark, the first weld in the clockwise direction from this weld shall be designated the "LA" designation.)
7.8.2 when longitudinal seam welds in class 2 piping -
require examination 2.5T from the circumferential weld, these longitudinal welds shall be designated the number of the intersecting circumferential weld after the Alpha designation on that particular end of the longitudinal weld. (Reference Figure 3.)
7.8.3 For longitudinal welds in tees with two (2) short seams in the radius of the tee and one (1) long seam, the short scam on the end with the lower weld gw identification number shall be designated a "LA" (s,/ designation. The short seam on the end with the higher weld identification number shall be desig-nated a "LB" designation and the long seam shall be designated a "LC" designation. (Reference figure 4.)
7.9 Upon completion of the preservice inspection, final zone draw-ings will be generated as necessary and included in the final report.
8.0 Instructions for Marking Weld Centerlines 8.1 Weld centerlines shall be marked with a low stress "V" stamp with the intersecting point on the centerline of the weld pointing in the clockwise direction when looking in the direc-tion of the zone drawing flow. The zone drawing flow is in the direction of the weld number sequence from lower numbers to higher numbers.
8.2 The locations of centerline marks shall be established in accordance with the following rules.
s- /
, , Proc. No. Ist 1.1 gey, 3 Efje E,rgtnta Corporation of 3&ftbntonb Date: 1/1/s, Page 5 of __26 ,
j 8.2.1 For horizontal pipelines (Reference Figure 5), the
. centerline mark shall be located at the intersection of the weld centerline and the top centerline of the pipe.
8.2.2 For vertical pipelines (Reference Figure 5), the centerline mark shall be located at the intersection of the weld centerline and the centerline through the outside radius of the first elbow or bend in the direction of the lower weld identification number on the zone drawing.
8.2.3 In a vertical run, where there is no elbow in the direction of the lower veld ID number, use an exten-sion of the center line of the outside radius of the elbow in the direction of the higher ID number.
8.2.4 For vertical pipelines where no elbows or bends are i
)
involved.
8.2.4.1 For vertical runs up from a tee or branch connection, the centerline mark shall be at the intersection of the top centerline of the horizontal pipeline through the radius of the tee or branch connection on the side of the lower veld identification number on the zone drawing. (Reference Figure 6.)
8.2.4.2 For vertical runs down from a tee or branch connection, the centerline mark shall be at the intersection of the bottom centerline of the horizontal pipe-line through the radius of the tee or branch connectian on the side of the lower weld identification number on the zone drawing. (Reference Figure 7.)
l I
, , , Proc.No.Ist 1 1 Rev. 1 EIje Virgtnta Corporation -
(' of Rittment Date: 1/1/83 Page 6 of 16 v
8.2.4.3 For any case not covered by 8.2.4.1 or 8.2.4.2, choose the most convenient location.
8.2.5 For saddle welds (sweepolet, weldolet, etc.), the centerline mark shall be the same as Par. 8.2.4.1 '
for vertical pipelines branching up and Par. 8.2.4.2 for vertical pipelines branching down from a tee or branch connection.
8.2.6 For longitudinal welds in piping, elbows, tees, etc.,
the centerline mark shall be at the intersecting point of the circumferential and longitudinal weld centerlines on the lower weld identification number end of the longitudinal weld and pointing in the direction of the zone drawing flow (Reference n
( Figure 8.)
8.3 In the event that an error is stamped on the weld a "C" will be stamped over the error, and the correct stamp and centerline will be marked.
8.4 The methods used for locating actual weld centerline shall be as follows.
- 8. 4. l' For welds that are not ground flush, measure the dis-tance across the weld (edge to edge) and determine mid-point.
8.4.2 For stainless steel welds that have not been solution annealed or heat treated, measure the distance across the weld (edge to edge) and determine mid-point.
8.4.3 For carbon steel and stainless steel welds that have been solution annealed or heat treated, and there are no magnetic properties, measurements shall be taken from geometric changes on the surface. When edges of the weld are located, measure the distance from edge
~'s to edge of the weld and determine the mid-point.
v
, , , Prce.N2. 1st 1.1 pgey, 1 Efje "tTirgtnta Corporation OfRIthm0sth Date: 3/1/83 Page 7 of 16 I I 8.4.4 For welds that are ground smooth, with the weld,geo-metry in question, it may be necessary to etch in order to clearly define the weld configuration. If-this becomes necessary, etching shall be the respon-sibility of Ebasco.
.9.0 Instructions for Marking Weld Identification Numbers 9.1 All welds shall be verified by the " Approved,for Field Use" zone drawings prior to marking any weld identification numbers.
9.2 Locations of weld identification numbers shall be established in accordance with the following rules.
9.2.1 The centerline of each weld shall be marked prior to marking its identification number.
9.2.2 All weld identification numbers shall be located close to the centerline mark in the circumferential direction.
9.2.3 Where practical, all weld identification numbers shall
- be located on the side of the veld in the direction l of the lower weld identification number.
9.2.4 All weld identification numbers shall be located, when possible, at a minimum of 1.5" from the toe of the weld so that there wil'1 be no interference with subsequent visual or surface examinations.
9.2.5 At no time shall the weld identification number be marked on the weld material or on the weld fusion j zone.
! 9.3 In the event that an error in the weld identification number is made, or the wrong weld identification number is stamped, all urong numbers shall be "X" stamped and the correct num-
! bers marked.
l I i
1
Proc. No._ lst 1.1 gey, 1 Efje Virgtnta Corporation
{ ) of Richmonb Date: ' " /a , Page a of 16 9.4 'A final system walkdown will be performed upon completion of the preservice inspection at Waterford 3. In the event that an error has been made on the weld centerline location, no I
corrective action is required. If the weld centerline or veld identification number can not be located, the field supervisor shall be notified and he shall schedule restamping and re-examination.
l I l
i l
l l
l l
I l
l )
l l
_ _ . - . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ . , . , _ . - . _ _ ~ _ _ _ . . _ _ . _ . . _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ - _ . _ . _ . . . . _ __ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ . _
i
, , , , Prec.No. Ist 1.1 q,y 1 t
Efje Virgtuta Corporation of Richmont Date)/1/83 Page 9 Of 16 FIG. I
- Numbering Sequence for Replacement Welds i.
20-0 20-0 20-002)
(
(h O J l I 20-002-900 20-002-901 20-00) ,
20 p 1
{ i
[h l
l (Illustrative Only)
{
i i; .
Proc. No'- 1st 1.1 g** 1 Efje TTirginia Corporation :
OfEI@H10nD Date* 3/1/83 Page 10 Of 16 .
J FIG. 2 1 Numbering Sequence for Welds Designated for Hydrostatic Testing Only 22-021 22-022
. 22-025-600 5'
o .
q 22-023
}
22-024 22-026 22-025 22-027 22-030 A 22-028 00 22-029 l
l I (Illustrative Only)
t
, , , Proc.No. Ist 1.1 q,y ,
Efje Virgtuta Corporation 3/1/83 11 16 of Richmont Date: Page of FI G. 3 Designation of Longitudinal Seam Weld Areas for Class 2 Pipi'ng Examination 42-004-LA 42-003 42-001 sh 0 0' 1 1 i I
pgg l
l l sk ,
Npb6 (M
l l
Example 1: This area of the longitudinal weld shall be designated the number 42-002-LA-1.
Example 2: This area of the longitudinal weld shall be designated the number 42-002-LA-3.
l I (Illustrative Only)
, ,- , ~ ~ - --,,.r -,,-,,w---e--,--.e-- e -- - - - - , , , , , , - - - - - - - - - -
II .;
, , , Proc.NO. Ist 1 1 Rev. 1 Efje Virginia Corporation , 3
, Of E t$m0RD DQte* 3/1/83 PQg812 Of 16 FIG. 4 Designation for Longitudinal Welds in Tees26-004 l
\
26-OO3-LB \
\
26-002 26-OO3-LA g
/ \
\ /
^
I '
26-OO3-LC -
\ ,s
\ f
/
'\ ,.
\ '
\ -
\ /
N O
(Illustrative Only)
"' R ** '
EIJe Virginia Corporation Of RI4m02 Date- 3/1/83 Page 13 of16 I I FIG. 5 Centerline Marking for Horizontal and Vertical Pipelines k
Top Centerline of Horizontal Pipe g32-OOI
,32-002 Outside 2-003 i
For Vertical Pipe Outside Centerline of Bend in Direction of Lower Weld ID 1 (iO2-004 i
l 32-005 s
l k
l h (Illustrative Only)
w -
, , , Proc.No._1st 1.1 Rev- 1 Efje Ytrgtnta Corporation l
Of Richmottb Date- 3/1/83 Page l'+ of 16 FIG. 6 Centerline Marking for Vertical Runs Up from Tee or Branch Connection x i y
\ {47-002 i
C
^
V (h l
(Illustrative only)
.,,.,.._..__...-__.-__-..,_,,y, , , . . , . , . - _ _ _ . - - . , _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ - - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ,
, , , Proc. NO. Is1 1.1 g ,y, 1 Efje Virgtuta Corporation .
Of R(thmod Date' 3/1/83 Page is of16 FIG. 7 Centerline Marking for Vertical Runs Down from Tee or Branch Connection 48-001 48-003
[ 1 0
l l y
)Q.
I h
'48-002 ;
N b
(Illustrative Only)
"' '" " ' ' ' "
- v- '
Efje Virginia Corporation Of Rk$m08 Date" 3/1/83- Page 16 of 16 FIG. 8 Centerline Marking for Longitudinal Weids q_ _
v [34-001 O O2-L A G ',/
34-003 II ._
{
34-OO4-LA ^V
' )
1 34-005
, t -
4_
(Illustrative Only) r .
I f%
/ \
L g The (804) 346-0146 c
t i i (/ Virainia Corp.
., nw
- 3605 x.yland Court V \ %s/ Y Richmond, VA 23233 Procedure
Title:
Preservice Inspection Documentation EBASCO SCf!V!CES INC^RPCR e.T..3 .
n,u..y A$0U2.,CCE Procedure No.: ISI 1.2 5I
. . . . , ~ . . . . , , .
[ w w % ,cm Plant Site: Waterford #3 [] 'a-=~a
"""
- c
,r.+ emwi ,. n.en:
- *d am.'e:e,."'., "..% -u.
] Rekst4 un ..m. 1 se LOTE:
Customer: Louisiana Power and Light ,',"*" ,,,,,$, '. a',$, ;,l' [. ." "j*;
Ebasco Services. Inc. - Agent ** *e ace s*> im;e rea, %
and is y ,e .. % ,. ..,. ,,,,
y l
Approved for Use delharv er att va* .- .. <
imec,, e, . ., , .,4 O W" = ^ '-
1 N Virginia Corporation: I "****/.y,#,** A*a # '.*.- ,
J ,....y...............,...
Approved for Use DA :. .;kf[.[T.T.[ .
Customer: e Rev. O Date' . 1/?7/82 Rev. Date:
Prepared by: _b - O e Prepared by:
Reviewed by: b CS ^'--' - M E Reviewed by:
Reviewed by N_d _((M Reviewed by:
Customer:
Rev. 1 Date: 1/t /n q Rev. __ Date:
Prepared by: b ,' , db .a ,. Prepared by:
Reviewed by: OM w l.ulA Reviewed by:
Reviewed by* M Reviewed by:
Customer:
4//f/T3 '
Customer:
Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer:
Customer:
e= w u d m.-- - - - _ - _ ___ __- ----- -. - , - , - - - - , - - , - - - - - , , - , - - - - - - _ . _ . , - - , , - , . - - - - , - - - - -
Proc.No IST 12 Rev Efje Virgtuta Corporation ' 1 of Ricbment Date: 3/1/83 Page 1 of 37 { }
1.0 Scope 1.1 This document describes the methods, procedures, and special requirements for documenting and reporting the performance of nonmechanized, nondestructive preservice examination conducted in accordance with the requirements of Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
2.0 References 2.1 The Virginia Corporation of Richmond Procedure ISI 1.1, System Verification and Marking.
2.2 The Virginia Corporation of Richmond Program Plan -
Waterford #3.
2.3 The Vir81nia Corporation of Richmond ISI Procedures , g Waterford #3.
2.4 The Virginia Corporation of Richmond Quality Assurance Procedures - Waterford #3.
2.5 The Virginia Corporation of Richmond Administrative Pro-l cedures - Waterford #3.
l 2.6 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section XI, 1977 l Edition, with addenda through Summer 1978.
3.0 General Requirements 3.1 The type of examinations that are to be performed on all welds and/or areac of systems and components shall be fully defined in the Preservice Inspection Program Plan.
I 3.2 Included in the Preservice Inspection Program Plan are zone drawings which define the examination areas and locations in the various piping systems and components.
3.3 All examinations shall be conducted in accordance with ap-proved written procedures. The specific procedure to be utilized for each weld or item shall be defined in the Pre- I service Inspection Program Plan.
O O
.o e o n- r -w- - , , - , , - - -- --a ,,,-,,.--e---_,,,,--s- - - , . -- n
1 l
Proc. No. Ist 1.2 Rev' 1 EIJe Virgtnta Corporation q p of Echmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 2_.of 37 4
1 4.0 Datum Points 4.1 The "V" stamp mark on the weld shall be the zero datum point (start point) and indicates scan direction 7. The weld centerline "V" stamp mark locations are to be estab-lished in accordance with the requirements of the Virginia Corporation of Richmond procedure referenced in paragraph 2.1.
5.0 Data Recording 5.1 The locations of all reportable indications noted during the performance of nondestructive examination shall be recorded with reference to datum points established in accordance with paragraph 4.0.qf this document. ,
5.2 All measurements between a datum point and an indication shall be referenced to scan directions used for ultrasonic exami' nations.
5.3 The surfaces and scan directions for the performance of ultrasonic examination of circumferential welds in piping systems and horizontal vessels shall be in accordance with the following rules (reference figure 1).
5.3.I Surface five shall be the side of the weld in the direction of the lower weld identification number.
5.3.2 Surface two shall be the side of the werd in the direction of the higher weld identification number.
5.3.3 Scan direction five shall be from surface five looking in the direction of surface two.
5.3.4 Scan direction two shall be from surface two look-ing in the direction of surface five.
5.3.5 Scan direction seven shall be clockwise from the datum point when looking in scan direction five.
5.3.6 Scan direction eight shall be counterclockwise from the datum point when looking in scan direction
{ } five.
74* am e m - = . . . . . . - .
- - _ , . - , . - _ _ . _ . , _ . . . - -m.,.
Proc. No. Ist 1M Rev 1 Efje "t7trginia Corporation of Rictimonb Date: 3/1/a3 Page 3 of 37 4
)
5.4 The surface and scan directions for longitudinal welds in piping systems and horizontal vessels shall be in accord-ance with the followin8 rules (reference figure 2).
5.4.1 For lonnitudinal welds, rotate the scan pattern 90 counterclockwise when looking in the five direction as defined in paragraph 5.3.3 5.5 The surfaces and scan directions for circumferential welds in vertical vessels shall be in accordance with the follow-ing rules (reference figure 3).
5.5.1 Scan direction five shall be in the down direction when looking from the top of the vessel toward the bottom of the vessel.
5.5.2 Scan direction two shall be in the up directi,on when looking from the top of the vessel toward the bottom of the vessel.
5.5.3 Scan direction seven shall be in the clockwise
~
direction when looking from the top of the vessel toward the bottom of the vessel.
i 5.5.4 Scan direction eight shall be in the counterclock-wise direction when looking from the top of the vessel toward the bottom of the vessel.
l 5.6 The surfaces and scan directions for longitudinal welds in i vertical vessels shall be in accordance with the followi.:g rules (reference figure 4).
5.6.1 For longitudinal welds, rotate the scan pattern 90*
counterclockwise when looking in scan direction five as defined in paragraph 5.5.1.
5.7 The location of all reportable indications noted during the l performance of nondestructive examinations shall be re-l corded in accordance with the following rules:
5.7.1 The length and location of all indications parallel to the weld shall be recorded by the distance along the axis of the weld from the datum points to each
( end of the indication in the seven scan direction.
i
.s I
_ . _ - _ _ _. _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __. . _ . ~ .----
Proc. No. TST 1.2 Rev. 1 Efje Ergtuta Corporation l } OfR(Chment Date: 3/1/83 Page 4 of 37 5.7.2 The depth, width and location of all indications parallel to the weld shall be recorded by the perpendicular distance from the centerline of the weld to each side of the indication.
5.7.3 The length and location of all indications trans-verse to the weld shall be recorded by the perpen-dicular distance from the centerline of the weld to each end of the indication. The distance from the centerline to the ends of the indication shall be identif-ied as to the direction of measurement.
This shall be achieved by utilizing the scan direc-tion reference identities applicable to the side of the weld in conjunction with the measurement,(i.e.,
.5"(2), .3"(5), .2"(5), .4"(5), etc.) (Refer.ence
{ } figure 5).
5.7.4 The depth, width and location of all indications transverse to the weld shall be recorded by the distance along the axis of the weld from the datum point to each side of the indication.
6.0 Data Reporting 6.1 All information with respect to the performance of nonde-structive examinations shall'be reported on the appropriate form, and completed in accordance with the appropriate in-formation sheet (see paragraph 6.4 for appropriate form number =.)
6.2 Any information blocks that do not need to be filled out for the specific examination shall be marked not appli-cable, "N/A".
6.3 White-out or other correction fluid shall not be used on final data sheets. Any errors shall be marked through with a single line and initialled by the examiner. Addi-l I I tional corrections may be made by the Virginia Corporation m , -- - . , -,---n,, , ,,.n.- - . - n - - , - . ~
- - - Proc. No. Ist 1.2 gey. 1 Efje "t7ttginta Corporation -
Of Rf4 M Date' 3/1/83 Page s of 37 g Site Supervisor as long as the change does not directly affect the test results. This change shall be initia11ed I by the Virginia Corporation Site Supervisor and the Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector.
6.4 Form numbers (see attachments for completion requirements) 100 Series - Ultrasonic Data Reports UT-101 UT Examination Report UT-101a UT Examination Report Continuation Sheet UT-102 UT Examination Report Indication Record UT-103 UT Data Sheet for Studs and Bolts UT-104 UT Indication Record for Studs and Bolts UT-105 UT Data Sheet for Thickness Measurement UT-105a UT Data Sheet for Thickness Measurement - ,
Continuation Sheet i
UT-106 UT Data Sheet for Reactor Coolant Pump Flywheel UT-107 UT Indication Record for Reactor Coolant Pump Flywheel 200 Series - Liquid Penetrant Data Reports PT-201 Liquid Penetrant Examination Report PT-202 Liquid Penetrant Weld Indication Record PT-203 Liquid Penetrant Indication Record 300 Series - Magnetic Particle Data Reports MT-301 Magnetic Particle Examination Report MT-302 Magnetic Particle Weld Indication Record MT-303 Magnetic Particle Indication Record 400 Series - Visual Examination Data Reports VT-401 Visual Examination Report for VT-1 VT-402 Visual Examination Weld Indication Record VT-403 Visual Examination Indication Record
~
l
1 Proc. No. Ts1 1.2 Rey- i Efje "t7ttginta Corporation _
{ } of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 6 of 37 600 Series - Eddy Current Examination Data Reports ET-601 Eddy Current Calibration Sheet - " Thickness" e
B
--,----,,-e, , - - - - , . , .- r , , . - , - , - ---,--m,. . ,,,,,vn,,-,-- , -,,--------en-, ,yr-- --w-o,,-- --.-m,---.,e ,,_,-
TI:f.je "tTirginia Corporation Dote: 3/1/83 Page 7 of 37 of Richmonb FIG. I Circumferential Welds in Pipe and Horizontal Vessels WELD WELD WELD 22-002 22-003 22-004 I
5 SIDE 2 SIDE 5 SIDE 2 SIDE 5 SIDE 2 SIDE I
l I WELD WELD WELD 22-002 22-003 22-004 5 SCAN &
- 2 SCAN l
l 8 SCAN (Illustrative Only)
IIJB Yirginia CorporatiOH Of Mithm08 Date: 3/1/83 PGge 8 of 37 FIG. 2 Welds in Pipe and Horizontal Vessels WELD WELD 23-001 23-003 WELD 2 S10E 2 3- O O 2-L 5 SIDE C OJ ]
WELD WELD 23-001 23-003 2 3-O O 2-L 7 SCAN & -*--- 8 S CA N 5 SCAN c
(Illustrative Only)
, . , - . n,.. --e,--.., .-,,-,,,v -,-----n ---n.-en -.--m---------------w- - - -
1
, , , Proc.No.1st 1.2 q,y_ 1 Ef.je "t7ttginta Corporation of Eftbmont Date: 3/1/83 Page 9 of 37 1 l
l
)
l FI G. 3 Circumferential Welds in Vertical Vessels I
l I
l l
TOP / j l
l N_ l y24-001-L
-5 SCAN l l 24-o02
% ,r
- &7 SCAN d
j24-OO3-L
]
N 24-004 g24-005-L N I I (Illustrative Only)
-. . ,- , - . - - ----.,---,--,.---...,.-,.,,..-__,.-.--....---,.----,n.,.--._,,.
.._c,._ , , . , - . - , . , - , , , . , -
, . ~ . . -
, , Proc.NO._1st 1.2 q,y_ 1 Efje E,rgm, ta Corporation R isb M Date: 3/1/83 Page10 Of 37 FIG. 4 l Longitudinal Welds in Vertical Vessels
)
{
1 TOP i
- g25-OOI-L Q
25-002 %
+
-7 SCAN
. F 5 SCAN -2 SCAN a
-8 SCAN y 25-OO3-L 25-004 g25-005-L O w (Illustrative Only) i
, , , , Proc.No. 1sl 1.2 q,y, 1 tlEI.Je Virgtuta Corporation of RIthmOnth Date' 3/1/83 Page 11 of 37 .
l k l l
FIG. 5 Indication Recording i
f l EXAMPLE I
~
l 5 SIDE 4" (5) .2 " (5) 2 SIDE -
% )
.I
[ EXAMPLE 2 5 SIDE
"(5)I C/ T l
.5"(2)
\ %Y /
)
EXAMPLE I I I
(
+ .2
- When a transverse indication does not cross the center-line of a weld, the distance from each end of the indi-
- cation to the weld centerline shall- be recorded in
+ 2" +l reference to the side of the weld in which it is on.
.2" (5 side), .4" (5 side).
+ ,4,, *-
5 SIDE 2 SIDE EXAMPLE 2
/
a When a transverse indication does cross the centerline
/ . ,3
/ of a weld, the distance from each end of the indication 5" + to the weld centerline shall be recorded in reference I to the side of the weld in which it is on.
.3" (5 side), .5" (2 side).
- - 8" +
5 SIDE 2 SIDE F
~ . - - . , - . . - , , - - , - - - - , . - - -
, , , Proc.No ISI 1.2 q,y,1 Efje Virgtnta Corporation l } OfAIChmonb Date' 3/1/83 Page 12 of 37 ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION REPORT (Form UT 101)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Plant unit number -
- 4. Unit loop or zone identity (whichever is applicable)
- 5. Sketch or Iso number
- 6. Examination procedure number and appropriate revision and field change numbers
- 7. Examination surface (i.e. I.D., 0.D.)
- 8. Operator's signature and level certifying the examinations have been performed in accordance with the referenced procedure and field changes
- 9. Signature of VCR site supervisor, after reviewing data sheet i
- 10. Date of examination
- 11. Identity of component or system
- 12. Size of pipe, diameter and schedule
- 13. Weld type (i.e. butt, fillet)
}
- 14. Calibration block identification number
- 15. Couplant manufacturer, type, batch number
- 16. Search unit serial number
- 17. Search unit size
- 18. search unit frequency
- 19. Search unit angle as determined from IIW block
- 20. Instrument manufacturer
- 21. Instrument serial number
- 22. UT instrument reject control setting when calibrated.
If any change between 0*, 45" or 60* calibration, an additional ultrasonic examination data form shall be completed.
- 23. UT instrument damping control setting when calibrated.
If any change between 0*, 45' or 60* calibration, an additional ultrasonic examination data form shall be completed.
- 24. UT instrument frequency control setting
- 25. Model of UT instrument
- 26. UT instrument rep. rate control setting when calibrated. If any change between 0* , 45' or 60*
calibration, an additional ultrasonic examination data form shall be completed.
- 27. UT instrument filter control setting when calibrated.
If any change between 0* , 45* or 60* calibration, an additional ultrasonic examination data form shall be completed.
q ,
- 28. Search unit cable length.
b
, , , Proc.No. Ist 1.2 q,y_ 1 Efje Virgtuta Corporation of Richmonb Date; 3/1/83 Page 13 of n_
I I ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION REPORT (Form UT 101) cont'd Block No. Information Required ,
- 29. UT instrument video setting when calibrated.
If any change between 0* , 45' and 60' calibration, an additional ultrasonic examination data form shall be completed.
- 30. Indicate if continuation sheet (s) have been utilized for recording weld examination data.
- 31. Indicate if any field changes are applicable to the procedure utilized'for the performance of the examination. If none, enter none.
- 32. Enter calibration reference reflector location (i.e.1T, 2T, 3T or kT, hT, 3/4T) .
33., 35., 39. Enter signal amplitude from reference reflector as a percentage of FSH.
34., 36., 40. The location of the reference reflector signal { }
along the horizontal axis of the CRT screen (i.e.
sweep location).
j 37., 41. When required by procedure, enter the distance
! from the search unit sound exit point to the point on the block surface, vertically above the location of the reference reflector, when the search unit is positioned for the maximum reference response.
38., 42. When required by procedure, enter the distance from the search unit sound exit point to the point on the block surface, vertically above the location of the reference reflector, when the search unit is positioned to obtain a response of 50% of that from the reference respense.
l l 43. Total of all calibrated gain control settings used to establish DAC curve.
- 44. The time of initial calibration and subsequent calibration checks.
- 45. Enter sweap positions and amplitudes of calibration reflectors required for the examination, and complete l
the DAC as it would be represented on the CRT of the I
calibrated ultrasonic instrument.
l 46. Enter additional comments or sketches, if necessary, to i
aid in the interpretation of the examination. If I
additional comments or sketches are not necessary, "not applicable" (N/A) shall be written in the blank. { l l
t
- ^ ^
t Ultros n.ic Excminstien Report Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Iso / Drawing No.~
p j w \~ .t z 5 + 5
{ Q Virginia Corp. Procedure Exam Suriace Examiner / Level '
VCR Supervisor Date Y otakhmend 6 'T g 9 JO
%M Component / Piping System Pipe Size Weld Type Cal. Block i Couplant: 15' l.1 12 13 f.4- Type Batch No Continuation Sheet Attached Trnnadiscor - 0* 45' 60* T n a r riimon e Yes No 30 S/N f6 I& I6 Mfer. 20 Mndai &
Field Changes: :.:.;.:.
Size f7 27 f7 S/N 21 RenRate 26 Yes No 31 i:M:!: Freniiency 18 Je f8 Reiect 22, Filter 2. 7 l
If Yes, Number Romm Ano1, 19 IT E9 Damn 25 Coax 28 Calibration O* 2&5 Sean 7&8 Scan Freo. 24 Vfdon 27 Calibration Sound Entry Sound Entry Calibration Checks Signal Point To: Signal Point To: 0* 45" 60*
Reflector Signal Amp. Sweep Amp. Sweep Scribe 50% Amp. Sweep Scribc 50% In out In out In out Location Line DAC Line DAC i
37- 33 54- 35 34 37 3 B 39 40 +1 42. 4+
I 1
l :d Ref. dB f3 ,
+5 -
f3 ,
10 -
DAC 10 ~
DAC 10 DAC Additional Comments / Sketch l
8 .
8 .
8 .
l i6 6 6 W
45 45 g 4 - 4 .
4 .
2 -
2 -
2
{0 0 -
0 -
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 l 1 ;
Form UT-101 2/82 i
- * - Proc. bhi_IS1 1.2 q ,y, i Efje Virgittia Corporation Of RIthmottb Date: 3/1/83 Page 14 of 37 iIll ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION REPORT - CONTINUATION SHEET (Form UT 101a)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Plant unit number
- 4. Unit loop or zone identity (whichever is applicable)
- 5. Sketch or Iso. number
- 6. Examination procedure number and appropriate revision anf field change numbers
- 7. Examination surface (i.e. I.D., 0.D.)
- 8. Operator's signature and level certifying the examinations have been performed in accordance with the referenced procedure and field changes
- 9. Signature of VCR site supervisor, af ter reviewing data i sheet
- 10. Date of examination
- 11. Identity of component or system
- 12. Size of pipe, diameter and schedule { }
- 13. Weld type (i.e. butt, fillet)
- 14. Calibration block identification number
- 15. Couplant manufacturer, type, batch number
- 16. The identity (as given on the referenced Iso.)
of the weld being examined.
- 17. Indicate that the required straight beam examination of the area to be examined has been performed, partially performed or not performed. (i.e.
Yes, Par., No) 18., 19., 20. Indicate here that the required angle beam examinations have been performed, partially performed or not performed. (i.e. Yes, Par.,
No)
- 21. Indicate here that the required calibrated straight beam examination has been performed, partially performed, or not. performed. (i.e.
Yes, Par., No)
- 22. Enter any limitations preventing the performance of the required examinations such as obstructions due to pipe supports, valves, etc. Indicate approximate extent of limitation.
- 23. Indicate the condition of the base mccal adjacent to the weld. (i.e. smooth, as cast, hand ground, etc.)
- 24. Indicate the condition of the weld surfaces.
(i.e. as welded, ground flat) { l
l Proc.No. ISI 1.2 q,y, 1 i EIje "t7ttgtnta Corporation '
{ OfRIChm0nb Date.' 3/1/83 Page.l.s_ of 37 l
ULTRASCNIC EXAMINATION REPORT - CONTINUATION SHEET (Form UT 101a) cont'd l
Block No. Information Required
- 25. Indicate the results of the examination by inserting "NI", "NRI" or "RI" in accordance with the referenced procedure in block No. 6. j
- 26. Indicate the results of the visual examination performed prior to the ultrasonic examination. The results shall be reported by inserting the notation
" Sat." for satisfactory, or "Unsat." for unsatisfactory i results. If "Unsat" results are recorded, a Visual l Examination Indication Record, Form VT 402, shall be completed.
- 27. Indicate any information necessary to explain unusual examination problems. The presence of any geometric reflectors, as determined by the reference procedure, shall be noted here with an explanation of approximate extent. (i.e. root geometry 100% DAC 360*)
l I I I
. - - - - - . y - , - - - - - , - __----m---
9_.- , -
.,p .--,
Ultrasonic Examination Report - Continuation Sheet Page of Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Iso / Drawing No.
Q j w \w L 2 3 + S g - \/ Virginia Corp. Procedure Exam Surface Examiner / Level VCR Supervisor Date y
~
of akhmond b 7 8 9 IO
%s Corr.ponent/ Piping System Pipe Size Weld Type Cal. Block Couplant: Type & Batch #
- 11. .L2 .L 5 .t+ 15 Base Surface Condition i
Jeld :i:${:i: Metal Scan Direction -
Base Examination Results No. :::rg:: Scan 2 5 7&8 0 Inspection Limitations Metal Weld UT Visual Remarks LG 17 18 19 to 2L 22 23 24 25 26 27 i
'1 i
l i
I i
l I
i i
}
i s-------o- h
Proc.No. Ist 1.2 gey, 1 tlEfje Virgtnta Corporation 9 Of 3Eighn10Hb () ate
- 3/1/83 Page 16 of 37 ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION REPORT INDICATION RECORD (Form UT 102)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Plant unit number
- 4. Unit loop or zone identity (whichever is applicable)
- 5. Examination procedure number, including appropriate revisiens and field change numbers
- 6. Operator's signature and level certifying the examinations have been performed in accordance with the referenced procedure and field changes.
- 7. Signature of VCR site supervisor, after reviewing data sheet i
- 8. Date of examination
- 9. Identity of component or system
- 10. Sketch or isometric number
- 11. Calibration block identification number
- 12. The identity (as given on the referenced Iso.) of the weld being examined
- 13. If more than one indication is found in any given G weld, each indication shall be given a number, i.e.
(Ind. 1, 150*-155*), (Ind. 2, 170*-175*).
- 14. Record the maximum signal response from the indication either as a percentage of DAC (i.e. 90% DAC) or in terms of the attenuation required to reduce the signal amplitude to the DAC level. (i.e. 100% DAC
& [- 8dB]) .
- 15. -
Measure and record the distance from the reference datum point or weld (g to the nearest end of the indication at the point where the signal has reduced to 50% of maximum response.
- 16. Similarly, measure and record the distance from the datum point or weld (, , but from the furthest end of the indication.
- 17. Measure and record the distance from the sound entry point to the referenced datum point or weld (L at the minimum depth location
- 18. Measure and record the sound path distance (sweep reading) to the half amplitude point of the reflector nearest to the surface.
- 19. Measure and record the distance f rom the sound entry point to the referenced datum point or weld 46 at the maximum depth location
- 20. Measure and record the sound path distance to the half amplitude point of the reflector f arthest from the surf ace (i.e. maximum depth) l l
l ces-, ._ .- _ __-- =_,
~
Proc. No. TsT 1.7 Rev.1 TEf.Je 17ttgtuta Corporation of Ristimonb Date: 3/1/e3 Page lZ.of 37 4 g ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION REPORT INDICATION RECORD (Form UT 102) cont'd Block No. Information Required
- 21. Record the search unit refracted angle in the material as calculated on the IIW block
- 22. Indicate the direction that the search unit is '
pointing when recording the indication (i.e. 2.5,7, 8)
- 23. Measure and record the thickness of the base metal on the 2 side of the weld.
- 24. Measure and record the thickness of the weld at or near the centerline of the weld
- 25. Measure and record the thickness of the base metal on the 5 side of the weld
- 26. Record any information necessary to help characterize the indication I
9
i O O C1
Ultrasonic Examination Report -indication Record
~'
i /p%\ -
2 y l w Am Customer 1
Plant
.~ . 2 Unit 3
Loop / Zone 4
i L \,/
V_irginia Corp. etoceauro examinerftoy,1- vca Supervisor -. Date j . wi .a4 y 4 7 .g NM Component / Piping System
.{
^
ISO Drawing No. Cal. Standard No./ Thickness 9 10 .f.L Indication Minimum Depth Maximum Depth Base Metal Base Metal Weld Ind Max.% Length S.U. Sweep S.U. Sweep Beam Beam Thickness Weld Thickness .
I No. No. DAC From To Pos. Reading Pos; Reading Angle Dir. 2 Side rhick. 5 Side Rerarks -
4 4
j sz ss .s.+ 1r is 17 za is ao 21 zz z.s z+ as as a
l 1
i i
i i
j 1
i j
1 A
, I I c.. ..,,en n oa
Proc. bk). IS1 1.2 Rev 1
.EI)e 't7ttstnia Corporatiott OfR(t$m0Rb DQte: 3/1/83 Page18 of 37 h ULTRASONIC DATA SHEET FOR STUDS AND BOLTS I
(Form UT-103) l Block No.. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Unit number
- 4. Unit loop or zone ide..tity (whichever is applicable:
- 5. Examination procedure number, including appropriate revisions and field change numbers
- 6. Operator's signature and level, certifying the examinations have been performed in accordance with the reference procedure and field change
- 7. Date of examinatien
- 8. Identity of component or system
- 9. Sketch or Iso. number
- 10. VCR supervisor signature after reviewing data sheets
- 11. Calibration block identification number 12., 13., & 14. Check appropriate surface used for calibration
- 15. Transducer serial number
- 16. Transducer size
- 17. Transducer frequency
- 18. Transducer beam angle
- 19. Transducer wave mode (longitudinal or shear)
- 20. Ultrasonic instrument manufacturer
- 21. Ultrasonic instrument serial number
- 22. Ultrasonic instrument reject control setting when calibrated
- 23. Ultrasonic instrument damping control setting when calibrated 24 Ultrasonic instrument frequency control setting when calibrated
- 25. Ultrasonic instrument video setting when cali-brated
- 26. Ultrasonic instrument model identification 27 Ultrasonic instrument rep. rate control setting when calibrated
- 28. Ultrasonic instrument filter control setting when calibrated
- 29. Douplant type and batch number
- 30. Coa Coaxial cable length and type of connectcr (i.e.,
BNC to BNC, BNC to MD, etc.)
31., 32., 33.,
& 34 Enter signal amolitude from reference raflactar as a percentage of FSH h
--mm-
Proc. No. Ts1 1.2 gey' 1 EIJe Yttstnia Corporation I ) of Rf46 Date' 3/1/83 Page 19 of 37 ULTRASONIC DATA SHEET FOR STUDS AND BOLTS l (Form UT-103) cont'd.
- 35. & 36. Total of all calibrated gain control settings used to establish DAC curve 37., 38., 39.,
& 40. The location of the reference reflector signal along the horizontal axis of the CRT screen (i.e.,
sweep location)
- 41. Signal to noise ratio between the threaded area and the reference notch reflector at the refer-ence dB
- 42. The time of initial calibration and subsequent calibration checks
- 43. The identify of material being tested
- 44. & 45. tadicate the results of the examination in accord-ance with,the referenced procedure in block,no. 5
- 46. In,dicates any unusual examination problems
- 47. & 48. Indicate the results of the visual examination performed prior to the ultrasonic examination
{ f M
l
Ts ULTRASONIC DATA SHEET ";i g u The 1 (f VirginiO Corp. FOR '- {
yv, e . ..... .
STUDS & BOLTS f- -
Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone 1 2 3 4 d Procedure Examiner / Level Date
[ 6 Y E.
Component / Piping System B
ISO Drawing No.
9 VCR Supervisor I.
10 .
CAllBRATION BLOCK TRANSDUCER INSTRUMENT ._
Col. Block No. j.I S/N IS .M onu. 20 Model 26 -
4g CALIBRATION SURFACE Size J6 S/N Zl Rep Rote 27
$g Flat End 12. Freq . f.7 Reject 22 Filter 28
-1 Groved End f. "3 Beom Angle 18 Domp 23 Couplant. "-
Other: 14 Wove Mode fg Freq 24 B otchNo.- g j
~
Long O Sheor O Video 26 Coax 30 b C ALIBR ATION DAC Point "A" 31 %FSH REF DB 38 Sweep Posillon 3Y DAC Point "B " 32 ,
%FSH
~
,ilkweep Position 3A . p DAC Point "C " 33 *4FSH REF DB -6
~
Sweep Position 39 ]-
DAC Point "D" 34- %FSH Sweep Position 40 ]
Signal To Noise Rotio 45 - -
Calibrollon Checks I 42
_ . . t;%5 .
IN OUT k.
IN OUT <
....:....gs:.....l..:.sgs:.Jc:::4:35:.....: ..:*!sss:.u:;:;:.ss.susi:4 in ouT 2 ITEM NO. ,, * " " " , ,
EXAMINATION RESULTS
(
COMMENTS 4 4.3 44- +5 4-6' 47 48 'i 9
r- :
i i:
9!
N!
L L
ge 8
s
!.E e
VCR F orm - U T -lO3 ( rev.1, 8 /82)
- i- --
Proc. No. ~ISI 1.2 Rev. 1 Efje Virgtuta Corporation us OfRiChm0Hb DGt0 3/1/83 Page 20.of 37 i
ULTRASONIC INDICATION RECORD FOR STUDS AND BOLTS (Form UT 104)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name ,
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Unit number
. 4. Unit icop or zone identity (whichever is applicable)
- 5. Examination procedure number, including appropriate revisions and field change numbers
- 6. Operator's signature and level certifying the examinations have been performed in accordance with the reference procedure and field change
. 7. Date of examination
- 8. Identity of component or system
- 9. Sketch or Iso. number
- 10. Signature of VCR site supervisor, af ter reviewing data sheet I
- 11. Record maximum indication signal amplitude G 12.
13.
Record indication depth from examination surface Enter indication location from one end, indication radial and/or circumferential location, and length of indication
- 14. Indicate by the use of a sketch, the approximate location of indication.
l
em y gm Ultrasonic Indication Record g i/ Virginia Corp. tor y l l
\ %d / of Rklunond Studs B Bolts Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone 1 L 3 +
Procedure Examiner / Level Date 5 6 7 Component / Piping System Iso / Drawing No. VCR Supervisor S 9 10 Indication Signal Amplitude II Indication Depth 12.
Indication Location 13 Indicate by sketch below approximate location of indication.
.L+
i l l l Form UT-lo+ 2/82
ISI 1.2 Proc.No. q,y, 1 EIje E,rginta Corporation l ) of W*bmonb Date.'- 3/1/83 Pagel.l_of 37 ULTRASONIC. DATA SHEET FOR THICKNESS MEASUREMENT (Form UT 105)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Unit number
- 4. Unit loop or zone number (whichever is applicable)
- 5. Identity of component or system
- 6. Operator's signature and level, certifying that the examinations have been performed in accordance with the reference procedure and field change
- 7. Date of examination
- 8. Examination procedure number, including appropriate revisions and field change numbers
- 9. Sketch or Iso. number
- 10. Signature of VCR site supervisor af ter reviewing data sheet
- 11. Indicate if there. is a continuation sheet attached or not
- 12. Instrument manufacturer
- 13. Model of UT instrument
- 14. Instrument serial number l l 15. UT instrument reject control setting when calibrated
- 16. UT instrument damping control setting when calibrated
- 17. UT instrument frequency control setting
- 18. UT instrument rep. rate control setting when calibrated
- 19. UT instrument filter control setting when calibrated
- 20. UT instrument video setting when calibrated
- 21. Couplant manufacturer, type, batch number
- 22. Transducer manufacturer
- 23. Transducer size
- 24. Transducer frequency
- 25. Transducer serial number
- 26. Length and type of coaxial connector
- 27. Reference gain setting 28.
Enter calibration block thickness when using only one thickness to calibrate. Enter thinner calibration b1nck thickness when using more than one material thickness for calibration
- 29. Enter only thicker calibration block thickness when using two calibration thicknesses
- 30. Enter calibrated range of instrument in inches
- 31. Enter times of initial, verification and final calibrations
- 32. The identity (as given on the reference iso.) of the weld being examined
- 33. All thickness readings recorded shall be referenced to the actual location of the reading by means of a sketch or sketches on the report form l I
Proc.No. IS1 1.2 _acy ,
EI)e Yttginta Corporation of Richmonb Date: , /1/a, Page.22_of 37 q g ULTRASONIC DATA SHEET FOR THICICESS MEASUREMENT l
(Form UT 105)
Block No.
Information Required
- 34. Enter thickness reading taken directly on the weld '
- 35. Enter thickness reading taken on the scan 2 side
- 36. Enter thickness reading taken on the scan 5 side
- 37. Use this space for drawing sketches to identify measuring points I l
~
8\
p s=
p Ultrasonic Data Sheet
\ for M,1Virgjn{ Corp. ,
Thickness Measurement Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Component / Piping Sy em Examiner / Level Data Iso / Drawing No. VCR Supervisor Continuation Sheet Attached IProcedure B 9 .f.O t 1 yee 11 t 1 'No Equipment Instrument Transducer Calibration lMfgr. 12 Mfgr. Size Cal. Block 28 l Model 2 23 lS/N 13 Cal. Block ze
.i 4- Freq. Range Cal. .30 l Reieet 15 N )
l Damp. I6 Calibration Checks I Serial No. g l Freq.
I7 3I.
l Rep. Rate 18 Coax. Cable l Filter 19 ,
l Video 20 cain i
l Couplant 21 7 l
m Examination Results Weld Meas. Reading Reading Reading Weld Mcas. Reading Reading Reading iNumber Point Weld. Scan 2 Scan 5 Number Point Weld Scan 2 Scan 5 I
I 32 33 3+ 35 36 3 2. 33 34- 35 36 I
l I
E I
I ,
i I
i l
l Sketch / Identification p Form UT-lo5 3/82
, , , Proc. No. Is1 1. 2 Rev 1 Efje "t7ttstnia Corporation of Ri@tnonb Date' 3/1/83 Page 23 of 37 g ULTRASONIC DATA SHEET FOR THICKNESS MEASUREMENT g (Form UT 105a)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Unit number
- 4. Unit loop or zone (whichever is applicable)
- 5. Identity of component or system
- 6. Operator's signature and level certifying that the examinations have been performed in accordance with the reference procedure and field change
- 7. Date of examination
- 8. Examination procedure number, including appropriate revisions and field change numbers
- 9. Sketch or Iso. number
- 10. Signature of VCE site supervisor after reviewing data sheet
- 11. Enter identity (as given on the reference Iso.) of the weld being examined
- 12. All thickness readings recorded shall be referenced to the actual location of the reading by means of sketch or sketches .
on the report form
- 13. Enter thickness reading taken directly on the weld
- 14. Enter thickness reading taken on the scan 2 side
- 15. Enter thickness reading taken on the scan 5 side l
- 16. Use this space for drawing sketches to identify measuring points F
1
)
O 1 i
l 1
--.-..--n.
mis jeg Ultrasonic Data Sheet A b ** for
\/ /D.jn M M P* Thickness Measurement O "
Continuotion Page _ of_
Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone
.L 2. 3 4 Component / Piping System Examiner / Level Date f & Y Procedure Iso / Drawing No. VCR Supervisor Examination Results Weld Meas. Reading Reading Reading Weld Meas. Readi.ng Reading Reading Number Point Weld Sean 2 Scan 5 Number Point Weld Scan 2 ' " Senn 5 LL .t. 2. 13 14- 15 11 12. 13 L+ 15 O
Sketch / Identification 16 O
Form UT-lo5 a 3/82
' ~
IProc. bh)._ 1st 1.2 Rey 1 Efje "tTirgtuta Corporation of Echment Date: 3/1/83 Page 24 of 37 I I UT DATA SHEET FOR REACTOR COOLANT PUMP FLYWHEEL I (Form UT-106)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Plant unit number
- 4. Hait loop or zone identity (whichever is appli-cable)
- 5. Identity of component
- 6. Operator's signature and level certifying the examinations have been performed in accordance with the referenced procedure and field changes
- 7. Date of examination
- 8. Examinati.on procedure number and appropriate revision and field change numbers
- 9. Sketch or iso. number
- 10. Signature of VCR supervisor after reviewing data
- 11. Transducer serial number
- 12. Transducer size
- 13. Transducer frequency
- 14. Transducer angle
- 15. Transducer wave mode (longitudinal or shear)
- 16. Instrument manufacturer
- 17. Instrument serial number
- 18. UT instrument reject control setting when cali-brated
- 19. UT instrument damping control setting when cali-brated
- 20. UT instrument frequency control setting when calibrated
- 21. UT instrument video setting when calibrated
- 22. Model of GT instrument
- 23. UT instrument rep. rate control setting when calibrated
- 24. UT instrument filter control setting when cali-brated
- 25. Coax cable length and type of connector (i.e.,
BNC to BNC, BNC to MD, etc.)
- 26. Couplant type and batch number
- 27. The time of initial calibration and subsequent calibration checks
- 28. Enter signal amplitude from near hole as a per-centage of FSH
Proc. No.- Ts1 1.2 gey 1
, g Efje Virgtnta Corporation Of Ri4d D0t8 3/1/83 pagg 25,_of 37 i
UT DATA SHEET FOR REACTOR COOLANT PUMP FLYWHEEL I (Form UT-106) cont'd.
- 29. Enter signal amplitude from far hole as a per-centage of FSH
- 30. Total of all calibrated gain control settings used to establish DAC curve
- 31. & 32. The location of the near and far hole reflector signals along the horizontal axis of the CRT screen (i.e., sweep position)
- 33. Pump number being examined
- 34. & 35. Results of the examination
- 36. Indicate any unusual examination problems I l
'-- --yv-- - _ . . . .,.-m-.,.-w.-- w,yeme - - * - - .w--y _v.y---..----,w-_-e.
/"% 1m ULTR ASONIC DATA SHEET b / t FOR I \/ Yrginia 1 Corp. REACTOR COOLANT PUMP l
\ / ***" "# FLYWHEEL I
Customer Plont Unit Loop / Zone Component Examiner / Level Date b b Y-Procedure ISO Drawing No. VCR Supervisor TRANSDUCER INSTRUMENT Colibration Checks 27 S/N 11 M onu. 16 Model Site 22 In ui LL S/N f4 RepRote 25 Fren f3 Reject 18 Filter I" Beam Angle f4-24* k"' -
Domp 18F Coax 28 in Out Wove : 45 Freq 20 Couplant long O shear O video g in 22 Botch No ut C AllB R ATIO N Neor Hole 28 %FSH Sweep Position 31 For Hole ZT %FSH Sweep Position 32-Ref. Goin 30 _d B EX AMIN ATION RESULTS FLYWH EEL R esults DESIGNATION NRI RI COMMENTS -
33 34 35 36 l
l l
l I
i O
VC R FORM - UT-lOS (Rev. O, 8/82)
Proc. No. Ts1 1.2 Rey Efje "t7ttstuta Corporation i I I of 3Ric% nun 2 Date: 3/1/83 Page 26 of 37 1
UT INDICATION RECORD FOR REACTOR COOLANT PUMP FLYWHEEL l
~
(Form UT-107)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Plant unit number
- 4. Unit loop or zone identity (whichever is appli-cable)
- 5. Examination procedure number and appropriate revisions and field changes
- 6. Operator's signature and level certifying the examination was performed in accordance with the referenced procedure and field changes
- 7. Date the examination was performed -
- 8. Identity of component j g 9. Sketch or iso, number
- 10. Signature of VCR supervisor after reviewing data
- 11. Amplitude of the indication
- 12. Locat' ion of the indication
- 13. Draw approximate location of indication
f% ULTRASONIC INDICATION g [i- , ]* RECORD FOR
\ y V,irginio Corp.
- Of Richmond RE ACTOR COOLANT PUMP I
%J FLYWHEEL Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone 1 2 3 4 Procedure Examiner / Level Date 5 6 .7 Component ISO Drawing No. VCR Supervisor Indicotion Signal Amplitude II.
Indicotion Location 17
- Indicate on Sketch Below Approximate Location of Indication, A A l I 13
% k f \
( )
+
h i I l VCR F OR M - UT -107 (Rev O, 8/82)
Proc.No ISl 1.2 q ,, 1 EIJe "tTirstma Corporatiott l ) Of RI4:llellt Date' 3/1/83 Page 27 of 37 LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION REPORT (Form PT 201)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Unit number
- 4. Unit loop or zone identity (whichever is applicable)
- 5. Examination procedure number, including appropriate revisions and field change numbers
-6. Operator's signature and level certifying the examinations have been performed in accordance with the reference procedure and field change
- 7. Date of cxamination
- 8. Identity of component or system
- 9. Sketch or Iso number
. 10. Signature of VCR site supervisor, af ter reviewing data sheet
- 11. Manufacturer of family grouping
{ ) 12. Material designation, i.e. Spoecheck Dubl-check
- 13. Material type and batch no. for penetrant, i.e. l DP-51/80F813
- 14. Material type and batch no. for developer, i.e.
D-100/21J674
- 15. Material type and batch number for remover, i.e.
DR-60/60H425
- 16. The weld identification (as given on the reference
, Iso., if applicable) of the veld or itec being examined
- 17. Identify any conditions affecting the performance o the examination
- 18. Enter the results of the examination by inserting a check in "NRI" if no reportable indications are found, or a check in "RI" if reportable indications are found. If the "RI" block is checked, complete a form PI' 202 for indication record.
- 19. Indicate here the results of performing an examination in accordance with the requirements of ISI 5.1. The results of the visual examination shall be recorded by inserting a check in i
satisfactory (" Sat.") or unsatisf actory
("Unsat.") block, whichever is applicable. If l "unsat." is checked, complete a Visual Examination l Indication Record, form VT 402 or VT 403 l I
/O\ Liquid Penetrant y , . 1 n,.
1 \/ Virginia Corp.
1 Examinat, ion Report g ;
gmm.d7 e'skww Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone 1 2 3 +
Procedure Examiner / Level Date 5 6 7 Component / Piping System ISO Drawing No. VCR Supervisor B 9 10
, i:M8 Hanufacturer Type ,
Batch No.
Penetrant II IE I3 Developer -- --f g J2 fg.
Remover ff $A f$
Weld / Item PT Results VT Results Number Comments NRI RI SAT. UNSAT.
14, 17 18 18 19 19 A ,
4 b
Fom PT-2of 2/82
Proc.No. IsI 1.2 gey 1 Efje "t7trginia Corporation O of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page.la.of 37 l l
LIQUID PENETRANT WELD INDICATION RECORD (Form PT-202)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name 3'. Unit number
- 4. -
Unit loop or zone identity (whichever is applicable)
- 5. Examination procedure number, including appropriate revisions and field change numbers
- 6. Operator's signature and level certifying the examinations have been performed in accordance with the reference procedure and field change
- 7. Date of examination
- 8. Identity of component or system
- 9. Signature of VCR site supervisor, after reviewing data sheet g G 10.
11.
The identity (as given on the reference drawing) of the weld to be examined Sketch or Iso, number
- 12. Draw approximate size and location of indication in relation to weld
- 13. Identify any conditions relating to the indication (s) drawn in space 12 e
9 l
l
/"'Ag n. .
L.iquid Penetront p
i Virginia Corp.
\,/ j .iniwa Weld Indication Record I
\ % as r >l Plant Unit Loop / Zone Customer L 2 3 +
Examiner / Level Date Procedure 7 Component / Piping System VCR Supervisor ISO / Drawing No.
Weld No.
.10 11-
- Circumferential Length of Weld :
- _. Start Point Liquid Penetrant Inspection i I I I I I I I g
i i I
.__ ._. _ + _ _ ._. _ + _ _ _ _ . _ , _ _ _ _
l w id f2
_.___+_____,.____4_.___
e , ,
1 I I I I I I I 0* 90* 180* 270* 360*
Remarks 13 que Fem MT.ama 2/82
Proc. No. Is1 1.2 q,y 1 Eije "t7ttstnia Corporation 3 of Richmont Date.' 3/1/83 Page 29 of 37 LIQUID PENETRANT INDICATION RECORD l
(Form PT-203)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Unit number
- 4. Unit loop or zone number
- 5. Examination procedure number, including appropriate revisions and field change numbers
- 6. Operator's signature and level, certifying that the examination has been performed in accordance with the referenced procedure and field change
- 7. Date of examination
- 8. Identity of component or system
- 9. Signature of VCR site supervisor af ter reviewing data sheet
- 10. Enter identity of the item being examined
- 11. Sketch or Iso, number (if applicable)
- 12. Use this area to sketch the location and dimensions of the l l indica tion
- 13. Use this area for any comments pertinent to the examination 8
J\5~
b b Liquid Penetrant i \/ Vr ,
g *1 / ginia
.a - Corp. ,Ind.icat. ion Record i >
Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone L 2 3 +
Procedure Examiner / Level Date Component / Piping System VCR Supervisor Item No. ISO / Drawing No.
l 12 I l F
Comments:
15 PT-203
1 1
l I ) Mt Yitginia Corpor8tIGH of Ric$ntonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 30 of 37 - - -
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION REPORT (Form MT 301)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Unit number
- 4. Unit loop or zone identity (whichever is applicable)
- 5. Examination procedure number, including appropriate .
revisisons and field change numbers
- 6. Operator's signature and level certifying the examinations have been performed in accordance with the refekence procedure and field change.
- 7. Signature of VCR site supervisor, af ter reviewing data 8 sheet
- 8. Date of examination
- 9. Identify of component or system
- 10. Sketch or Iso, number
- 11. Condition of surface, (i.e. smooth, as cast,
{ } etc.)
- 12. Enter, or check in the appropriate blank, the type of particles being used for the examination
- 13. The manufacturer of the particles being used
- 14. Type of particles being used, i.e. 8A 15.
Batch number of magnetic particles
- 16. Type of magnetizing current being used for examination
- 17. The manufacturer of the magnetizing unit
- 18. ,
Type or model of magnetizing unit being used for the examination
- 19. The serial number of the magnetizing unit
- 20. Check appropriate blank when using continuous or residual magnetization
- 21. If using coil, enter the amount of amperage used and the number of turns in the coil used during examination
- 22. If using prods, enter the tip spacing in inches and the amperage used
- 23. If using yoke, enter the pole spacing in inches
- 24. The identity (as given in the referenced Iso. , if l applicable) of the weld or item being examined
- 25. Identify any conditions affecting tne perrormance of the examinations. Describe any reporatable indications, or identify any separate sheet or photograph utilized to record indications.
l l
Proc No. ISI 1.2 p,y, 1 EIJe TTirstma Corporatiott ' '
Of R 4 M Date'-- 3 /1/R3 Page 31 of 37 h 1 1
MAGNETI'C PARTICLE EXAMINATION REPORT (Form MT 301)
Block No. Information Required
- 26. Enter the results of the examination by inserting a check in "NRI" if no reportable indications are found, in "RI" if reportable indications are found. If the "RI" block is
, checked, complete a form MT-302 for indication record.
- 27. Indicate here the results of performing an )
l examination in accorance with the requi.rements i of ISI 5.1. The results of the visual examination l shall be recorded by inserting a check in the l satisf actory (" Sat.") or unsatisfactory ("Unsat.")
block, whichever is applicable. If "Unsat."
is checked., complete a Visual Examination I Indication Record, form VT 402 or VT 403 O
l l
O
-- ,..%, - -p-- - - - - - - yryi -w-w--- -
--w----v ---w-
/e%\1 The Magnetic Porticle g Virginia Corp.
O i/
g%.s*/
i a' *ha'ad Examination Report Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure Examiner / Level VCR Supervisor Date 5 6 7 o Component /Pipiny, System ISO Drawinn No. Surface Condition 9 to 11 Type of Particles 12 Manufacturer Type Batch Number Wet Dry Visible Flourescent 13 14- ,[F Current 1(a Machine Mfr. Type /Model l Serial No.
AC DC HWDC 17 ,{$ l JT Magnetization Coil Prods Yoke 20 continuous 21 Amps. 2 2. Spacing 25 Spacing Residual No. Turns Amps.
Weld / Item Comments NRI RI Sat Unsat 2+ 25 26 26 27 27 O
O
. . es Fonn MT.5cl ?/82
l II)2 Yirginia CorporatiOH Of MChttt0!!b DQte: 3/1/83~ Page 32 of_37 l I MAGNETIC PARTICLE WELD INDICATION RECORD (Form MT 302)
Block No. Information Required l 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Unit number
- 4. Unit loop or zone identity (whichever is applicable)
- 5. Examination procedure number, including appropriate revisions and field change numbers
- 6. Operator's signature and level certifying that the examinations have been performed in accordance with the referenced procedure and field change
- 7. Date of examinations
- 8. Identity of component or system l 9. Signature of VCR site supervisor, af ter reviewing data sheet i
- 10. The identity (as given on the reference Iso.) of the weld being examined
- 11. Sketch or Iso number
- 12. Draw approximate size and location of indication in relation to weld
- 13. Identify any conditions relating to the indication (s) l drawn in space 12.
l l
l I l
/ \a Magnetic Particle p p n.
I I g i/ Virginia Corp.
N % ws /
- Weld Indication Record Customer Plant ' Unit Loop / Zone 1 2 3 4 Procedure Examiner / Level Date 5 6 7 -
Component / Piping System VCR Supervisor Wald No. ISO / Drawing No.
- Circumferential Length of Weld ,
- Start Point Magnetic Particle Inspection i I I I I I I I 1
l 1 e
._ _ _._ + _ _ _ _ +____s ____
i weld
))
- _____+____+____4____
t a
I I I I I I I I 0* 90* 180* 270* 360*
Remarks
.f. 3 i
.+
Form MT 3 0 2
- ~ . . . .. . . . .. _ _ _, ray
- . ~ . . _ . . _ _ , _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
Proc. No. IS1 1.2 Rev- 1 -
tlEIje E,rgtuta Corporation of Richmonb Date: '3/1J83 Page 33 of 37 I I MAGNETIC PARTICLE INDICATION RECORD I
(Form MT-303)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Unit number
- 4. Unit loop or zone number
- 5. Examination procedure number, including appropriate revisions and field change number
- 6. Operator's signature and level, certifying that the examination has been performed in accordance with the reference procedure and field change
- 7. Date of examination
- 8. Identity of component or system
- 9. Signature of VCR site supervisor, af ter reviewing data sheet
- 10. Enter identity of the veld being examined
- 11. Sketch or Iso. number (if applicable)
- 12. Use this area to sketch the location and dimensions of the indication
- 13. Use this area for any comments pertinent to the examination l
l 9
! 'l Magnetic' Particle Virginia Corp.
O '
V--
% s*f wa~~ Indication Record Customer Plant
{ g Unit 3 Loop / Zone 4 Procedure Examiner L/ evel Date 7
Component / Piping System VCR Supervisor 9
Item No. ISO / Drawing No. y
, l' e
.L 2 O
4 6
o 9
C - .nt..
f3
-..a_____.____- - - -
l
, , ,~ Proc.No. ISI 1.2 pg,7- 1 ,
EI.Je Virginia Corporation !
of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 34 of. 3Z._. { )
VISUAL EXAMINATION REPORT (Form VT 401) l Block No. Information Required
{
- l. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Unit number l 4. Unit loop or zone identity (whichever is applicable)
- 5. Examination procedure number, including appropriate revisions and field change numbers
- 6. Operator's signature and level certifying that the l examinations have been performed in accordance with the referenced procedure and field change.
- 7. Date of examination
! 8. Identity nf component or system
- 9. Sketch or Iso, number
- 10. Signature of VCR site supervisor, af ter reviewing data sheet
- 11. The identity (as given on the referenced Iso., if applicable) g of the weld or item being examined l{
12., 13. Enter the results of the examinations by inserting a check in "NRI" if no reportable indications sre noted, and "RI" if indications are found. .
l 14. Identify any conditions affecting the performance l of the examinations. Describe any reportable indications l or identify any separate sheet or photograph utilized l to record indications.
l
- 15. Identify any visual aids utilized to aid in the j examination of each item.
l l
l h l
.n- . -
- % 1
/ \ Visual Examination Report I y .j w A u.
for 1
(~ t (/ V.rginia Corp.
ofEf:hnnend
\y s Category VT-l Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure Examiner / Level Date 5 6 7 Component / Piping System ISO Drawing No. 'VCR Supervisor l 6 9 10 Weld /, Fvam Tae"1**
Item NRI RT comments Vi cien 1 Afde 11 15 13 1 4- 15 O
O
. .,- :~.. - _ _- _ _ _ _ _ = _
, , , Proc.Na_ 1sx 1.2 gey_ 3
'EfJe Virginia Corporation Of.Rithmonb Date' 3/1/83 Page 3s of 37 l I VISUAL EXAMINATION WELD INDICATION RECORD (Form VT 402)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Unit number
- 4. Unit loop or zone identity (whichever is applicable)
- 5. Examination procedure number, including appropriate revisions and field change numbers
- 6. Operator's signature and level certifying the examinations have been performed in accordance with the reference procedure and field change
- 7. Date of examination
- 8. Identity of component or system
- 9. Signature of VCR site supervisor, af ter reviewing data sheet
- 10. -
The identity (as given on the referenced Iso) of the weld being examined
- 11. Sketch or Iso. number
- 12. Draw approximate size and location of indication in relation to weld
- 13. Identify any conditions relating to the indication (s) drawn in space 12.
l l
l l
l l . . - .
/ \ V.isual Examinat. ion r] j < s n.
\/ Virginia Corp.
y
\%s! efRiclwneed Weld Indication Record Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure . Examiner / Level Date 5 6 7 Component / Piping System VCR Supervisor Weld No. ISO Drawing No.
- Circumferential Length of Weld :
Start Point Visual Inspection 1 I I I I I I I 8
I I t
o V
____ +____ +____y____
i weld Id 1
_ _ _ _ _ +____ + _ _ _ _ y. _. _ _ _
t 1 1 1 I ,_
i l i I ! I I l O' 90* 180* 270* 360*
Remarks 1
l
.L 5 l l
l rm (JI
~
Form VT-40f. 2/82
~
I
?-
. . . . Proc.No. ISI 1.2 q,y 1 L Efje "t7ttginta Corporation I of Ridd Date' 3/1/83 Page 36 of 37 i
)
VISUAL'EiAMINATION INDICATION RECORD I
(Form UT-403)
{ Block No. Information Required -
\
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name '
- 3. Unit number
- 4. Unit loop or zone number
- 5. Examination procedure number, including appropriate revisions and field change numbers l 6. Operator's signature and level, certifying that the examination has been performed in accordance with the referenced procedure and field change.
- 7. Date of examination l
- 8. Identity of component or system
- 9. Signature of VCR site supervisor af ter reviewing date sheet
- 10. Enter identity of the item being examined
- 11. Sketch or Iso. number
- 12. Use this area to sketch the location and dimensions of the indication
- 13. Use this space for comments pertinent to the examination l
\
l I
l k l
l l
l 0-
% l i g-k u,,
, Visual Examination Corp.
o \..y %d
/yirgu* Indication Record I i
Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone I d 3 Y l Procedure Examiner / Level Date 5 6 7 ;
Component / Piping System VCR Supervisor .
Item No. ISO / Drawing No.
12 O
i h
l Comments:
.f. 3 vr w. _ __ . . _ _ _ _ _ _, _ ___ _.__ _ -._-- --- - -
- f - - -----~~ -
Proc ~ No' IsT 12 Rev' 1 Efje "t7ttstuta Corporation Of 3&It) Rut $ Date' 3/1/83 Page 37 of 37 ;
EDDY CURRENT CALIBRATION SHEET " THICKNESS" I
(Form ET-601)
Block No. Information Required
- 1. Customer name
- 2. Plant name
- 3. Unit number
- 4. Unit loop or zone identity (whichever is appli-cable)
- 5. Examination procedure number including appro-priate revisions and field changes
- 6. Operator's signature and level certifying the examination has been performed in accordance with the referenced procedure and field changes
- 7. Signature of VCR supervisor after reviewing data sheets '
- 8. Date the examination was p formed
- 9. Identity of the component o. system
- 10. Sketch or iso. number
- 11. Surface condition of the material to be examined
- 12. Instrument manufacturer
- 13. Instrument serial number
- 14. Instrument model
- 15. Instrument frequency
- 16. Probe manufacturer
- 17. Probe size
- 18. Probe type
- 19. Probe frequency
- 20. The time of initial calibration and subsequent calibration checks
- 21. Plot a meter reading to thickness conversion curve according to the procedure referenced above (block 5)
- 22. Plot a meter calibration curve according to the procedure reference above (block 5)
/^\ E00r CURRENT
. .p.jw \~
CAtrBRATI n SaEET I I g- y Virginia Corp.
.nm u gv j ,
..TnICxnESSa Customer Plant Unit ' * "*'
3 -4 !
Procedure Fv==4ner/ Level VCR Supervisor Date '
7 g Componet/ system Surface Condition ISO /DrawingNo.g INSTRUMENT PROBE Calibration checks Manufacturer Model Manufacturer Type ,
In out In out
- 12. 14 II, 8 Serial No. Frequency Size 13 is 17 Frequency M [h INST.~4 MENT CALIERATION CURVE 1000 9nn Operating point List null points:
70n 600 500 400 306 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 g
METER CALIBRATION CU"VE 100 l I l l I
80 60 40 '
20 i ,
0
, , , 1 Thickness VCR Form-ET-601 (Rev. O, 9/82)
/< - .e.
\
L p The (804) 266 8741
- R (I -
Virginia Corp.
e a * ==as P. o. so= P474 V- 5809 Lakeside Ave.
- v Richmond, Virginia 23228 Procedure
Title:
ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION CONFIRMATION EBASCO SERVICES INCCilPORATED -
~
QUALITY Procedure No.: ISI 2.1 AST'U2ANCE ENGINEERIUG This Doccment is:
Plant Site: Waterford No. 3 **"* "d :
O "'*- *Camrnents, Inc.ronse s and A.amanit: Proceed w6th order.
nmw aus am.nwi.
i NOTE:
Cuscomar: Louisiana Power and Light ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Ebasco Services. Inc. - Agent m' ===.aus w s-me c w=.ii.
l- we m. w.u. mac ,
Approved for Use *'"*"*""'a$'"'****
Virginia. Corporation: C 2r d ^ ^ ^ ^
N b * '"% 'Od I anseem M / Y w are.r. u Approved for Use BY: 7Wj.. 9'7s .
DAJE:3.._.T.a..,G. g'.1.0 e
Custoner:
l Rev. n Date: 9 /1 n /m ? Rev. 1/1/R 1 1
Date:
Prepared by: 'l 6t h Prepared by: k ', 0 4 . 2._ _
\ V Reviewed by: N^r_1 sh W h - Luf 7Fr" Reviewed by: Il--- - - o V - = Lu/nr-Reviewed by:Md (( Reviewed by:_ M M //M Customer: _. b 8[L[O'W/ 5T
/ ' ele /M 4 4/ o/n Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviews:4 by: Reviewed by: _
Customer Customer: '
Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed.by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Cuatomer: Customer: -
~== a n---..:.-.-_..- -...-....- _ _ _ .
, , , Proc No. IS1 2.1 gey. 1 Efje Virgtuta Corporation OfRIthmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 1 of 9 l I 1.0 Scope 1.1 This procedure is applicable to, and describes, the requirements for ultrasonic equipment qualification.
This procedure is written in compliance with the ASME code,Section XI, and conforms with the addition and -
addenda in paragraph 2.1.
2.0 References 2.1 1977 Edition of ASME Boiler at 1 Pressure Vessel Code,Section XI, with addenda through summer,1978.
2.2 The Virginia Corporation Written Practice for the Qualification and Certification of NDE Personnel, NDE 4.1, Rev. 3, 3/16/81.
2.3 The Virginia Corporation procedure ISI-1.2, Preservice inspection Documentation Rev. (latest revision). l l 2.4 The Virginia Corporation Procedure VC-QA-103, Generation and Control of Procedures for Waterford No. 3 Preservice Inspection (latest revision).
3.0 Personnel Qualifications 3.1 Personnel performing equipment qualifications to this procedure shall be qualified and certified to at least
- Level I in accordance with the document specified in paragraph 2.2.
4.0 General Requirements 4.1 The instrument calibration confirmation (paragraph 6.1 and 6.2) required by this procedure shall be performed on each instrument prior to use at the Waterford 3 site, and shall not remain in effect for a period exceeding three months.
. 1
, , , Prac.No. 1s1 2.1 q,y 1 l Efje Yttstuta Corporation i 9
ofR(thmollt Date: 1/1/s, Page 2 of 5.0 Equipment and Material Requirements 5.1 Ultrasonic flaw detection instruments shall be of the A scan, pulse echo type equipped with a stepped gain control in units of 2dB or less.
5.2 Search units used shall be certified by the manufacturer as to the essential properties, such as the realtime wave f 6cm and spectrum analysis of the waveform. The central operating frequency shall be stated and/or displayed and shall be within ! .5 MHZ of its stated frequency. The beam angles shall be within 1 2* of nominal, as verified in paragraph 7.1.
5.3 Any basic calibration block may be used which satisfies the requirements of 6.0 5.4 Linearity verifications shall be performed with the
('T reject "of f" or minimum; ~" pulse length" (damping) and D " filter" controls shall be adjusted for optimum results.
6.0 Instrument Qualification Method 6.1 Screen height Linearity:
To verify the ability of the ultrasonic instrument to meet the linearity requirement of III-3110 of Section X1, position an angle beam search' unit as shown in Figure 1 so that echoes can be observed from any two reflectors in a calibration block. Adjust the search
, unit position to give a 2 to 1 ratio of amplitudes between the two echoes, with the larger set at 80%
of full screen height. Without moving the search unit, adjust sensitivity (gain) to successively set the larger echo from 100% to 20% of FSH, in 10% increments l O l
V
.~ -_. . _ _ _ _ _ . . , - . _
, , , Proc.No. ISI 2.1 q,ev ,
Ef.je "t7trgtnta Corporation Date: 3/1/83 Page 3 of 1 of Rfthmonb i l
and read and record the amplitude of the smaller echo at each setting on the form provided in Figure 2. , The settings and readings shall be estimated to the nearest 1% of full screen. Alternatively, a straight beam search unit may be used on any calibration block that will provide the signal differences.
6.2 Amplitude control Linearity:
To verify the accuracy of the amplitude control in the ultrasonic instrument, as required in 111-3120 of Section XI, position a search unit so that an echo from one reflector in a calibration block is peaked on the screen.
With the increases and decreases in attenuation shown in the following table, the echo amplitude shall be read and recorded in the form provided in Figure 2. Convenient reflectors from any calibration block may be used with angle or straight beam search units. The settings and readings shall be estimated to the nearest 1% of full screen.
i Indication Set at % of Full Ocreen dB Control Change 80% -6dB l 80% -12dB 40% +6dB 20% +12dB Note:
(1.) Minus denotes decrease in amplitude; plus denotes increase 7.0 Search Unit Qualification 7.1 Beam exit point and angle determination:
An IIW, type 1, ultrasonic test block shall be used to k k l
verify the beam exit point and beam angle.
1
, , , Proc.No. 1st 2.1 gey. 1 .
Efje "t7ttstuta Corporation
$ of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page4 of 9 7.1.1 Beam Exit Point: (refer to Figure 3)
Position the search unit on surface D, scanning the quadrant. Move the search unit back and forth about the focal point until the echo from the quadrant is peaked on the screen (instrument gain and/or range may have to be adjusted to
- provide an echo within the screen presentation).
Mark the beam exit point on the search unit.
7.1.2 Beam Angle (refer to Figure 3)
Position the search unit on surface c or d depending on the anticipated wedge angle (surface e is for wedge angles less than 65*, surface d is for angles greater than 60*). Move the search unit back and forth until the echo from f
(v the 2" hole is peaked in the screen (instrument gain and/or range may have to be adjusted to provide an echo within the screen presentation).
Read the angle on the IIW block at the beam exit point, and record on the examination report.
7.2 Beam spread:
7.2.1 Beam spread measurement shall be performed, when required by referencing ultrasonic examination procedures, on the same calibration block used to calibrate the instrument system for examination.
(O G
, , , Proc.No. IS1 2.1 q,y 1 Efje Virgtuta Corporation of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 5 of 9 I l 7.2.2 Af ter the instrument is calibrated for angle beam examination, position the angle beam search unit to obtain the maximum response from the kT hole. Move the unf* toward' the hole until the response from the kT hole ,
reaches 50% of DAC, as the DAC was constructed on the examination procedure. This can be accomplished by either constructing a 50%
DAC curve or by increasing gain by 6dB, and reducing the signal amplitude to the DAC level. Record the distance from the beam point to the hole location.
7.2.3 Repeat 7.2.2, moving the unit away from the hole.
7.2.4 Repeat 7.2.2 and 7.2.3 on the T and 3/4T holes.
8.0 Recording Evaluation and Reports 8.1 Screen height linearity and amplitude control linearity shall be reported on the form illustrated in Figure 2.
8.2 Screen height linearity shall be acceptable if the recorded l
l echoes are 50% of the larger amplitude within 15% of full screen height over at least 80% of full range (0 to 100%
l FSH).
l 8.3 Amplitude control linearity must be within the limits l
specified below:
Indication Set at dB Control Indication Limits, I
% of Full Screen Change % of Full Screen 80% -6dB 32 - 48%
80% -12dB 16 - 24%
40% +6dB 64 - 96%
20% +12dB 64 - 96%
Note:
(1) Minus denotes decrease in amplitude; plus denotes increase V
, , , Proc.No. Is1 2.1 gey, 1 Efje Virgtnta Corporation Of R(thmostb Date' 3/1/83 Page 6 of 9 8.4 Beam exit point shall be marked on the search unit.
8.5 Beam angle shall be within 22' of nominal, and shall be
~
reported on the examination report.
8.6 Beam spread shall be reported on the examination report.
D V
O .
,------------,,-,-,-----w,,w ,,_.r,y,, _-r,, - - - - ..---w-,-,, , , ~ ,,, r -- * - -- * - --we----v--s~rw ----ew'-"--='e ' ' * - " =r ----*'r-vv
Proc. No._ 1s1 2.1 q,y 1 Efje TTirgtuta C.orporation of Richmont Dats: 3/r/83 Page 7 of 9 B
3 D
AA 16 . 3. . s h i VV ...
(typical) l l o
rieflector n
( (typicall s
s SCREEN HEIGHT LINEARITY Figure 1 '
w e ------,-,w--,-ww-- ,-,-w-m,+--m-- ----grm--yne----w.we--= -p-w-w------w-w-,-,--p ------e---g---r-e er e y' e----
~
, , . Proc.No._ IS1 2.1 q,y__ 1 Efje Virgins Corporation Of Mmont Date' 3/1/83 Page 8 of 9
73 ULTRASONIC INSTRUMENT QUALIFICATION TG MEET SECTION V AND XI 0F THE ASME CODE Amplitude Linearity Verification is't Signal Amplitude 100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20%
2nd Signal Amplitude 2nd Signal Allowable Ampl. 45-55% 50-40 45-35 40-30 35-25 30-20 25-15 20-10.15-5 Control Settings: Damping Reject Rep. Rate Amplitude Control Linearity Verification Original Signal Signal DB Control Signal Amplitude Amplitude Change Amplitude Limits 80% FSH -6DB 32 - 48 80% FSit -12DB 16 - 24 40% FSH MDB -
64 - 96 20% FSH +12DB 64 - 96 Note: Minus denotes decrease in amplitude; plus denotes increase.
Control Settings: Damping Reject -
Rep. Rate i
Instrument: Mfgr. , Model S/N i
Transducer: S/N Size Freq. Type Reference Calibration Standard: S/N/
Screen Height Linearity: Acceptable Not. Acceptable Amplitude Control Linearity: Acceptable Not Acceptable Remarks:
Inspector (s) Date Report Reviewed By Date Figure 2 I
, , m.. __ _ . _ _ , _ , , _ _ _ - _ , , . _ , , ,, . _ , , , , _
Proc.No. Tm u Rev' 1 EIJe Virgtuta Corporation Of E4Rionti 4
Date' 3/1/83' Page 9 of 9 h F I G. 3 Beam Angle and Exit Point Determination Using IIW Block, Type I
- O6 HOLE p j URFACE S C
/ l l f1 I l l g 40' 50' 60' l
j QUADRANT
/ CHECKING BEAM ANGLE '
/
,/ 2 DIA HOLE
/
CHECKING BEAM EXIT POINT -
I l '
.09 .0L '
s'
.5L I l l f
l /
SURFACE D SURFACE A FOCAL POINT i
r 1r l i i
i o i
!#\ !! ! n-,
11 1
PLASTIC INSERT SURFACE B i
I t
h l
., --.,.,.---..--,---,-,--,---.----...-.,,..,--.-,-,,,.,n ..
e /, s\
i
, p The (804) 266 8741 i- -
( (/y Virginia Corp. P o 8a= 9474
!1 e mensae 5809 Lakeside Ave.
s %s 7 Riclunond, Virginia 23228 P m e,d,ure Titles g g. ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF FULL PENETRATION.
CIRCUMFERENTIAL AND LONGITUDINAL FERRITIC BUTT WELDS l
C04.3c0 a y...y1 illCC.qrgry,3
,J n .. . ,
AS3G2A::cy '
l Procedure No.: ISI 2.2 ENG2m:nm .- ,
'== m -d = =-)
~
. * .. w c n ,3 ,
I-*" Wt* set L...,,,3
) Plant Site:
Waterford No. 3 *~~.r r nu$b[ "'j
..r., ., ,,,,
am~.. m -
o
(
li !
--.DTE: -
Customer: Louisiana Power and Light I7[.2;' ".'l~ *"'
- m-Ebasco Services, Inc. - Agent "* ** .'.am w " .
. -.'[SInEI#O,' .f
- a - n - m ,,u Co p ration: - -A
^
N ' ^
~ pj:.:,.: ...e ~- 3 ,
Approved for Use DAg : (>[ [f-t$ TI..y~
Customers ,
Rev._ 0 Date: 2/10/82 Rev. 1 Date: 3/1/83 Prepared by: T L 4 "' --- -
Prepared by: b ',, m v
Reviewed by: 7be*=*. C Wes LolTrr- Reviewed by: Y oW- ts/ 7X-Reviewed by M M _ MY Reviewed by: MMM, ((f.ppff Customer:
/@vM3 bw L .M.h b LW
HN ln Rev. Dates Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer: Customer:
Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer: Customer: -
4
- e sames e ** - we=- e
_ea.*-== :* * * * ' = * * *
- Proc.No' m Rev.'
EIJe Virgenta Corporation of RfG+ = ,
1 Date: 3/1/a3 page , of 26 g 1.0 Scope
,1.1 This procedure is applicable to, and describes, the requirements for manual ultrasonic examination of full -
penetration circumferential and longitudinal ferritic butt welds and adjacent base metal in piping having a nominal wall thickness of 0.2 inches to 6.0 inches, and ferritic vessels with a wall thickness of 2.0 inches and less, that are formed by extrusions, castings, forgings, or rolled plate. Material to be examined includes similar metal welds in carbon or low alloy steels. This procedure is written in compliance with the ASME Code,Section XI, Appendix III.
2.0 References 2.1 1977 edition of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section XI, with addenda through suamier,1978.
2.2 The Virginia Corporation Written Practice for the Qualification and Certification of NDE Personnel, NDE 4.1, Rev. 3, dated 3/6/81.
2.3 The Virginia Corporation procedure ISI 1.2, Preservice Inspection Documentation (latest revision).
2.4 The Virginia Corporation procedure ISI 2.1, Ultrasonic Equipment Calibration Confirmation (latest revision).
2.5 The Preservice Inspection Program Plan, 2.6 The Virginia Corporation Procedure VC-QA-103, Generation and Control of Procedures for Waterford No. 3 Preservice Inspection (latest revision).
3.0 Personnel Qualifications 3.1 Personnel performing examinations to this procedure shall be qualified and certified to at least Level II in accordance with the document referenced in paragraph 2.2. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) may be employed as assistants.
Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) shall not inde-pendently evalitate or accept the results of an ultrasonic examination.
Proc.No. 1st 2.2 q,y ,
Efje "TEttstuta Corporation
{ l of Rk$mont Date: 3/1/83 Page 2 og 26 i
4.0 General Requirements ;
4.1 The area to be examined and contacted by the search unit shall be checked to ensure that it is free of dirt, loose -
scale, machining or grinding particles, weld splatter, l
_or other loose foreign matter that would impair the free movement of the search unit or affect the examination.
If such conditions are detected, they will be rectified
. prior to conducting the examination.
4.2 The identity and location of welds to be examined shall be as specified in paragraph 2.5.
4.3 The examinations conducted in accordance with this procedure shall be done from the 0.D. surf ace using contact methods.
4.4 Calibration shall be performed frcm the side of the calibration block which corresponds to the 0.D. surf ace g of the component. The calibration / examination surface
{
shall be noted on the report.
4.5 Examinations shall consist of nominal 45 degree angle beam shear wave techniques applied in two directions parallel and two directions perpendicular to the weld axis, except where restricted by part geometry or access. A zero degree longitudinal beam shall be applied to all areas through which the angle beams must pass.
5.0 Equipment and Material Requirements 5.1 Ultrasonic flaw detection instruments shall be of the A-
- scan pulse echo type equipped with a stepped gain control calibrated in units of 2 dB or less, and shall be qualified to the requirements of reference 2.4 prior to use at the Waterford 3 site. Qualifications may be valid for a period not to exceed three months.
t O' * *
- T(, f* NggS**P"dO - 3 F M P @NM M M
- 9 h989
, , , Proc. No.1S1 2. 2 q,y ,
1Efje TTirginia Corporation of Akhmont Date: 3/1/83 Page 3 of 26 5.2 Search units shall be selected in accordance with figure
- 1. Transducers used shall be certified by the manufacturer as to serial number, . size, and central frequency. Search units shall be capable of providing the applicable calibrations as required in paragraph 6.0 5.3 Cables connecting the flaw detector to the search unit shall be the coaxial type. Standard lengths of 6 ft. or 12 ft, shall be used for preservice examinations.
5.4 A couplant medium, such as Sonotrace 40, manufactured t by Echo Laboratories, Inc., or equivalent, shall be applied to the test surface. Couplant materials shall be analyzed for halogen content according to ASTM D-808 and the residdal halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Couplant materials shall also be analyzed for sulfur content according to ASTM D-129 and the residual sulfur shall not exceed 1% by weight. All areas shall be dry wiped to remove excess couplant following examination.
l 5.5 Calibration Blocks l 5.5.1 The basic calibration blocks shall be made from material of the same nominal diameter and nominal wall thickness or pipe schedule as the pipe to be examined.
5.5.2 The finish on the surf aces of the calibration blocks shall be representative of the surface finishes of the piping.
'5.5.3 Design of the calibration blocks and reflectors shall be essentially as depicted in Figures 2 through 5. Additional reflectors may be installed provided they do not interfere with establishing the primary reference.
O
1 Proc. hto.
1st 2.2 q,y, 1 Efje "t7ttstuta Corporation i I of Ric$monb Date: 3/1/83 Page ' of 26 1
5.6 Wedges used to produce shear wave for angle beam examination shall be within 12' of the manufacturer's designated angle as required by reference 2.4.
6.0 Calibration 6.1 Prior to conducting examinations, the complete system to be utilized shall be calibrated on the applicable calibration block. The system shall include the ultrasonic unit (and battery pack, if applicable), cable or cables, search unit, couplant, and any other apparatus, instrument or circuit employed between the instrument and the calibration block surface. Once calibration has been established, any change to any part of the system, including the operator, will require at least a verification of the calibration, which l I shall be documented.
6.1.1 The search unit shall be selected in accordance with Figure 1.
6.1.2 The calibration block shall be identified and selected from reference 2.5.
6.1.3 The temperature difference between the examination surface and basic calibration block surface shall not exceed 25 F.
j 6.1.4 The maximum calibration indications shall be obtained with the sound beam oriented essentially perpendicular to the axis of the calibration l reflector. The center line of the search unit shall be at least 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the nearest side of the block or pipe. (Rotation of the i
beam into a corner formed by the reflector and the side of the block may produce a higher amplitude signal at a longer beam path; this beam path l l shall not be used for calibration.)
l l
y -- - , , , , , . - - , , , , , . - - - - - - - - - . , - - , , -
Proc. No. Ist 22 Rev-Elje Virginia Corporation 1 of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page_i_.of 26 6.1.5 Calibration shall be performed from the surface of the calibration block which corresponds to the component surface to be examined.
6.2 Straight Beam Calibration for Weld Metal and HAZ 6.2.1 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the kT hole. Using the sweep delay control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the kr hole is positioned at 2.0 on the graticule.
6.2.2 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the 3/4T hole. Using the sweep range control, adjust the sweep position co that the leading edge of the response from the 3/4T hole is positioned at 6.0 on the graticule.
6.2.3 Repeat steps 6.2.1 and 6.2.2 until no further adjustment 1
l 1s necessary.
{ }
Note: Other sweep positions may be used when necessary to obtain a broader sweep range for piping systems with I varying thickness.
! 6.2.4 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the hole giving the highest signal amplitude. Adjust the sensitivity control to 80% of full screen height (FSH). Mark the peak of the indication on the screen.
6.2.5 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the remaining hole (s). Without changing the sensitivity control, mark the peak of the indication (s) on the screen.
6.2.6 Connect the screen marks and extrapolate through the l thickness (kT on each end) to provide a smooth DAC l
curve. This shall be the primary reference level.
6.2.7 The use of delay line transducers and/or dual. transducers for evaluation of indications in the near zone is F3rmitted if applied in accordance with the requirements of paragraph l
l 6.1. '
I l
-- - +,,,w m,- _w..
k
- 'N ~ * ""
- IIJe Virgittia Corporation 3/1/83 26 l l Of R @ ntonb Date- Page 6 of 6.3 Angle Beam Calibration for h Node Examination 6.3.1 The response from the kT and 3/4T side-drilled holes shall be used to establish the slope and -
the shape of the DAC curve in the following manner:
6.3.1.1 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the kT hole.
Using the sweep delay control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the kT hole is positioned at 2.0 on the graticule.
6.3.1.2 -
Position the search unit for the maximum response from the 3/4T hole. .
{ l Using the sweep range control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the 3/4T hole is positioned at 6.0 on the graticule.
6.3.1.3 Repeat steps 6.3.1.1 and 6.3.1.2 until no further adjustment is necessary.
6.3.1.4 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the hole giving the highest signal amplitude. Adjust the sensitivity control to 80% of full screen height (FSH).
Mark the peak of the indication on the screen.
6.3.1.5 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the remaining hole (s).
Without changing the sensitivity control, mark the peak of the indication (s) on l I the screen.
- - - Proc.No. Ist 2.2 q,y' 3 EIJe "t7ttginia Corporation of R@mont Date: 1/1 /s, Page 7 of 26 g
6.3.1.6 Connect the screen marks and extrapolate through the thickness (kT on each end) to provide a smooth DAC curve. This shall be the primary reference level.
6.3.1.7 The sensitivity shall then be established from the I.D. surface notch by setting the signal response amplitude from the I.D. notch at the level of the DAC curve.
6.4 Angle Beam Calibration for Full Node Examination 6.4.1 The response from the 1.D. and 0.D. notches shall be used to establish the slope, shape, and sensitivity of the DAC curve in the following manner:
6.4.1.1 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the I.D. notch.
Using the sweep ' delay control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the 1.D.
notch is positioned at 4.0 on the graticule.
6.4.1.2 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the 0.D. notch.
Using the sweep range control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the O.D.
notch is positioned at 8.0 on the graticule.
6.4.1.3 Repeat steps 6.4.1.1 and 6.4.1.2 until no further adjustment is necessa ry .
6.4.1.4 Position the search unit for the
~
maximum response from the I.D. notch.
Adjust the sensitivity control to O ymu>= m won G g e we-, .=,wew-+-
- \
- - - Proc.No. m Rev , :
Efje Virgtuta Corporation
{ } Of RI4W Date' 3/1/83 Page sf o 76 80% of FSH. Mark the peak of the indication on the screen.
6.4.1.5 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the 0.D. notch.
Without changing the sensitivity control, mark the peak of the indication on the screen.
6.4.1.6 Connect the' screen marks and extrapolate the DAC at either end for a distance of %I. This shall be the primary reference, level.
6.5 Angle Beam Calibration for 1 Node Examination 6.5.1 The respons'e from the I.D. and 0.D. notches shall be used to establish the slope, shape, and sensitivity of the DAC curve in the following manner:
6.5.1.1 Position the sear.ch unit for the maximum response from the I.D. notch.
Using the sweep delay control, adjust the sweep position so that the leadinb edge of the response from the I.D.
notch is positioned at 3.0 on the j gra ticule.
6.5.1.2 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the 0.D. notch.
Using the sweep range control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the 0.D.
l l notch is positioned at 6.0 on the l graticule.
6.5.1.3 Repeat steps 6.5.1.1 and 6.5.1.2 until no further adjustment is necessary.
l I t
, _ , , , . - , - - ,..--., ,,,,, , ,-, , _ ,---.e--y-%.- -,.-. ,.,_ ,-.
. . - - - , ,,-.,p,,
, , Prcc. hk). Isl 2.2 q,y,_ 1 Efje E,rginta Corporation Of A lt$ d Date- 3/1/83 PGge 9 Of 26 6.5.1.4 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the I.D. notch (1 node).
. Check that the leading edge is at approximately 9.0 on the graticule.
6.5.1.5 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the I.D. notch (1/2 node).
Adjust the sensitivity control to 80%
. FSH. Mark the peak of the indication on the screen.
6.5.1.6 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the 0.D. notch (1 node). Without changing the sensitivity control, mark the peak of the indication on the screen.
6.5.1.7 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the I.D. notch (lh node). Without changing the sensitivity control, mark the peak l of the indication on the screen.
I 6.5.1.8 Connect the screen marks and extrapolate the DAC at either end for a distance of 1/2T. This shall be the primary reference level.
6.6 When using the straight beam or angle beam techniques, variables such as weld preparation, weld crown width, or physical interference may be encountered. These variables may be eliminated by one or more of the following:
l I
'mgAm WO -#e.mg ew-h- m-*
Proc.No. m Rev._1 EIJe %.,,trgtnta Corporation
{ ) of Richmont Date: 3/1/a3 Page in of 26 6.6.1 Reducing the dimension of the wedge edge-to-beam entry point.
6.6.2 Reducing search unit size 6.6.3 Increasing beam angle 6.6.4 Increasing the metal path by at least an additional node.
6.6.5 Additional surface preparation 6.7 Calibration Verification 6.7.J A system calibration check, which is the verification of the instrument sensitivity and j sweep range calibration, shall be performed at the beginning of each day of examinations and at the end of each examination category, or every four hours; whichever is less, and with any change in examination personnel.
l l 6.7.2 A decrease in sensitivity of 20% or 2 dB shall require recalibration and re-examination of all items examined sin e the previous acceptable l
calibration check. All data taken since the last calibration check shall be marked void.
l 6.7.3 An increase in sensitivity or 20% or 2 dB shall require recalibration, re-examination, and data I
correction of all indications reported since l the previous acceptable calibration or check.
l 6.7.4 lf any point on the DAC curve has moved on the sweep line more than 10% of the sweep division l
reading, correct the sweep range calibration 1
and note the correction in the examinstion record.
l If recordable reflectors are noted on the
(
t data sheets, those data sheets shall be volded,
, a new calibration shall be recorded, and the
[ voided examination areas shall be re-examined.
l I i
Is1 2.2 ,
Proc.No.
flii4 grpgggg(g Date.
3/1fa3 Page 11 of 26 g
7.0 Examination 7.1 Straight Beac Examination for Base Metal 7.1.1 Prior to performing angle beam examinations, the base material through which the angle beam will pass (reference Figures 6 and 7) shall be completely scanned with a straight beam search unit to det..ct lauinar reflectors which might affect the interpretation of the results of the angle beam examination.
7.1.2 The sensitivity of the instrument shall be adjusted at a location free of indications so that the initial back reflection from the far side of the plate iaill be 80 percent of full sqreen height.'
7.1.3 Areas containing laminar indications that may affect angle beam examinations shall be noted.
All areas giving indications. equal to or greater than the remaining back reflection stall be recorded on the data sheet. Also, record all areas where l
one or more discontinuities produce a continuous loss of back reflection accompanied by continuous l ,
indica tion in the same plane.
7.1.4 Alternatively, the base metal examination may be conducted concurrently and at the same calibration as described in paragraph 6.2, provided that the scan sensitivity (2 x reference) is at least as sensitive as that required in paragraph 7.1.2.
7.2 Straight Beam Examination for Weld Metal and HAZ 7.2.1 If the angle beam examination is restricted to a full node or lh node examination from one side of the weld, a calibrated straight beam examination shall be performed, providing the weld crown
- is flat enough to make satisfactory transducer l
contact.
l
ISl 2.2 i WhWh 3/1/83 Of R M Date' Page 12 of 26 7.2.2 The area to be examined shall be the weld metal and the adjacent base material on the restricted -
side of the weld to the extent allowed by the geometric configuration (see Figure 6). Scans shall overlap at least ten percent.
7.2.3 Calibration shall be as indicated in paragraph 6.2 7.3 Angle Beam - Reflectors Parallel to the Weld 7.3.1 The primary scan for reflectors parallel to the veld shall be node from both sides of the weld.
7.3.2 Full node or lh node shall only be used when it is impossible to examine the required material l l with a h node examination from both sides of the weld.
7.3.3 The area of interest shall be the weld and HAZ, and the required amount of base metal on each side of the weld (reference Figures 6 and 7),
7.3.4 The scan pattern shall start at one edge of the area to be examined with the ultrasonic search unit transmitting an angle beam perpendicular to the weld axis. The search unit shall be moved
( towards and away from the weld such that the l
calibrated beam passes through the whole area of the weld and base metal to be examined.
Concurrent with this scan, the search unit shall I be swiveled 15 right and 15 left and progressively
! indexed along the length of the weld such that l
I i
l I 1
l l
i
- , , . g __ _- , - - - . , - - - . ----,__.-,-.---_-_y _ - ,
, , , Prcc.No. 1st 2.2 q,y 1 '-
Efje "t7ttgtnta Corporation
- Of3%ICIH10RD DQi8 3/1/83 Page 13 of 26 the whole scan pattern follows a "saw-tooth" pattern. The " pit:h" of the "saw-tooth": shall be such that on each pass the ultrasonic beam covers at least 10 percent of the area. covered.
. by the previous adjacent pass. The weld and required amount of adjacent base metal is to be fully examined by this procedure. The examination shall be accomplished from both sides of the weld.
For welds where scanning access is not available from both sides, the L.P.& L. P.S.I. coordinator will be notified.
7.3.5 Calibration for h node, full node, or lb node examination shall be accomplished according to paragraph 6.3, 6.4, or 6.5.
7.4 Angle Beam - Reflectors Transverse to the Weld 7.4.1 The angle beam examination for reflectors l l transverse to the weld (examination directions 7 and 8) shall be performed on the weld crown and adjacent base material as necessary to examine the weld root by node in two directions along the weld. When the weld crown configuration prohibits a node examination, a full node examination shall be performed with the search unit adjacent to the weld crown, and highlighted in the data report.
7.4.2 The search unit shall be placed on one edge of the inspection area directing the angle beam into the material parallel to the weld axis. From this position the search unit l I
Proc.No. TsT Rev.-
EIJe E,rgn.ua , Corporation I I 3/1/83 26 of Ric$mont Date: Page l' of shall be moved parallel to the weld and indexed toward the opposite side of the weld such that the next scan will cover at least 10 percent of the area covered by the previous adjacent scan. Parallel scans shall be repeated in this manner until the opposite side of the weld and base metal is reached and examined. Alternately, the search unit may be swiveled 15 right and 15 lef t and progressively indexed along the length of the weld such that the whole scan pattern follows a "saw-tooth" pattern. The " pitch" of the "saw-tooth" shall be such that on each pass
{ } the ultrasonic beam covers at least 10 percent of the area covered by the previous adjacent pass.
7.4.3 The weld and the required amount of adjacent base metal is to be fully examined by one of the techniques described in paragraph 7.4.2.
7.4.4 Calibration for h node, full node, or 1 node examination shall be accomplished according to paragraph 6.3, 6.4, or 6.5.
l t
{
t I
l l I l
, , , Proc.No. Ist 2.2 q,y, 3 EIJe Virgtuta Corporation Of WW Date' 3/1/s, - Page 15 of 26 7.5 Extent of Examination 7.5.1 The volume subject to examination and extent of scan length shall be in accordance with Figures 6 and 7.
7.5.2 Butt welded branch connection welds shall be examined by scanning both transverse and parallel to the weld according to paragraph 7.3 and 7.4.
The examination volumes are shown in Figure 9.
7.5.3 Longitudinal welds adjacent to circumferential welds shall be examined by scanning both transverse and parallel to the weld according to paragraphs 7.3 and 7.,4.
7.6 Examinations utilizing more than one DAC curve shall be examined once at the higher sensitivity, and evaluated at the applicable sensitivity.
- 7.7 Rate of search unit r.rovement shall not exceed 6" per second.
7.8 Scanning sensitivity shall be at least twice (+6 dB) the calibration or reference sensitivity.
l 8.0 Evaluation and Recording of Indications l
8.1 All indications 20% of the primary reference DAC or greater shall be investigated to determine the shape, identity, location, and type of indication. Additionally, all indications, regardless of amplitude, which the examiner
. judges to be potentially indicative of a crack or lack of fusion shall be investigated to determine the shape, identity, location, and type of indication.
8.1.1 Any indication categorized as a flaw shall be recorded and reported in accordance with the I
requirements of reference 2.3.
O O r- me sp p e a me
--- - - , , , , - - - we. - - - - e -o,- a _ ------ge ~-n-, , , * , _ , , - , -
- *
- Proc.Pto. IsT 2.2 Rev. 1 EIje Virgtnta Corporation .
3/1/83 page 16 of 26
{ l of Richnent Date:
8.1.2 Any indication resulting from the metallurgical structure within the material shall be considered
~
when assessing the effectiveness of the examination.
Restrictions or variations to the examination due to the metallurgical structure shall be reported.
8.1.3 Geometric indications that are equal to or greater than 50% of the primary reference DAC shall be acknowledged by recording their length and location.
8.2 Any indication which is equal to or greater than 50%
g of the primary reference DAC shall be evaluated to the
/
extent necessary to determine the size, shape, identity, and location of the reflector. Indications shall be l I reported in accordance with the requirements of reference 2.3.
8.3 Welds that did not receive a complete examination according to prragraph 7.0 shall have the partial examination noted on the data sheet as follows:
8.3.1 The extent of the examination performed shall be noted.
8.3.2 If the volur cric examination was performed from one side of the weld only, it shall be noted and an entry made indicating what steps were taken to ensure that the required area on the far side of the weld was examined.
8.3.3 The reason (s) that a specific examination was impractical shall be noted. For example, support or component restricts access, fitting prevents adequate ultrasonic coupling on one side, component to component weld prevents ultrasonic examination, etc.
g
- - - Proc.No. Isl 2.2 q,y 1 EIJe Virgtma Corporation 17 26 Of R M Dote' 3/1/83~ PQg6 Of 8.4 Investigation and reporting of indications shall be performed at the reference sensitivity. Other frequencies, sizes, or beam angles may be used as an aid in evaluating or interpreting examination results.
9.0 Documentation of Examination 9.1 All data relative to the examinations and reportable b dications shall be reported in accordance with reference 2.3, and on forms similar to those shown in Figures 10,11, and
, 12.
l O
l l
O l
, -ce - - - -- . - - - - - - . . - - - , . - , - - - - - . . . . - - - - . , - - - - - - - - - - - . , , , , . . , - - - _ . . ~ - - - - , . , , - - - - - - , . - , - - - - -
Proc.No. Tst 22 Rev. '
EIJe Yttstma Corporation l 3/1/B3 18 l Of R4Nt0Rll Date- pagg Of26 Figure 1 TRANSDUCER AND SEARCH UNIT SELECTION Angle Beam Examination *.
Nominal Transducer Material Maximum Nominal Nominal Thickness Size Frequency Angle
.250" to .400" 1/4" dia. or 1/4" x 1/4" 2.25 MHz 45"
.400" to 1.000" 1/2" dia. or 1/2" x 1/2" 2.25 MHZ 45' l.000" to 1.200" 3/4" dia. or 3/4" x 3/4" 2.25 MHZ 45*
1.200" and greater 1" dia. or 1" x 1" 2.25 MHZ 45" Straight Beam Examination * ,
Nominal Pipe Transducer q g Diameter Maximum Size Nominal Frequency less than 12" dia. 1/2" dia. or 1/2" x 1/2" 2.25 MHZ 12" dia and greater 1" dia. or 1" x 1" 2.25 MHZ
- Note: Other transducers may be used where weld geometry or metallurgical characteristics impede effective use of the above listed angles, frequencies, or sizes.
l I
.. ~.e.m-
. . . . _ _ _ 7- .,-;--
$ y
- "U' zN -
Ee H'
@n SmCE
$' %$ G$ -
E go 2 OOk, w3Nw OOe e
o g -
,l2 ,
.h T i
l T
e
~} {
3 4-l.
.\
1 T .h' ' h, f
f, ' {
'5 o 4
s
" u r )
E i
y s
'8 s
e i
L a
d n
a "2
1 V
M y}T i S "
i O e
z e l p n y
, i P
e 2 -
l v a i e n t r i a u m r g o t i N s F u
.' r l o l l l l l l l lA! l I i l I l l l ! I l l I l F
(
I
- - k c
A l.
_ o W
T E
E u
r i
l B
v
?.
I T
s n o -
i t
a _
r g ' ' i i b
i l
a -
C -
I l l l l l l l I l l l l l l I ! ! l I i l l l I l l l l I l I l I l l l l l l l l i -
f -
,;!l!
p1-[ 1 f2
- ,h h2 -
i h2 2 }I I ji2 I
> l 1;! l iI ' , !i 4f! ; l 4 ]I :!
$.z9 'dN -
g5" 5 , ', ,
,gs"aei 8geRmts8 ik O u, a w S.Er3i" l l
. e u2a
- o o* n*
,12 3
e 3T yT , t4 34 L
!' I n
oikft 0
3 '5 4
- 0 -
o g
3 s a
/
u i
)
v "
4
, 2 u .- *0 3 ~
o t
k" "y A '
c4l
- o1 n w
l o e B e i
v ze3 niv
& i oSie t r O
t eau aprg Tg T f .
riti bP sF i u V lll aal C nI i"
m o
N r
o F
(
O
'2 r, A -
pll l1 l ! I iI l
- 't I l I . I I iI l l 1 -
- 8 l 8i i" _
[ -
l '
l l
.'I ;"
j a ~
u "
il r
i
,:slh v '
O ; I l j 1 i .l l 1 1 l l g l I l l l I ii r, y'
{2 I I2 2 21 3
fal _
- i ill,! ,'iiiii li!; 4! 4 ! l i1 {i) , i\
Efje Virginia Corporation 26 of R(chment Date: i/1/83 Page 21 of r VIEW "A"
^
s, 8l h lI re 1I 2i l
, g ;l VIEW "A"
-+ ., 2 l,L, er l _
Sk 30- -~ l!
i J 5" v
, [+l
! 30* . I -
I.)
I 2f
,r ., I 1"
9 I
i g i
v l
IT 4
2' o f f i e,>- ,
15*
3 ! 15* l
l I2
,, .l. ,_.L l 30 0 O
~
l , v n
! ,, 3 VIEW "B" l _2 l 4 )
e il g i il l
gT l
L lli l 2_2 i l I
,r i, i y Calibration Block (For Nominal Pipe Size 36" and Above)
" Illustrative Only" Figure 4 -
Proc. NO. 1st 2.2 gey, 3 Efje Virganta Corporation 3/1/83 bs of R(chmod Date: Page79 Of 26 CALIBRATION BLOCK REFLECTOR SIZE Figure 5 -
h -
E O --
+ 005
- 0.!25 .000 --> c (d) notch depth
- ," (see table) ga 8 4 -04
\ L_ -
1 i TYPICAL 4 PLACES ON EACH CAllBRATION BLOCK NOTCH DEPTH FOR ULTRASONIC CAllBRATION BLOCKS NOMINAL PIPE WALL NOTCH DEPTH (d)
THICKNES S (T) INCHES MATERIALS INCHES LESS THAN O.312 FERRITIC O.10 T [0.000 0.312 TO 6.0 F ERRITIC O . l O 4 T-0.O O 9'T _ .,
- hO */.
HOLE DIAMETERS FOR ULTRASONIC CAllBRATION BLOCKS MATERIAL THICKNESS (T) INCHES HOLE DIAMETER (INCHES)
UP TO 1" INCLUSIVE 3
g ..
OVER I" THRU 2" T OVER 2" THRU 4" OVER 4" THRU 6" T e+ + es - , .= ---.e=== .-- . =,. + , , . , , __ . . _ . . .- -
- e- m---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - * - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ ~ ' " ' - " ' - * - ~
EIje "t7irginia Corporation 26 of Ethmonb Date: '"/s, Page 23 of 4 ,
Angle Beam Scan Length T T
z 3 l
\
\\$//
\ - ~ / ^l Area Subject to Examination I
Angle beam scan length as shown above, shall be as follows:
Material Minimum Scan Thickness Length 45*
.200 to .400 1.25"
.400 to 1.000 3.00" 1.000 to 1.200' 4.00" 1.200 to 1.500 5.00" 1.500 and Greater 1.1 x 3T Full Node Examination Figure 6
m .-__--_m--_____m
Proc. No. 1st 2.2 gey_ ,
EIJe Virginia Corporation O of Richmonb Date: 3/1/a3 Page 24 of 26 Angle Beam Scan - Typical Each Side q T y T I
Area Subject to Examination
, m, For angle beam scan length as shown above, add the following from each side of the weld fusion line.
Material Minimum Scan Thickness Length 45'
.200" to .400" 1.00"
.400" to 1.000" 2.25" t 1.000" to 1.200" 2.75" 1.200" to 1.500" 3.25" 1.500" and Greater 1.2 x 2T l
l I
l l
l Half Node Examination i Figure 7 l
_ _ . _ . , _ . _ _ . _ . _ _ , _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ . _ _ __ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ . _ _ _._________._.._1
, . , Proc.No.' Ist 2 2 Rev. 1 Efje Virgtuta Corporation 25 26 of Rittimonb Date: 3/1/83 Page gf g i
+/m 1
s
\ sh E. P. N J 7 \:: !!!).If:
l V r A 4
The beam path shall be increased by at least one-half vee if dimension "A" is greater than:
0.93 T for = 43* to 45*
1.6 1 for = 58' to 60*
2.5 T for = 68* to 70*
Weld Coverage Figure 8
-- ,,.,-n-_ -- , - - - - - - - - - . - - -
- - - Proc.No' ist 2.2 q,y 1 Efje Virgtuta Corporation
('
v OfRighmDub Date' 3/1/83 Page 26 of 26
/
to / N.
l d'l/#4y N, p O l/
N6 ,'
C h 8/
/4' L
- e A 1 9 %
l
~
- ~~%
h _
$ u \ \
1
_ i BRANCH _
i CONNECTION er '
E O z O ~
h I
V WELD JOINT 'sQ \
- o .
g 3 w -
--i> t (-d N_ j w $
N l
. \
e
~
l l
Figure 9 Butt Welded Branch Connections '
-, _ _ ._ . _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ . - . _ _ . - _ . _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ - - _ . - , . . _ _ . . _ _ _ _ . . _ ~ _ . . . . , _ _ . . _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ , _ . _ _ _ . - . _ . . _
Figure 10 Ultrasonic Examination Report
- m k Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Iso / Drawing No.
( p i The Virginia Corp.
\/y l
t Procedure txam Surrace txaminer/tevel yca supery1,or oate etakh d 4 %M Component / Piping System Pipe Size Weld Type Cal. Block # Couplant Type Batch No Continuation Sheet Attached -
Trnnsdiscer 0* 45' 60* Tn = r riiman t Yes No S/N Mfer. Madal Size S/N RenRate Field Changes:
Reiect Filter Yes ho .
Freatiency If Yes, Number Rene Anoin Dnmn Coax Calibration 0* 2&5 Scan - 7&8 Scan Freo. Vfden Sound Entry Sound Entry Ca'ihration Checks l Calibration Point To: 0* 45* 60*
Signal Point To: Signal Reflector Signal _ _ _
out out In out Scribe Amp. Sw ye Scribc In In Lo:ation Amp. Sweep Amp. Sweep 50% 50%
l Line DAC -
. \ / Line DAC A\ \\%
-J \\ n T\ \\ r_
n \ N i \\ ' / t L\ '3
' O \\ \\ \ h \\ \ V'
( W\Y< \) \\ \\lu N Ti i g.r
r vm i
I v w
l '
I Ref. dB .
) 10 DAC 10 DAC 10 DAC Additional Comments / Sketch 8 .
8 .
8 -
i i 6 .
6 _ 6 .
4 - 4 .
4 -
i
) 2 .
2 -
2 j 0 0 -
0 .
I 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 1G l Form -101 _ -
O O e "8"'" ll Ultrasonic Examination Report - Continuation Sheet Page of l
E f% Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Iso / Drawing No.
Q f 1m Virginia Corp. Procedure exam Surrace examiner /tevel oate 1 \/y ofakhmond vca Supervisor
% ,ssf Component / Piping System Pipe Size Weld Type Cal. Block Couplant: Type & Batch #
Base Surface Condition l Weld :!:N$ Metal Scan Direction -
Base Exar~ nation Results No. ;;p;:: Scan 2 5 7&8 0 Inspection Limitations Metal Weld UT Visual Remarks i
I A i _ T\ \ L, l af n T\ \ \/
l m A\ . \\ V J \ ( .\ M i
f ,\ \ O 1, \\ ( \ '3V I fe A \ h \\ k i\ \\ \
- (' R \ O \\ \\ W '
N M -du
! \
viv 4
i 1
j l
l ' , , Form UT-lOla 2/82
2 8
/ -
d a 2 r n s o o s -
Z e c n k s
e /
k r R p o i c a m _ -
n o e h e L t T R i
o D a /.
t o _
a N _
c d _
i r l s d a as n d n
t e e -
I end -
a Mki t cS S ei r sh5 _
t o . aT i s l B n i a U vr C .
dk e
p l c ei u Whr S
R l s C as V t ee end Mki cS
. ei o sh2 N aT g
B \'
t' 3Lu t
r l i
n w
a m.
ar ei
/ \
\
\
\
\ 9' e r BD \
o t \
p e l n
a L
v e
D O e c \
M V./
\
P / S ml R r I ag \
n e
n en BA C \\ \\ ( 7
\
- 0h L o i m g .1' i
t a pn
\ \
a x h ei E
i n
m m
e t
D t ed pwa eS e R n\\\\
\
W r
a s mAhD uw m
x S y u . .
s 1 \ \
E g im U. o xSP n a i
c n
i i
p M
g -dNA
(\
c .
o P h n s e
/
t t pi ped a
r r r n eea e u e D we t
l m d n SR o e o m U t c p u s o m m ..
u r o s C P C iiSP nU. o M
2 .
1 p n e r o o r O ihT t t u
g ag i cn F a i e dL m n o m
d I r F
o
\g V %. C xA o t
aD .
m -
M p /
\
- d .
no IN .
/g( d .
c a
l o .
eN W
- I
,,m p The (804) 266 8741 L V Virginia Corp. P- 8** '47d 5809 Lakeside Ave.
Richmond, Virginia 23228 Procedure
Title:
MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF CIRCUMFERENTIAL AND LONGITUDINAL BUTT WELDS IN CLAD FERRITIC VESSELS AND CLASS 1 LOOP PIPING E3ASCO SERVICES INCORPCHATED QUMJTY Procedure No.: AEOU2.ANCE ISI 2.3 gg,37,7,pg This Document is:
[Am-w wie t c- .
Plant Site: Waterford No. 3
(-) lacarpora:a Caaments, and** w wim e Aetut..t: P,sesed m m ergy, M Aeketed an.,
and r n.t.
NOTE:
Custoner: Louisiana Power and Light
. Ebasco Services. Inc. - Agent u.a,,,,,,,,,o,,,,,,,,,
we me w.an* ..,tu.e ,,,,
Approved for Use
- =e,=e- n n, .,6
- '* s' art = stems ., %
Virginia. Corporation: '^^^ M " ~ "
,",,",,Qg'"[Q ***'
Approved for Use BY: /;,.?C r.,$d..q' ,E j DAJE:...$. . D .# .
/
O Rev. Date: 9 /1 n /n ? Rev. 1 Date: 3/1/83 Prepared by: IL 6 %_- -- - Prepared by: b hOMw V Reviewed by: 7 b .; "S '"'--- n ; 4+/l E Reviewed by: Y d C = Ld m--
Reviewed by hadh _Mhm - Reviewed by: - jM Customer: (mMhd LE
//' 4//# /f3
- 4\u\95 Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewert by: Reviewed by:
Customer: Customer:
i Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
i Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer: Customer:
._. ... . . . . . . - - . . - - . . - .-~ .- -- --
1 1
Proc.No. Ts1 2.3 Rev.'
Eije "tT,rga,ntai Corporation of Ricbment Date: 3/1/83 Page 1 of 19 g 1.0 Scope 1.1 This procedure is applicable to, and describes, the requirements for manual ultasonic examination of full penetration circum-ferential and longitudinal butt welds in Class 1 and Class 2 clad ferritic vessels with wall thicknesses greater than 2 inches and
~
in primary coolant piping. This procedure is written in compliance with the ASME Code,Section XI, and ASME Code,Section V, Article 4, 2.0 References 2.1 1977 edition of ASME Boiler and Pressur- Vessel Code,Section XI, with addenda through summer, 1978.
2.2 The Virginia Corporation Written Practice for the Qualificati,on and Certification of NDE Personnel, NDE 4.1, Rev. 3, dated 3/6/81.
2.3 The Virginia Corporation procedure ISI 1.2, Preservice Inspection Decumentation (latest rev'ision).
2.4 The Virginia Corporation procedure ISI 2.1, Ultrasonic Calibration Confirmation (latest revision).
2.5 The Preservice Inspection Program Plan.
2.6 1977' Edition of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section V, with addenda through summer, 1978.
2.7 The Virginia Corporation Procedure VC-QA-103, Generation and Control of Procedures for Waterford No. 3 Preservice Inspection (latest revision).
3.0 Personnel Qualifications 3.1 Personnel performing examinations to this procedure shall be qualified and certified to at least Level II in accordance with the document referenced in paragraph 2.2. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) may be employed as assistants.
Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) shall not independently evaluate or accept the results of an ultrasonic examination.
@ 08 th -=G-94 4 hme NGM' * ' 6o h ep 1 M w& 99 em@m e
Proc.No~ ist 2.3 Rey = 1 Efje "tTirgtnta Corporation
{ l Of Risb d Date: 3/1/83 Page 2 of 19 4.0 . General Requirements 4.1 The area to be examined and contacted by the search unit shall
. be checked to ensure that it is free of dirt, loose scale, machining or grinding particles, weld splatter, or other foreign matter that would impair the free movement of the search unit or affect the examination. If such conditions are detected, they will be rectified prior to conducting the examination.
4.2 The identity and location of welds to be examined shall be as specified in reference 2.'5.
4.3 The examinations conducted in accordance with this procedure shall be done from the 0.D. surface unless specified by the Ebasco PSI construction coordinator that I.D. examinations be performed.
I All examinations shall be performed using the contact method.
4.4 Calibration shall be performed from the side of the calibration block which corresponds to the examination surface of the component.
{ l The calibration / examination surface shall be noted on the report.
4.5 Examinations shall consist of nominal 45' and 60* angle beam shear wave techniques applied in two directions parallel and two directions perpendicular to the weld axis, except where restricted by part geometry or access. A 0* longitudinal beam shall be applied to all areas through which the angle beams must pass.
Other angles may be used provided the measured difference between the angles is at least 10 degrees.
5.0 Equipment and Material Requirements 5.1 Ultrasonic flaw detection instruments shall be of the A-scan pulse echo type, equipped with a stepped gain control calibrated
~
in units of 2 dB or less, and shall be qualified to the requirements of reference 2.4 prior to use at the Waterford 3 site.
Calibration may be valid for a period not to exceed three months.
e t
.-m __, --
m m - , - e- o - -o- -mm ew --w.- - - ------e-----,--w- - - - , - - ,
Proc.No._ rst 2.3 gey_ ,
EIJe Virgtnta Corporation a ofRk$mont Date: 3/1/83 Page 3 of " W 5.2 Search units shall be selected in accordance with figure
- 1. Transducers used shall be certified by the manufacturer as to serial number, size, and central frequency. Search -
units shall be capable of providing the applicable calibrations as required in paragraph 6.0.
5.3 Cables connecting the flav detector to the search unit shall be the coaxial type. Standard lengths of 6 ft. or 12 ft. shall be used for preservice examinations.
5.4 A couplant medium, such as Sonotrace 40, manufactured by Echo Laboratories, Inc., or equivalent, shall be applied to the test surface. Couplant materials shall be analyzed for halogen content according to ASTM D-808 and the residual halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Couplant materials shall also be analyzed for sulfur content according to ASTM D-129 and the residual sulfur shall not exceed 1% by weight. All areas shall be dry wiped to remove excess couplant'following examination.
5.5 Calibration Blocks 5.5.1 Design of the calibration blocks and reflectors shall be essentially as depicted in Figure 2, and shall comply with the requirements of reference 2.6. Exceptions shall be noted in the final report.
5.5.2 Where possible, the material from which the block is fabricated shall be from one of the following:
(a) Hozzle drop out from the component (b) a component prolongation (c) material of the same material specification,
, , product form, and heat treatment as the materials being joined.
~
. , , Prcc.NO. Ist 2.3 pg,y, 1 Elje Yttgittta Corporatiott Of R 4 20Rb Dote' 3/1/83_ pggg 4 Of 19
(
\__/ 4 5.5.3 The finish on the surfaces of the block shall be representative of the surface finishes of the component.
5.5.4 Additional reflectors may be installed; these reflectors shall not interfere
- with establishing the primary reference.
5.5.5 Figure 2 shows calibration block configuration .
with hole size and location. Each weld on the component or piping system shall be represented'by a calibration block having a thickness which meets the requirements of Figure 2. The calibration block thickness must be within one inch (plus or minus) of the component or piping weld thickness. Where the calibration block thickness, plus or minus one inch, spans two of the weld thickness ranges shown in Figure 2, the block's use shall be acceptable in the range of plus or minus one inch of the block's thickness. For example, a four-inch calibration block shall be acceptable for veld thicknesses of three inches to five inches. The holes shall be in accordance with the
, thickness of the block. Where two or
~
more base metal thicknesses are involved, the calibration block thickness is determlaed from the average thickness of the weld. ,
d
, \_ >
~~
PrCC, hh3. ISI 2.3 1
, , , ROE Efje Virgtma Corporation SIRI4m0Rb Date- 3/1/83 PQge 5 Of 19 5.5.6 The basic calibration block shall be curved for welds in materials with diameters 20 in.
(508 mm) and less. A single curved basic calibration block may be used to calibrate the examination on surfaces in the range-of curvature from 0.9 to 1.5 times the basic calibration block diameter.
5.5.7 For examination of welds in materials where the diameter is greater than 2'O in.
(508 mm), a block of essentially the same curvature, or, alternately, a flat basic calibration block, shall be used.
6.0 Calibration 6.1 Instrument calibration for screen height linearity, amplitude control linearity, and beam spread g
{
measurement shall be performed prior to use at the Waterford 3 plant site and ever; three months thereafter in accordance with reference 2.4.
6.2 Straight Beam Calibration for Weld Metal and HAZ 6.2.1 The search unit shall be selected in accordance with Figure 1.
6.2.2 The calibration block shall be identified and selected from reference 2.5.
6.2.3 The temperature between the examination surface and basic calibration block surface shall not exceed 25 F.
l l
, , , pf0C. Ff3. ISI 2.3 gleV. 1 EIje "t7ttstuta Corporation of WW Date: 3/1/83 page 6 of 19 4
6.2.4 Calibration Verification .
6.2.4.1 A calibration check, which is the verification of the instrument sensitivity and sweep range calibration, shall be performed at the beginning and end of each shift of examinations and at the end of each examination category, or every four hours, whichever is less, and with any change in examination personnel.
6.2.4.2 A decrease in sensitivity of 20% or 2dB
, shall require recalibration and re-examination of all items examined since l l the previous acceptable calibration or check.
6.2.4.3 An increase in sensitivity of 20% or 2dB shall require recalibration, re-examination, and data correction of all indications reported since the previous acceptable calibration or check.
6.2.4.4 If any point on the DAC curve has moved on the swee'p line more than 10% of the s
sweep division reading, correct the sweep range calibration and noce the correction in the examination record. If recordable reflectors are noted on the data s'heets, those data sheets shall be voided, a new calibration shall be recorded, and the voided examination areas shall be re-examined.
The instrument sweep range and a distance amplitude curve (DAC) shall be established utilizing the response g from the applicable basic calibration holes in accordance with paragraphs 6.4 and 6.5.
- - - Proc.No. 1st 2.3 gey ,
EIJe Virstma Corporation of Ridatout Date: 3/1/83 Page 7 of 9 g
6.3 Straight Beam Calibration for Base Metal 6.3.1 The sensitivity of the instrument shall be adjusted
~
at a location free of indicatione so that the first back reflection from the far side of the plate will be 80 percent of full screen neight (FSH). The sensitivity as adjusted above shall be continuously monitored during the examination. The base metal straight beam examination may be conducted concurrently and at the same sensitivity as the straight beam examination described in paragraph 6.4.2.
6.4 Straight Beam Calibration for Weld Metal and HAZ 6.4.1 Sweep Range Calibration ,
6.4.1.1 Position the search unit on the calibration ,
i block and obtain the maximum response from l the 1/4T side drilled hole. Adjust the left edge of this indication to line 2 on the screen with the delay control.
6.4.1.2 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the 3/4T hole. Adjust the 1 left edge of this indication to line 6 on j the screen with the range control.
6.4.1.3 Repeat delay and range control adjustments until the 1/4T and 3/4T hole reficctions start at sweep lines 2 and 6.
1 6.4.2 Distance Amplitude Correction 6.4.2.1 Position the search innit for maxim' um response from the hole which gives the j highest amplitude. ;
6.4.2.2 Adjust the sensitivity control to provide an 80% of full' screen indication from that hole. Mark the peak of the indication on )
the screen with a grease pencil or other
'^ suitable marker, l l
l i
I
N 2 YIT9 HIR CorporatiOH ' '
{ } Of E(@M M g* '3/1/83 P0g8 8 Of 19 o
6.4.2.3 Position the search unit for maximdm response from each of the remaining calibration holes.
6.4.2.4 Mark the peaks of these indications on the screen.
6.4.2.5 Connect the screen marks and extend through the thickness to provide the distance amplitude curve for the side drilled holes. This is the primary reference level.
6.5 Angle Beam Calibration 6.5.1 Sweep Range Calibration 6.5.1.1 , Position the search unit for the maximum response from the 1/4T side drilled hole.
Adjust the lef t edge o! this indication to line 2 on the screen with the delay control.
6.5.1.2 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the 3/4T hole. Adjust the left edge of this indication to line 6 on the screen with the range control.
6.5.1.3 Repeat delay and range control adjustments until the 1/4T and 3/4T hole reflections start at sweep lines 2 and 6 respectively.
, 6.5.1.4 Position the search unit for maximum
, response from the square notch on the !
opposite surface. The indication will l
appear near sweep line 8. l 6.5.1.5 Two divisions on the sweep equals 1/4T.
6.5.2 Distance-Amplitude Correction I i
6.5.2.1 Calibration from the clad side (a) Position the search unit for maximum l I response from *he hole which gives the highest amplitude.'
_ - , _ ,..m_,..,m . - - - . - _ _ - - . - - - - , . , - . , -
I Proc.No. 1st 2.3 Rey, ,
EIJe "t7ttgtuta Corporation of Ric$mont i
DateL 3/1/83 Page 9 ' of 19 g
6.5.2.1, continued (b) Adjust the sensitivity control to provide an 80% FSH response from the hole. Mark the peak of the indication on the screen.
(c) Position the search unit for maximum response from each of the remaining holes. ~
(d) Mark the peak of these indications on the screen.
(e) Position the search unit for maximum amplitude from the 3/4T hole indication
, after the beam has bounced from the, opposite surface. The indication should appear near sweep line 10. Mark the peak on the screen for the 5/4T position.
(f) Connect the screen marks for the side drilled holes to provide the distance amplitude curve. This is the primary reference level.
6.5.2.2 Calibration from the unclad side (a) From the clad side of the block, determine the d3 change in amplitude between the 3/4T and 5/4T positions.
(b) From the unclad side, perform ,
, calibrations as noted in 6.5.2.1 (a) through (d).
(c) To determine the amplitude for the 5/4T hole, position the search unit for maximum amplitude from the 3/4T hole. Decrease the signal amplitude by the number of dB determined in (a).
I
Proc.No. IS1 2.3 g,y_ 1 EIJe E.rgm fa Corporation t
{ } of R@moab Date' -3/1/83 Page 10 of 9 6.5.2.2 (c) continued Mark the height of this signal amplitude at sweep line 10 (5/4T).
(d) Connect the screen marks to provide the distance-amplitude curve. This I l
i is the primary reference level. This will permit evaluation of indications down to the clad surface (near sweep line 8).
7.0 Examination 7.1 Straight Beam Examination for Base Metal 7.1.1 Prior to performing angle beau examinations, the base material through which the angle beam will pass (reference Fig. 3) shall be completely scanned with a straight beam search unit to detect reflectors which n.ight affect the interpretation of the results I of the angle beam examination.
7.1.2 Calibration shall be as indicated in paragraph 6.3.
7.1.3 Scans shall overlap at least ten percent.
7.1. 4 . Alternatively, the base metal examination may be conducted concurrently and at the same calibration l
s..s described in paragraph 6.4, provided that the I scan sensitivity (2 x reference) is at least as sensitive as that required in paragraph 6.3'.
7.2 Straight Beam Examination for Weld Metal and HAZ 7.2.1 The examination for planar reflectors shall be
[' performed on the entire volume of weld and adjacent base material in accordance with Figure 3.
7.2.2 Calibration shall be as indicated in paragraph 6.4.
l I l.
I o Prec.No. Isl 2.3 q,y 1 Efje Eorstnia Corporation Of R@M Date' 3/1 83 Page 11 ' of 19 g
7.2.3 Penetration shall be verified by obtaining a
, reflection from an opposite surface of the material being examined when the two surfaces -
, are parallel.
7.2.4 Scans shall overlap at least ten percent.
7.2.5 Alternatively, the weld metal and HAZ examination may include the examination detailed in paragraph 7.1, provided that the scan sensitivity (2 x reference) is at least as sensitive as that required by paragraph 7.1.2.
7.3 Angle Beam Examination for Reflectors Parallel to the Weld 7.3.1 The primary scan for reflectors parallel to the weld shall be 1/2 node from both sides of the weld.
7.3.2 If it is impossible to examine the required l material with a 1/2 node examination from both ;
sides of the weld, the reasons for the partial examination shall be documented in accordance with paragraph 9.4. j 7.3.3 The area of interest shall be the weld and HAZ, and the required amount of base metal on each side of the weld (reference Figure 3).
7.3.4 Calibration shall be as indicated in paragraph
)
6.5. )
7.3.5 The scan pattern shall start at one edge of the area to be examined with the ultrasonic search unit transmitting an angle beam perpendicular to the weld axis. The search unit shall be moved towards and away from the weld such that the calibrated beam passes through the whole area of the weld and base metal to be examined.
Concurrent with this scan, the search unit shall be swiveled 15 right and 15 left and progressively {
indexed along the length of the veld such that the whole scan pattern follows a "saw-tooth" pattern.
Proc.No. m 2.3 Rev. 1 EIje "t7ttginta Corporation of Rittment Date: 3/1/83 P4ge.u of 19 I 7.3.5, continued The " pitch" of the "saw-tooth" shall be such that on each pass the ultrasonic beam covers at least 10 percent of the area covered by the previous adjacent pass. The weld and required amount of adjacent base metal is to be fully examined by this procedure. When practical, the examination shall be accomplished from both sides of the weld except where restricted by part geometry or access.
7.4 Angle Beam Examination for Reflectors Transverse to the Weld 7.4.1 The angle beam examination for reflectors transverse to the weld shall be performed on the weld crown and adjacent base material as necessary to examine the weld root by 1/2 node in two directions along the veld.
l I 7.4.2 If it is impossible to examine the required material wich a 1/2 node examination from both sides of the weld, the reasons for the partial examination shall be documented in accordance with paragraph 9.4, and reported to the L.P.6 L. P.S.I. coordinator.
7.4.3 The area of interest shall be the weld and HAZ, and the required amount of base metal on each side of the weld (reference Figure 3).
7.4.4 Calibration shall be as indicated in paragraph 6.5.
7.4.5 The search unit shall be placed at T on <sne edge of the inspection area directing the angle beam into the material parallel to the weld axis. From this position the search unit shall be moved parallel to the weld and indexed toward the opposite side of the weld such that the next scan will cover
~~~
at least 10 percent of the area covered b[the previous adjacent scan. Parallel scans shall be
{ l repeated in this manner until the opposite side of the weld and base metal is reached and examined. The 1
_,.,mm.+., me . -- * * * " * * * * * " * " *
=- - , - , _ ,- -- -- ,
- , - - , , . _ , , . - - , ,,,-._,-.,-,,.,,-,,e-at- a-. ei-m-- -----
l Proc.No' ist 2.3 Roy, 3 i Efje "t7ttstufa Corporation l Of RI4pd DQfe' 3/1/83 PGge l.10f 19 l 7.4.5, continued. '
search unit shall be swiveled 15 right and 15 left and progressively indexed along the length of tha. weld such that the whole scan pattern follows a "saw-tooth" pattern. The " pitch" of the "saw-tooth" shall be such that on each pass 1.he ultrasonic beam c overs at least i 10 percent of the area covered by the previous adjacent !
pass. The weld and required amount'of adjacent base i metal is to be fully examined by this procedure, except where restricted by part geometry or access.
7.5 Scanning shall be performed at a gain setting of at least 2 times the reference level (6 dB increase in amplitude). Recording of indications shall be carried out with the gain control set at the reference level.
7.6 Ra.te of search unit covement shall not exceed 61n./sec. (153 mm/sec.).
8.0 Evaluation and Recording of Straight Beam Examination for Laminar Reflectors 8.1 All areas giving indications equal to or greater than the back reflection shall be recorded.
8.2 All areas where one or more discontinuities produce a continuous total loss of back reflection accompanied by continuous indications in the same plane shall be recorded.
8.3 The f ollowing data shall be recorded for laminar reflectors:
8.3.1 Sweep reading of laminar reflectors from the surface.
8.3.2 Position from the reference marking.
8.3.3 Location parallel to the reference marking for each search unit position, giving the recordable extent of the indication as the laminar area is scanned on parallel scan paths.
- ..--s. __ r.,_,, , - , - - - - , . . - - - , - , y .-
1 1
II)2 YiT9 inia 60rporatiOH "' ' " '
of Ritbmonb Date: 3/1/83 Pagel' of 29 8.4 Where Inminar reflectors interfere with the scanning of examination volumes for planar reflectors, the angle beam examination technique shall be modified to examine the maximum feasible volume, within the specified examination volume, and the description of the volume excluded by the lamination shall be noted on the data sheet.
9.0 Evaluation and Recording of Straight Beam and Angle Beam Indications in l
the Weld and Heat Affected Zone 9.1 All indications 20% of th u rimary reference DAC or greater shall be investigated to determine the shape, identity', location, and type of indicat. ion. Additionally, all indications, regardless of amplitude, which the examiner judges to be potentially indicative of a crack or lack of fusion shall be investigated to determine the shape, identity, location, and type of indication.
I } 9.1.1 Any indication categorized as a flaw shall be recorded and reported in accordance with the requirements of I reference 2.3.
9.1.2 Any indication resulting from the metallurgical structure within the material shall be considered when assessing the eff ectiveness of the examination. Restrictions or variations to the examination due to the metallurgical structure shall be reported. Additional search unit angles may be used during evaluation as an aid in interpretation. .
9.1.3 Clad interface and back wall reflections need not be recorded.
9.1.4 Geometric indications that are equal to or greater than 50% of the primary reference DAC shall be acknowledged by recording their length and location. .
4 4
k
- m. w . . er * * * * * * **=- a* + + - - -*- == * * * *-**- - -
- - . . ,. . , . ,..-...e-. -
.---n.- - - - - . - - n -- a. ,- ..w. ,,w - - - , -
Proc. No. 1st 2.3 gey 1 Efje Virgtnta Corporation Of3(ChtnOnb Date' 3/1/83 Page 15 of 19 l I <
9.2 Any indication which is equal to, or greater than, 50% of I the primary reference DAC shall be evaluated to the extent necessary to determine the size, shape, identity, and location of the reflector. Indications shall be recorded in accordance with paragraph 9.3 and reported in accordance with the requirements of reference 2.3.
9.3 Data required when indications are equal to, or greater than, 50% of DAC:
9.3.1 All search unit position and location dimensions shall be recorded to the nearest tenth of an inch.
9.3.2 Maximum percent of DAC, sweep reading of indication, search unit position, location along the length of the weld, and beam direction.
9.3.3 Through-Wall Dimensions:
9.3.3.1 For reflectors 50 to 100% DAC, the l I minimum and maximum sweep readings and their position and location along the length of the reflector for 50% DAC when approaching and moving away from the reflector's maximum signal direction.
9.3.3.2 For reflectors exceeding 100% DAC, minimum and maximum sweep readings and their position and location along the length of the reflector for 50% of the maximum amplitude when approaching and moving away from the reflector's maximum signal' direction.
-.c - , , , . . ~ . . _ , . - _ _ -, - _ . - _ . - _ , ._ _ - _ , ._ - , . - .
- - q,y Proc.No _1s12.3 Efje Virstma Corporatiott 1 g(R[43ROQb M g* '3/i/83 PQg8 16 of _19 ,
9.3.4 Length Dimension 9.3.4.1 The length of the reflector shall be obtained by recording the position and location along the length of ~ weld as determined by 50% of DAC for each end of the reflector.
9.4 Welds that did not receive a complete examination according to paragraph 7.0 shall have the partial examination noted on the data sheet as follows:
9.4.1 The extent of the examination performed shall be noted.
9.4.2 If th'e volumetric examination was performed from one side of the weld only, it shall be noted and an entry made indicating what steps were taken to ensure that the required area on the far side of the weld was examined.
l I 9.4.3 The reason (s) that a specific examination was impractical shall be noted. For example, support or component restricts access, fitting prevents adequate ultrasonic coupling on one side, component to component veld prevents ultrasonic examination, etc.
9.5 Investigation and reporting of indications shall be performed at the reference sensitivity.
10.0 Documentation of Examination 10.1 All data relative to the examination and reportable indications shall be reported in accordance with reference 2.3, and on forms similar to those shown in Figures 4, 5, and 6.
l
_ , , _ _ , , _ , , . - - - , . , _ . --= = . - ' ' " - - ' ' - - ' ' ' ' " ' " ' ' " ~ ' " "
Proc.No. IS12.3 qay, 1 EIJe 't7ttginta Corporation O! 5%B8088% D0t0* 3/1/83' P0g8 17'Of 19 4
Figure 1 TRANSDUCER AND SEARCH UNIT SELECTION Ancle Beam Examination
- Nominal Transducer Material Maximum Nominal Nominal Thickness Size Frequency Angles
.250" to .400" 1/4" dia. or 1/4" x 1/4" 2.25 MHZ 45 " 60
.400" to 1,000" 1/2" dia. or 1/2" x 1/2" 2.25 MHZ 45 60 1.000" to 1.200" 3/4" dia. or 3/4" x 3/4" 2.25 MHZ 45 60 l
1.200" and greater 1-1/8" dia. or 1" x 1" 2.25 MHZ 45 60 Straight Beam Examination *
- Nominal Pipe Transducer Diameter Maximum Size Nominal Frequency less than 12" dia. 1/2" dia. or 1/2" x 1/2" 2.25 MHZ 12" dia. and greater 1-1/8" dia. or 1" x 1" 2.25 MHZ l
l CNote: Other transducers may be used where weld geometry or metallurgical characteristics impede effective use of the above listed angles, frequencies, or sizes.
1.
/.
l l
O
, , , Proc.No. 1st 2.3 gey. 1 Eije E,rgtuta C,,orporation 18 19 of Richmonb Date: 2/1/83 Page of
\ >
2 in. long 1/8 to 1/4 in. Dia. Flat End a nonehes n.r o ,
b Th*ough Qad Thickness
, 2 % T Deepinto ths Base Metal
/I //
~
7
=*
/ i, I
g!'?
/
/ '
_/ sin.' 4 /f J--- - --- f - - #.' -
T14
[(/sf /l' ,'a ~ Clad T $ !YY _ 'l /p ' fy T/2 '# /
/ 6 n.'
- y& Tl4 ,1_ -
'/
1 1/2 in. min. +
f 4- --
Onlied and Reamed
% 3 h. %* Y T/2' T/4' --> es-- g, T/4* - > 4---13/4 T' ;
c sT* ;
l l Basic Calibration Hole deld Thickness (t) Block Thickness (T) Diameter ***
Over 2 in. thru 4 in. 3 in. or t 3/16 in.
Over 4 in. thru 6 in. 5 in, or t 1/4 in.
Over 6 in. thru 8 in. 7 in. or t 3/16 in.
Over 8 in. thru 10 in. 9 in. or t 3/8 in.
Over 10 in. thru 12 in. 11 in or t 7/16 in.
Over 12 in. thru 14 in. 13 in. or t 1/2 in.
Over 14 in. ** **
~
- Minimum dimensions.
- For each increase in thickness of 2 in. or fraction thereof, the hole diameter shall increase 1/16 in.
- The tolerances for hole diameters shall be ! 1/32 in.
The tolerances on notch depth shall be +10 and -20%.
The tolerance on hole location through the thickness shall be ! 1/8.
The perpendicular tolerance on notch reflecting surface shall be ! 2 degre,es.
"1LLUSTRATIVE ONLY" Typical Calibration Block Figure 2
,. - ._..y. --.,-.--,-,,m._,__...._r.,. _ . , _ , . , .y.. , ....,..% -..y.,... , ..-r ,,,
, , . Proc. No. Ist 2.3 gey, i flEI.Je T6ttgtnta Corporation of Mithm0fth Date- 3/1/83 Page 19 of 19 O
Extent of Metal Straight Beam Examination ,
, Length of Angle Beam scon. Typical of m
~
' each side. See table b elow.
Areo subject to examination T/2 I
\ \ / / K
\ \s l l
/, j / / Material N 4 p Thickn e s s f
\ /
f \ \t l / V O
Weld For angle beam scan length, add the following from each side of the weld fusion line.
l Material l- Thickness 45* 60*
2.5" 3.75 5.75 3" 4.5 6.75 3.5" 5.25 8.0 4" 6.0 9.0 4.5" 6.75 10.0 5" 7.5 11.0 l 5.5" 8.25 12.5 6" 9.0 13.5 6.5" 9.75 14.5 7" and Greater T + T/2 1.73T + T/2
- Straight beam scan length shall be in accordance with the 60* angle
!. beam scan length.
Extent of Examination Figure 3 m
-w,-, , , - - - - - - - - , .
<{
naure 4 Ultrostnic Exemination Rep:rt f m Customer Plant Unic Loop / Zone Iso / Drawing No..
h p iN t \,/
Virginia . , , -
Corp. erocedor. Ex.m Sure.c. Examiner /'*"*1 vCR Surervisor. *c'
%#, Ccaponent/ Piping System Pipe Size Weld Type Cal. Block # Couplant:
1 Type Batch No.
j Continuation Sheet Attached Trannaticar o' 45' 60* Tnnernmene a
Yes No , S/N Mfer. Mndel Size S/N ReoRate Field Changes: :.:.;.:.
Reiect Filter Yes No ,
Frecuency If Yes. Number Rene An o1's Damn Coax Calibration O' 2&5 Scan - 7&8 Scan Freo. Vidon S und Entry Sound Entry Ca'ibration Checks Calibration Point To: 0* 45' 60*
Signal Point To: Signal l Raficctor Signal In out Scribe Amp. Sw Scribc 50% In out In out Location Amp. Sweep Amp. Sweep 50%
Line DAC e ,
Line DAC l A\ \\M l m f \\ G T\ \\ C. '
! n \ N i \\ ' / t L\ '3 i
O \\ \\ \ h \\ \ V' i ( W \\W \\ \\1u N X\ ',%3 '
V U J L-v
'R i
~ '
Ref. dB _
10 10 10 Additional Comments / Sketch DAC
~
, 8 .
8 -
8 -
6 . 6 . 6 .
4 . 4 .
4 .
l i
- 2 -
2 -
2 0 o ,
e ,
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 l
l Ferm UT-101 2/82
- 2 -
8 h / .
c s 2 t k a r e B a _
f t m _
o a D
R e
o e
p N y g T e
g i n : s l
t t w n a a a a l
u u P D r l p
s s e i
/ r u R V o o o s s n I i o v k i e r c t n e o a p l n o u B i t Z S m T e /
. a U R l x e p o C a E h V C
_ o S L e
n o
n p y
i t
d l
o T i e i
t d
d n
W a t i l o u n e C i
n U l e
W e v c 3L dM t l n e a ea V
(
L f st o / r ae
\ A3 C r e u BM \ '
i e
n i S
z S
\
(
\
t m s \ \
r a e n o C\T )
o p E x
i p
- i ( \\ '
e P t a _ nV
\\
\\
R n
t n
a e
c a
i t
m
\
.1\
\ W _ -
i o l P
f r
u i
L 4 0K \
\
\
\
V t
n a S m o \\ O n m e i A \\ \
a t t hD e i
s c m E x y e m ,
\ v a S s
p F\
\
\j x g n E i n I T .A v -
i c
n p
i P
f(
r' % \
o / 0 s r e t e r n a
r m d u e n
t o e o n 8 t
l s c p o U u o m i &
C r o t P C c 7 e
r 5 i D
e 5 r . n u
g p a c
i r S F o Cedoo 2 alw ik if na ean l
M ge st a aec l a
r BMS a 1 i V
s
.,MM g w f
g e
.:M j s .
/ y n
\ e .
pE d .
fi l o eN W
! . ! . ;i : '. j i l !! ! ; , l ! l :
j
/M naure 6 Ultrosenic Examination Report Indicatisn Record a
\g g, Customeq Plant Unit Loop / Zone I. \/ Virginia Corp. Procedure Examiner / Level VCR Supervisor Date Y 'l Elth* **d - '
- t NM Component / Piping System ISO Drawing No. Cal. Standard No./ Thickness Indication Minimum Depth Maximum Depth Base Metal Base Metal Wald Ind Max.% Length S.U. Sweep S.U. Sweep Beam Beam Thickness Weld Thickness No. No. DAC From To Pos. Reading Pos. Reading Angle Dir. 2 Side rhick. 5 Side Remarks i
I
/\
! <3\ (
i .- C_N \\ 3 m M_ \\ V . \\\ L i m 11 \\ 01 \\ / \9u
! f n3\h \\ h (\\\
! \ Ni u \\ \W' l AH #
- O"
- . . - . - - . , sa ,
1
. . . . - - l
/ -s\
'g ' g The Virginio Corp.
(804) 266 8741 P 0 8** '47d ni e 5809 Lakeside Ave.
v Richmond, Virginia 23228 Procedure Title ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF STUDS AND BOLTS EBASCO SEP. VICES INCORPCRATED
^~
. . ..L~.'::
ASSURANCE Procedure No.: ISI 2.4 ENGINEERING
, $dM UUUWiHCGI 64.
Reviewed Withest Comments O ""
- With Comerfs as Noted:
Plant Site: Waterford No. 3 ==== n c ,e.iii. e a-wt; e, ees . ,,
Reise #nese
] w .ted: ...m..
NOTE:
Customer: Louisiana Power and Light ,"*", " gay *,=, =g Ebasco Services Inc. - Agent m en a, ii n ,,.ir;,,,,,,,, ,,,,,
me h as ==, ew n me m.m eni ,
- . .. .- ~ , . , , \
eaen ., .a m.t. ...,.,,
Approved for Use ,,,,,,,, ,,,, j ,,,,,,,t u,,,, i,, ,w,
)
/^ Virginia. Corporation: 6 M' '- ' - - =c=8ap.l..jeps =m, m
o,sn.
m, a .
-y. .g. - ..
Approved for Use d, 4S' :>^g...
DAp:. ,,,,,,,,.
Customer:
Rev. O Date: 2/10/82 Rev. Date:
l Prepared by: I 6 E- - --
Prepared by:
l Reviewed by: ^r --: 6 Ner c _ MJT-- Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: YM Reviewed by:
Customer:
Rev. 1 Date: 3/1/83 Rev. Date:
Prepared by: b ,* . d_- #% _
Prepared by:
Reviewed by: I 6 - - = / ,l h Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed Customer:
by ( Mbh.h3 M- LE Customer:
//' 4 /s8/.ts 4\uw s Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer: Customer:
, , , Proc.No. ISI 2.4 Rey-_
1 Efje "t7ttginta Corporation g
of Ethmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 1 of 9 1.0 Scope 1.1 This procedure is applicable to, and describes ~ the requir'ements for manual ultrasonic examination of studs and bolts. This procedure complies with ASME Code,Section XI. l 2.0 References 2.1 1977 Edition of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Ccde,Section II, with addenda thru summer,1978.
2.2 1977 Edition of ASME Boiler and Pressure vessel Code,Section V, with addenda thru summer, 1978.
2.3 The Virginia Corporation Written Practice for the Qualification and Certificar. ion of NDE Personnel, NDE 4.1, Rev. 3 dated 3/6/81.
2.4 The Virginia Corporation procedure ISI 1.2, Preservice Inspection Documentation (latest revision).
2.5 The Virginia Corporation procedure ISI 2.1, Ultrasonic Equipment Calibration Confirmation (latest revision).
2.6 The Preservice Inspection Program Plan.
2.7 The Virginia Corporation Procedure VC-QA-103, Generation and Control of Procedures for Waterford No. 3 Preservice Inspection (latest revision).
3.0 Personnel Qualifications i
3.1 Personnel performing examinations to this procedure shall be qualified and certified to at least Level II in accordance with the document referenced in paragraph 2.3. Level I ,
and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) may be employed as assistants. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) shall not independently evaluate or accept the results of an ultrasonic examination, i
I
ISl 2.4 Proc. No. gev' 7 o Efje 't7trgtnta Corporation ,
j OfMIChm0RD Date; 3/1/83 PQge 2 Of I
4.0 General Requirements '
4.1 Surfaces from which the examination is to be conducted shall be checked to ensure that they are free of all foreign matter. -
pits, nicks, or dents, etc., that would adversely affect )
or limit the examination. If such ccnditions are detected.-
they will be rectified prior to conducting the examination. 1 4.2 The identity and location of studs and bolts to be examined shall be as specified in the Preservice Inspection Plan.
4.3 The scanning rate shall not exceed 6 in./sec.
5.0 Equipment and Material Requirements 5.1 Ultrasonic flaw detection instruments shall be of the A-scan pulse echo type equipped with a stepped gain control calibrated in units of 2 dB or less, and shall be qualified Q to the requirements of ISI 2.5 prior to use at the Waterford 3 site. Qualifications may be valid for a period not to exceed three months.
5.2 Cables connecting the flaw detector to the search unit
- shall be the coaxial type. Standard lengths of 6 ft. or 12 ft, shall be used for preservice examinations.
5.3 A couplant medium, such as Sonotrace 40, manufactured by Echo Laboratories, Inc., or equivalent, shall be applied to the test surface. Couplant materials shall be analyzed for halogen content according to ASTM D-808 and the residual halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight.
Couplant materials shall also be analyzed for sulfur content according to ASTM D-129 and the residual sulfur shall not exceed 1% by weight. All areas shall be dry wiped to remove excess couplant following cxamination.
Proc.No ist 2.4 Rey,1 Efje "t7ttgtnta Corporation ofEkhmnnb Date: 3/,/a3 Page 3 of.9 )
4 5.4 The transducer element shall not exceed 3/4" diameter and shall have a nominal f requency of 2.25 MHz. Transducers used shall be certified by the manufacturer as to serial number, size, and central frequency. Plastic shoes may I
be used to improve ultrasmic coupling to the test part.
Transducers shall be capable of providing the applicable calibrations as required in paragraph 6.0.
5.5 Calibration Blocks 5.5.1 Calibration for studs and bolts shall be estab-lished on a test bar of the same nominal composi-tion and diameter as the stud or bolt to be examined. The design is to be essentially as depicted in Figure 2.
6.0 Calibration 6.1 Prior to conducting examinations, the complete system to be utilized shall be calibrated on the applicable cali-bration block. The system shall include the ultrasonic unit (and battery pack, if applicable), cable or cables, search unit, couplant, and any other apparatus, instru-ment.or circuit employed between the instrument and the calibration block surface. Once calibration has been established, any change to any part of the system, includ-
.i n g the operator, will require at least a verification of the calibration which shall be documented.
6.1.1 The transducer shall be selected according to paragraph 5.4 6.1.2 The calibration block shall'be identified and l
selected from reference 2.6 for the particular item to be examined. Calibration shall be established by using a calibration block similar to the one f illustrated in Figure 2. The calibration block shall be a minimum of 3 the length of the stud or bolt to be examined.
l
Proc. No. IST 2,4 Rgy, Efje Virgtuta Corporation 1
{ } of Rf4mont Date: 3/'/83 Page 4 Of 9 4
6.1.3 The temperature difference between the examination surface and basic calibration block surface shall not exceed 25* F.
6.2 Sweep range calibration 6.2.1 Position the transducer on the calibration block to obtain a clear reflection from notch "A" of Figure 2.
6.2.2 Using notch "A" refl.ector, adjust the delay and range controls so thac the notch reflector is at sweep position 1.2. I 6.2.3 Positio' the first back reflection at sweep posi-tion 6.6 on the screen with the delay control.
6.2.4 Repeat delay and range control adjustments un,til the reflectors start at their respective posi-tions. The sweep is now set for 100% coverage of the calibration block length.
6.3 Distance amplitude correction 6.3.1 Position the transducer over notch "A". I 6.3.2 Adjust the sensitivity control to provide an 80%
full screen height (FSH) indication from notch I "A". Mark the peak of the indication on the screen with a grease pencil or other suitable marker. This will correspond to DAC point "A"
! on the data sheet.
6.3.3 Position the transducer over notch position "B" i of Figure 2. l
! 6.3.4 Without changing the sensitivity control, mark the ceak of this indication on the screen. This will correspond to DAC point "B" on the data sheet.
6.3.5 Connect the screen marks and extrapolate point "A" through the end of the calibration block to provide a smooth DAC curve. Record the reference f
>l I dB on the data sheet for DAC point "A". This is the primary reference level for the first half of the stud length.
W w Proc.No. Ist 2.4 Rey i Efje Virgittia Corporatiott Of Rf4M Dofe: 3/1/83 Page 5 of 9 { }
6.3.6 With the transducer over notch "B", adjust the
~
sensitivity to bring the notch reflection to 80%
FSH. This shall be DAC position "C" on the data sheet.
6.3.7 Position the transducer over notch "C" of Fi8ure 2.
Peak the reflector for maximum screen height with-out changing the sensitivity level from DAC point "C". Mark this amplitude o'n the screen as DAC l point "D".
6.3.8 Connect DAC points C" and "D" and extrapolate through the back reflection producing a smooth DAC curve. Record the sensitivity on the data sheet fer PAC point "C". This is the primary, reference level for the second half of the stud length.
6.4 Calibration verification I 6.4.1 A calibration check, which is the verification of i the instrument sensitivity and sweep range cali-bration, shall be performed at the beginning of I
each day of examinations and at the end of each examination category, or every four hours, which-ever is less, and with any change in examination personnel.
6.4.2 A decrease in sensitivity of 20% or 2 dB shall re-quire recalibration and re-examination of all items examined since the previous acceptable calibration or check.
6.4.3 An increase in sensitivity of 20% or 2dB shall re-quire recalibration, re-examination, and data correction of,all indications reported since the previous acceptable calibration or check.
6.4.4 If any point on the DAC curve has moved on the sweep line more than 10% of the sweep division reading, e, ,- - - , ---- - a w-- . - , . - - - , , , - - - - -
Proc No is1 2.4 gey 1 Efje Virgtnta Corporation
( ) of Ekhmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 6 of 9 4
correct the sweep range calibration and note the correction in the examination record. If the recordable reflectors are noted on the data sheets, l those data sheets shall be voided, a new calibra-tion shall be recorded, and the voided examina-l tion areas shall be re-examined.
- 7.0 Examination 7.1 Studs and bolts shall be examined from both ends when pos-sible. If installed, studs or bolts may be examined from one end providing one end is inaccessable and the geometry and surface condition of the exposed end is conducive to a I meanin8f ul examination. If an examination cannot be per-formed or only partially performed, the reason (s) shall be noted on the data sheet.
l l 7.2 Scanning shall he accomplished in concentric circular pat-l terns or along the radius lines with at least a 10 percent i scan overlap, such that the entire end surface is scanned.
A short saw-tooth scan pattern may be used to improve discrimination of reflections from threaded areas.
7.3 Reflections from threaded areas shall be carefully observed l to detect and investigate possible indications emanatin8 l from these sections.
7.4 Scanning sensitivity shall be twice (+6 dB) the calibra-tion sensitivity.
8.0 Evaluation and recording of indications 8.1 All non-geometric indications from threaded areas shall be evaluated and reported. All other indications exceeding l 20 percent of the DAC shall be investigated to determine maximum response, location, and probable cause.
8.2 Indications that are 50% of DAC or more shell be evaluated
{ } and recorded on the ultrasonic indication report to the l
Proc.No. TsT 74 Rev 1 l EIje TTirgtnta Corporation '
of Richmonb Date.' 3/1/83 Page 7 of 9 I
extent that shape, orientation, location, and possible identity of the indication producing area can be assessed.
The extremities of the discontinuity shall be defined as the points where the signal amplitude dropsoto 50%-of the calibrated DAC line or 50% of the peak signal, whichever is less.
8.3 Indications judged to be caused by beam redirection and/or wave mode conversion shall be verified by use of another transducer erze and/or frequency that has been calibrated in accordance with 6.1 through 6.4.5 and noted on the re-port. Signals resulting from the thread surfaces or other designed geometry need not he reported.
8.4 In the event that reportable indications are detected,on items that are not permanently identified with a unique designation, the item shall be securely tagged or posi-tively identified.
9.0 Documentation of examination 9.1 All data relative to the exanination and reportable indi-cations shall be reported in accordance with reference 2.4 l and on forms similar to those shown in Figures 3 and 4.
l
--,,,,e-,,, p- p ,,-.,,e-----,- ,-_ -- - - , , - -~e-
-- .m
Proc. No._ 1st 2.4 gey_
EIJe Yttstuta Corporation i
i l dR W Date' 3/1/83 Page 8 'of 9 i
kStud N
~
/ '
\
/
\
l' 1 1 V /
\
/
\ l /
% s j }
. Scan Area To Examine ,
Stud Volume "
l r
[ l x a I
i e l 1 I l l E l
$1
%P
~'
N e
'7W~ l fS [e
- I
$ 5 I
I 5" l l l l l s l l .- -
l l
= ;
Volume of Examination Figure 1
Proc. No. Is1 2.4 pl6V- 1 Efje Virgtuta Corporation of Ekbmont Date: 3/1/83 Page 4 of 9 l l Notch "B"~,
Notches Not l 1" l- p , , , ,
Aligned ll i' il lli
& M\
Notch "A" I 4 y+ ij "o l l I l
'i d ff j 1 1 l l 1 1 g g Notch DIMENstons l
BOLT on Stuo Sizr max. NcTcw DeuCnsioNs Notch "B" p m llj DEPTH (IN.)* AREA (IN. )
1 I g l >h I N.
_ DIAMETER O.17[ 0.059 l l 2 IN. 70 klN. O.1 07 0.027 l l DIAMETER
- NOTC:
! I NOTCH DEPTH 70 SE MEASURED FROM THC BOTTOM k) 0F THE THREAD ROOT 70 80TTOM OF NOTCH.
I ij l I l
i I (1 I i l
Notch "C" P x ls s l,
L,bN l
~
Figure 2 I r
Figura 3 ISI 2.4 CN ULTRASONIC DATA SHEET g The
\ g Virginia Corp. FOR Oa ... .
\, / STUDS S BOLTS Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure Examiner / Level Date
- Component / Piping System ISO Drawing No. VCR Supervisor CALIBRATION BLOCK TRANSDUCER INSTRUMENT Col Block No. S/N .Monu. Model CALIBRATION SURFACE Size S/N Rep Rote Flat . End. Frog Re}ect Filter Groved End Boom Angle Domp Couplant, . ,
BotchNo. ~
Other: wave Mode Freq Lone O Sheer O video Coax C AllBR ATION DAC .Peint "A" %FSH REF DB Sweep Position DAC Point "B " ,
%FSH . Spesp Position .
DAC Point "C" %FSH REF DB Sweep Position DAC Point "D " %FSH Sweep Posithm Signal To Noise Rotle - -
Colibration Checks
.' .. :. IN
. ':.. OUT
.i ': 3*
- : IN OUT J..:isi:Kei:!.452....:Me s::. ..:.R s 2....:.:..I!$is..... ~ . 3 s:s:K: IN OUT EXAMINATION RESULTS ITEM NO. ., COMMENTS ..,. . . ,
1 n\( '
-Q\ \ \ 7 C41\\vJ \ b\ ?
t ni n\ \' K\\\ '
W%3\pr W2\\\W I-i O
VCR Form -UT-lO3 (rev. l. 8/82)
- ~ , ~ . - ~ ~ - - - -
' '"~
Figure 4 ISI 1 ,
/ \g p p n,. Ultrasonic Indication Record g i/ Virginia Corp. for
- IE3CI""**d
, (Ys / Studs 8 Bolts l
Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure --
Examiner / Level Date Component / Piping System Iso / Drawing No. VCR Supervisor Indication Signal Amplitude _
Indication Depth
, Indication Location Indicate by sketch below approximate location of indication.
I I 9
\ .
Form UT-lO4 2/82
i- .
i /
j, , tg K \ 'The (804) 266 8741 Virginia Corp. P 0 8'" 9474 l[
(
L, %s 7 .e am 5809 Lakeside Ave.
Richmond, Virginia 23228
,. Procedure
Title:
ULTRASONIC THICKNESS MEASUREMENT
, I
~
ESASCO SERVICES l
INCORPORATED m , v -,
ASSURAECE Procedure No.: ISi 2.5 E M I E gr.nyn j
-L..m., m.
t I
Renewed tvitSept Comment, Plant Site:
o >--, . oc m . .. ,
,' Waterford No. 3 n=we: e,.ms .i a ,,,,,
j O **'* a=<=
i me n=we.
NOTE:
t noi .e mi, ,,,, , ,,,, ,, ,,,,
Customer: Louisiana Power and Lig . "' **"" 4 '- was uswee
- Ebasco Services, Inc. - Agent *i#in#*
me asesica.ve
, ,,,, ,, e,, sewir.catmmy i
saw er mi ..e w , . ..,,J Approved for Use "" a$ e==rted f3 pg4, , _ e
-Virginia. Corporation: -- -
=,,',"' ., # , %;, 3.,-,,rd ny. .
jyw ,
,v-
~
Approved for Use i DATE[.Eijg.11, . , ' , ,
i Customer:
Rev.
O Date: 2/10/82 Rev. 1 Date: 3/1/83
[. Prepared by: .I dMe'- Prepared by: Ci Of b m
, V Reviewed by: N'? r? O '"r^^^1 Lad E Reviewed by: b d> 190_-- 1-_ Mar-
,' Reviewed by[ [M Reviewed by sdIM Customer: , Nhh W
/ '.sh:4 /.13 w\usn Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: _ Reviewed by:
Customer: Customer:
Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by: _
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer: Customer:
__.____.._____._-__,__..____-._.______._27..____.._ _ _ _
l II)2 VirgiHIA CorporatIDH "' "" ~ " "'* '
of R@inent Date: 3 /1/8'3 Page1 of 6 g
~
1.0 Scope 1.1 This procedure is applicable to, and describes, the requirements for manual ultrasonic thickness measurement of weld material and adjacent base metal in piping systems by the pulse-echo method. This procedure is written in compliance with the ASME Code,Section V, Article 5 and is applicable to the edition and cddenda in paragraph 2.0.
2.0 References 2.1 Section V Article 5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 1977 edition with addenda through summer, 1978 2.2 The Virginia Corporation Written Procedure for the Qualification and Certification o,f NDE Personnel, NDE 4.1, Rev. 3, dated 3/6/81.
2.3 The Virginia Corporation Procedure ISI-1.2. Preservice Inspection Documentation (latest revision) .
2.4 The Virginia Corporation Procedure ISI 2.1, Ultrasonic Equipment Calibration Confirmation (latest. revision).
2.5 The Virginia Corporation Procedure VC-QA-103, Generation and Control
! of Procedures for Watarford No. 3 Preservice Inspection (latest revision).
3.0 Personnel Qualifications 3.1 Personnel performing examinations to this procedure shall be qualified and certified to at least Level II in accordance with reference 2.2. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) may be employed as assistants. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) shall not independently evaluate or accept the results of an ultrasonic examination.
4.0 General Requirements 4.1 The area to be examined and contacted by the search unit shall be checked to ensure that it is free of dirt, loose scale,
- machining or grinding particles, weld splatter, or other loose lI foreign matter that would impair the free movement of the search l, unit or effect the examination.
w-.g.--..-. .. , -.,,,w g--- - + - , - ,,-,ww- - e- ,, - -p.w- -.--,e--w-seev+e-'--sr--P- --w- -, w Y y +-
'I I q,y ISI 2.5
- - - Proc.No. ,
EfJe Virgtuta Corporation -
I I of R M Date- 3/1/83 Page 2 of 6 If such conditions are detected, they will be rectified prior to conducting the examination.
4.2 The identity and location of welds to be measured for thickness shall be as directed by the Ebasco PSI construction coordinator.
5.0 Equipment and Material Requirements 5.1 Ultrasonic flaw detection instruments shall be of, the A-
, scan pulse echo type equipped with a stepped gain control calibrated in units of 2 dB or less, and shall be qualified to the requirements of reference 2.4 prior to use at the Waterfo:d 3 site. Calibration confirmation may be valid for a period not to exceed three months.
5.2 Search Units 5.2.1 Search units shall be certified by the manufacturer l I as to essential properties, including seridl number, size and center frequency.
5.2.2 Search units shall be either single element or dual element.
5.2.3 Search unit sizes shall range from k" diameter to 1" diameter and frequency of 1 MHZ to 5 MHZ.
5.3 Cables connecting the flaw detector to the search unit shall be the coaxial type. Standard lengths of.6 ft. or 1,2 ft. shall be used.
. 5.4 A couplant medium, such as Sonotrace 40, manufactured by Echo Laboratories, Inc., or equivalent, shall be applied to the test surface. Couplant materials shall be analyzed for halogen content according to ASTM D-808 and the residual halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Couplant materials shall also be analyzed for sulfur content according to ASTM D-129 and the residual sulfur shall not exceed 1% by vaight. All areas shall q g be dry wiped to remove excess couplant following examination.
~ ~~
Prcc.No. 1st 2.s Rey' 1 EIJe E.rstma Corporation 6
Of W asent Date' ,/1/83 Page 3 of 5.5 Calibration Blocks 5.5.1 Calibration blocks, where possible, shall be the same material and product form as the material to be measured.
5.5.2 Alternately, step wedges or IIW blocks may be used.
5.5.3 The finishes on the surface of the calibration block (s) shall be representative of the surface finishes of the piping to be measured.
6.0 Calibration 6.1 Prior to conducting examinations, the complete system to ,
be utilized shall be calibrated on the applicable calibration block. The system shall include the ultrasonic unit (and battery pack, if applicable), cable or- cables, search unit, couplant..and any other apparatus, instrument or circuit employed between the instrument and the calibration block surface. Once calibration has been established, any change to any part of the system, including the operator, will require at least a verification of the calibration.
6.2 Calibration When More Than One Material Thickness is Used (Preferred Method) 6.2.1 When more than one material thickness is used for calibration the thickness of the material to be examined shall be between the thickness of the thin and thick sections of the calibration material.
l 6.2.2 Select appropriate instrument, transducer and couplant for the required examination.
6.2.3 Select appropriate frequency and range control
. settings.
t 4
0 emmwere - - - -
N 2 Y itglHiA CorporatIGH ' '
of Ws)mont Date: 3/1/83 Page L.of 6 1
6.2.4 Place the transducer on the thinner section of calibration material and, by using the sweep -
delay, adjust the sweep position so that the first back reflection signal is at the appropriate graticule for the desired screen range.
6.2.5 Place the transducer on the thicker section of calibration material and, by using the sweep range control, adjust the sweep position so that the first back reflection signal is at the appropriate graticule for the desired screen range.
6.2.6 Continue steps 6.2.4 and 6.2.5 until no further adjustment is necessary.
6.3 Calibration When Only One Material Thickness is Used for l I Calibration (Alternate Method) 6.3.1 Select appropriate instrument, transducer, and couplant for the required examination.
6.3.2 Select the appropriate frequency and range control settings.
l 6.3.3 Place the transducer on the calibration material and, by using the sweep delay, adjust the sweep so that the first back reflection signal is at the appropriate graticule for the desired screen range.
6.3.4 With tle transducer on the same material, adjust the sweep range control so that the second ba.ck l reflection is at the appropriate graticule.
6.3.5 Continue steps 6.3.3 and 6.3.4 until no further adjustment is necessary.
l l
I
Proc.No' Isl 2.5 q,y 1 e E,rstuta Corporation WR Date' 3/1/83 Page 5 of 6 g 6.4 Calibration Verification 6.4.1 A calibration check, which is the verification of sweep range calibration, shall be performed at the beginning of each set of thickness measurements covered by the same calibration block (s), and with any change in examination personnel.
6.4.2 If any point in the sweep range calibration is off more than 2% of full screca, a new calibration shall be recorded, and all readings taken since the last successful calibration or recalibration shall be re-done. All data sheets completed since the last valid calibration shall be voided.
7.0 Examination 7.1 Following calibration to paragraph 6.2 or paragraph 6.3, measurements shall be taken on the designated weld and/or adjacent base metal.
7.2 Measurements shall be taken, as a minimum, at 12 o' clock, 2 o' clock, 4 o' clock, 6 o' clock, 8 o' clock, and 10 o' clock.
Additional readings shall be taken as designated by the Ebasco PSI construction coordinator.
7.3 Thickness determination is accomplished by placing the transducer on the point to be measured and obtaining a back reflection. The gain shall be adjusted so that the same high frequency node is breaking the baseline as in the calibration.
7.4 Thickness is then read directly off the screen in inches and shall be read to the nearest 1% of full screen sweep.
4 .
I II)B Vif9 inia CorpotAtiOH '
{ , of Ekbmottb Date' 3/1/83 Page 6 of 6 _
l 8.0 Recording of Thickness Readings 8.1 All thickness readings shall be recorded and shall be referenced to the actual lo::ation of the reading on the report form. Any I
thickness readings on other than normal part configuration shall' be recorded with an additional sketch or sketches to identify locations.
8.2 Measurements shall be read to 1% of full screen (i.e. , for a one inch screen, readings shall be to the nearest .010").
9.0 Documentation of Examination 9.1 All data relative to the examination shall be reported in accordance with reference 2.3 and on forms similar to thosc shown in figurs 1 and 2.
l I l .
I l
l' ,
4 1
--a...- -.
Figure 1 ISI 2.5 4 g s n. Ultrasonic Data Sheet Virginia Corp. for v
pr . - ,
Thickness Measurement I I Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Co=ponent/ Piping SpsGiin Examiner / Level Date Procedure ~
Iso / Drawing No. VCR Supervisor Continuation Sheet Attached
[ 1 Yes i I No Equipment
~
Instrument Transducer Calibration Mfgr, Mfgr.
Size . Cal. Block Model -
Cal. Block S/N -
Freq. Range Cal.
Reiect Dacp. Calibration Checks Serial No.
[
Freq. ~ ~ ~
l Rep. Rate Coax. Cable Filter -
Video Cain Couplant -
l Examination Results Weld Meas. Reading Reading Reading Weldf Meas. Reading Reading Reading Nu=ber Point Weld Scan 2 Scan 5 Numbfr / Point Weld Scan 2 Scan 5 l _ f\ \ M L T\ \ \ C,
^ \ \\ t )\\A >
W 31 \\ T U n \\\\ \ \\ \\S i o > \ \\ \\ \ W
% h\ ~4v n
& )Vll l l
v i
l .__
l Sketch / Identification I
t l
l l l
_ _ _ Form UT-lO5 '#"
"*""* 2 j e %g
- hitrosonic Data Sheet L A 5 a-for
("/
q V
.,@ M M P.
Thickness Measurement Continuotion Page _.of l Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Component / Piping System Examiner / Level Date Procedure Iso / Drawing No. VCR Supervisor Examination Results Wald Meas. Reading Reading Reading Weld Meas. Reading Reading, Reading Number Point Weld Scan 2 Scan 5 Number Point Weld Scan 2 Scan 5 A
- AC m\\ \7 e [ n \\ \ \M
^\ (\ v 1 \ MV A\ 31 \\ ( V O _\ \ \\ \
/J ( \\ \\ \N V N \\ )
\N\ GW k n? '
G '
Sketch / Identification O
Form UT-lo5 e 2/82
y
(~ p- The (804) 266 8741 ii Virginia Corp. P. O. Box 9474 O --
.e =~ 5809 Lakeside Ave.
f V v Richmond, Virginia 23228 Procedure
Title:
~
MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF STEAM GENERATOR STAY CYLINDER WELDS EDASCO SEP. VICES INCO3NHf.TED n o .1 i AEI:UPau c.E
,i Procedure No.: ISI 2.6 --
-E{. mma l- ~: 0. m lleviewed without Cosmaals Plant' Site: Waterford No. 3 a t===ste
- c e.- se .e,
..tu eu lhesubmit: Piecwd e.tn erger, Q Reksted IIrWse and nomsnit.
NOTE:
Rev,ew of this decoment, with or Wm.
Customer: Louisiana Power and Light ad = ==
'"' "m"e*'u'C'
== souve * *""e',ati i.ac
! Ebasco Services, Inc. - Agent adis ,, +e,t, d r-w or o .se,. t . . . , ,[
Approved for Use e sec yo, ;. ,w,,
-f ' "
e aen Virginia. Corporation: l ."'.". 'm[ "*yA" ** . c >
Approved for Use DATE 1.W'A ~ W -
Customer:
Rev._ n Date: 5/26/82 Rev. I Date- 7/15/82 Prepared by YL tb LC- -- Prepared by: b re, h _m m Reviewed by: Y d M2-- W 2E- Reviewed by: Ik 6 % - _ u?w Reviewed by Reviewed by: MM L._ A:::'A. d J4 Customer:
Rev. 2 Date: 8/23//82 Rev. 2 Date: 1/1/g1 Prepared by: 7 b -- - - 6 W e -m Prepared by: b ,', M h ,
v Reviewed bys N ^ r 6 E- :^ WR Reviewed by: Y O M- - : r- M7Fr Reviewed by -8 -
Reviewed by "M Customer: Customer: w LMhMg
//'-I/N/W "
4\ny3 ~
Rev. Date: Rev. Date:
Prepared by:- Prepared by:
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
=
Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
Customer: Customer:
.- m n & a - nn-,---...--.-.,---.?----.- --
Proc.No' ist 2.6 Rey,_ 3 Eije. Virginia Corporation Of RM Date' 3/1/83 pggg I g{ _ 24 l l
! 1.0 ,
Scope 1.1 This procedure is applicable to, and describes, the requirements -
for manual ultrasonic examination of steam generator stay l cylinder welds for Waterford 3.' This procedure is written in compliance with the ASME Code,Section XI, and ASME Code,Section V. Article 4.
l l ..-
1 l
l 2.0 References l 2.1 1977 edition of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, i Section XI, with addenda through summer, 1978.
2.2 The Virginia Corporation Written Practice for the Qualification and Certification of NDE Personnel NDE 4.1, Rev. 3, dated 3/6/81.
2.3 The Virginia Corporation procedure ISI 1.2, Preservice Inspection Documentation (latest revision).
2.4 The Virginia Corporation procedure ISI 2.1, Ultrasonic Calibration Confirmation (latest revision).
2.5 The Waterford Unit 3 Preservice Inspection Program Plan.
l 2.6 1977 Edition of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. e ion V, with addenda through summer, 1978.
2.7 The Virginia Corporation Procedure VC-QA-103, Generation and Control of Procadures for Waterford No. 3 Preservice Inspection (latest revision).
3.0 Personnel Qualifications 3.1 Personnel performing examinations to this procedure shall be qualified and certified to at least Level II in accordance l with the document referenced in paragraph 2.2. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) may be employed as assistants.
Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level 1-Ltd) shall not independently evaluate or accept the results of an ultrasonic l examination.
t l^
w6 q e -w _p w w. - e'
,--s ap-- - - , - , , - - . - - , ,n. , ----g -- -,-wm-n.- - -,y--------,,-,-,,,,e,,----,-, ,,,-----,.,--n-,,,m-- -
,-m,.-.- - - -
Proc. No. Ter , a Rev' 3 Efje E,rginia Corporation l Of M Rionb Date' 3/1/83 Page 2. of 24 i
4.0 _ General Requirements
. 4.1 The area to be examined and contacted by the search unit shall be checked to ensure that it is free of dirt, loose scale, machining or grinding particles, weld splatter, or other foreign matter that -
would impair the free movement of the search unit or affect the examination. If such conditions are detected, they will be rectified prior to conducting the examination.
4.2 The identity of welds to be examined shall be as designated in reference 2.5.
4.3 The location and configuration of welds to be examined shall be as shown in figures 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7.
4.4 The examinations conducted in accorance with this procedure shall be performed from the I.D. (non-clad) surface using contact methods.
4.5 Calibration shall be performed from the side of the calibration block which corresponds to the I.D. (non-clad) surface of the steam l I generator stay cylinder. The calibration / examination surf ace shall be noted on the reports.
4.6 Examination shall consist of nominal 45* and 60* angle beam shear wave tecMyues applied in two directions parallel, and two directions perpendicular to the weld axis except where restricted by part geometry or access. Where other pairs of angles are used, the measured difference betwcen the angles shall be at least 10 degrees. A 0*
longitudinal beam shall be applied to all areas through which the angle beams must pass.
5.0 Equipment and Material Requirements 5.1 U1'trasonic flav detection instruments shall be of the A-scan pulse echo type, equipped with a stepped gain control, calibrated in units of 2dB or less, and shall be qualified to the requirements of reference 2.4 prior to use at the Waterford 3 site. Calibration may be valid for a period not to exceed three months.
.=- -
. m.m _ _ ._ _ .
_-. = . . _ _
_ z_ _. ___ __ __
Proc.No. 1st 2.6- qay ,
Efje Virgtnta Corporatiott ofRk$mont Date: 3/1/83 Page 3 of 24 h
5.2 Search units shall be selected in accordance with figure
- 1. Transducers used shall be certified by the manufacturer as to serial number, size, and central frequency. Search -
units shall be capable of providing the applicable calibrations as required in paragraph 6.0.
5.3 Cables connecting the flaw detector to the search unit shall be the coaxial type. Standard lengths of 6 ft. or 12 ft. shall be used for preservice examinations.
5.4 A couplant medium, such as Sonotrace 40, manufactured by Echo Laboratories, Inc., or equivalent, shall be applied to the test surface. Couplant materials shall be analyzed for halogen content according to ASTM D-808 and the residual halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Couplant materials shall also be analyzed for sulfur content according to ASTM D-129 and the residual sulfur shall not exceed 1% by weight. All areas shall be dry wiped to remove excess couplant"following examination.
5.5 Calibration Blocks 5.5.1 Design of the calibration blocks and reflectors shall be essentially as depicted in Figure 2, and shall comply with the requirements of l
reference 2.6. Exceptions shall be noted in the final report.
5.5.2 Where possible, the material from which the block in fabricated shall be from one of the following:
(a) hozzle drop out from the component (b) a component prolongation (c) material of the same material specification, _
product form, and heat treatment as the i materials being joined.
l
~ . _ . . , . , _ _ . ... . .... _ _ ---
. - - - - - - . - - - - - - - - - - . - - - , , - _ _ . , - - - - . - - - , - , - ,n ..- ---,_ , , - , . - - , , , r. - . , . , - - , - - , . . . _ - - . - - ,
I 1st 2.6 gey,_ ,
Proc. No..
Efje E,rgm, fa Corporation r ot' Ris$mont Date.' , n ra, Page' of i d
5.5.3 The finish on the surfaces of the b1c(k shall be representative of the surface fi ushes of the component.
5.5.4 Additional reflectors may be installe.d; these reflectors shall not interfere
- wie.h establishing the primary reference.
5.5.5 Figure 2 shows calibration block configuration with hole size and location. Each weld on the component or piping system shall be represented by a calibration block having a thickness which mcets the requirements of Figure 2. The calibration block thickness must be within one inch (plus or minus) of the component thickness.
O. Where the calibration block thickness, plus or minus one inch, spans two of the weld thickness ranges shown in Figure 2 .
the block's use shall be acceptable in the range of plus or minus one inch of
, the block's thickness. For example, a four-inch calibration block shall be l accep' table for weld thicknesses of three inches to five inches. The holes shall be in accordance with the thickness of the block. Where two or more base metal thicknesses are involved, the calibration block thickness is determined from the average thickness of the weld.
i
, O
. , . . , . - . - . - - . . . ~ . . - - . . , . - . - . - - - - - - . -
.. . _ _ _ . _. _ _ _. ___ _ --_.-- ~ ._ _ .- _. _ _ _ _ _ . - - - - - _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _
t .
. , , Proc No. 1st 2.6 q,y ,
Elje 't7ttgtuta Corporation 3/1/83 24 of Bishment Dato: pggg 3 gy 5.5.6 The basic calibration block shall be curved for welds in materials with diameters 20 in.
~
(508 mm) and less. A single curved basic .
calibration block may be used to calibrate the examination on surfaces in the range I- of curvature from 0.9 to 1.5 times the basic calibration block diameter.
l, 5.5.7 For examination of welds in materials where the diameter is greater than 20 in.
(508 mm), a block of essentially the same curvature, or, alternately, a flat basic calibration block, shall be used.
6.0 Calibration 6.1 Instrument calibration for screen height linearity,
! amplitude control linearity, and beam spread measurement shall be performua prior to use at the Waterford 3 plant site and every three months thereafter, as a minimum, in accordance with reference 2.4.
6.2 Straight Beam Calibration for Weld Metal and HAZ 6.2.1 The search unit shall be selected i
l in accordance with Figure 1.
I 6.2.2 The calibration block shall be idencified and selected from reference 2.5.
6.2.3 The temperature between the examination surface and basic calibration block surface shall not exceed 25 F.
l I I
1-w- , _.: m or - . . , - -_ - , - - . . - - .
1 , . ,- . Proc.No._ 1si 2.6 q,y,, , ,
Elle "tTirstnia Corporation l ) of Rkbatant Date: 3 " /a, Page 6 of1
~
6.2.4 Calibration Verification .
6.2.4.1 A ca?ibration check, which is the verification of the instrument sensitivity and sweep range calibration, shall be performed at the beginning and end of each shift of examinations and at the end of each examination category, or every four hours, whichever is less, and with any change in examination personnel.
6.2.4.2 A decrease in sensitivity of 20% or 2dB shall require recalibration and re-examination of all items examined since the previous acceptable calibration or check.
! 6.2.4.3 An increase in sensitivity of 20% or 2dB shall require recalibration, re-examination, and data correction of all indications reported since the previous acceptable calibration or check.
6.2.4.4 If any point on the DAC curve has moved on the sweep line more than 10% of the sweep division reading, correct the sweep range calibration and note the correction I in the examination record. If recordable reflectors are noted on the data s'heets, those data sheets shall be voided, a new calibration shall be recorded, and the voided examination areas shall be re-l, examined.
l 6.2.5 The instrument sweep range and a distance amplitude curve (DAC) shall be established utilizing the response i
from the applicable basic calibration holes in accordance with paragraphs 6.4 and o.5.
l
_ .. 7. . _ . . .
Proc. t(e. 1s1 2.6 ptey 3 Efje Virgtnta Corporation Of31ithD10nb Date: 3/1/83 Page 7 of 24 l I 6.3 Straight Beam Calibration for Bare Metal 6.3.1 The sensitivity of the instrument shall be adjusted at a location free of indications so that the first back reflection from the far side of the plate will be 80 percent of full screen height (FSH). The' sensitivity as adjusted above shall be continuously monitored during the examination. The base metal straight beam examination may be conducted concurrently and at the same sensitivity as the straight beam examination described in paragraph .
6.4.2 6.4 Straight Beam Calibration for Weld Metal and HAZ 6.4.1 Sweep Range Calibration 6.4.1.1 Position the search unit on the calibration block and obtain the maximum response from the kT side-drilled hole. Adjust the left edge of this indication to line 2 on the screen with the delay control. l I 6.4.1.2 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the 3/4T hole. Adjust the lef t edge of this indication to line 6 on the screen with the range control.
6.4.1.3 Repeat delay and range control adjustments until the kT and 3/4T hole reflections start at sweep lines 2 and 6.
Note: Other sweep positions may be used for material with varying thickness.
6.4.2 Distance Amplitude Correction 6.4.2.1 Position the search unit for maximum response from the hole which gives the highest amplitude.
6.4.2.2 Adjust the sensitivity control to provide an 80% of full screen indication from that hole. Mark the peak of the indication on the screen with a grease pencil or other suitable marker, q
r Proc. No. 1st 2.6 q,y 3 Efje Virgtnta Corporation l l of 31itbrnonb Date: 3/1/83 Page a of 76 4
6.4.2.3 Position the search unit for maximum response from each of the remaining calibration holes.
6.4.2.4 Mark the peaks of these indications on~ the screen.
6.4.2.5 Connect the screen marks and extend through the thickness to provide the distance amplitude curve for the side-drilled holes. This is the primary reference level.
6.5 Angle Beam Calibration 6.5.1 Sweep Range Calibration 6.5.1.1 Positicn the search unit for the maximum response f rom the kT side-drilled hole. Adjust the lef t edge of this indication to line 2 on the screen with the delay control.
6.5.1.2 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the 3/4T hole. Adjust the left edge of this indication to line 6 on the screen with the range control.
6.5.1.3 Repeat delay and range control adjustments until the kT and 3/4T hole reflections start at sweep lines 2 and 6 respectively.
Note: Other sweep positions may be used for y
material with varying thickness.
6.5.1.4 Position the search unit for maximum response from the square notch on the opposite surface.
The indication will appear near sweep line 8.
6.5.1.5 Two divisions on the sweep equals kT.
--,_m - - . - _ . .
Proc.No Isl 2.6 q,y' 3 Efje Yttginta Corporation Of MChmonb Date: '/1/a, Pagem of n 4 ,
6.5.2 Distance-Amplitude Correction 6.5.2.1 Calibration from the clad side (a) Position the search unit for maximum response from the hole which gives the highest amplitude.
(b) Adjust the sensitivity control to provide an 80% FSH response from the hole. Mark the peak of the indication on the screen.
(c) Position the search unit for maximum response from each of the remaining holes.
(d) Mark the peak of these indicaticns on the screen.
(e) Position the search unit for maximum ~
amplitude from the 3/4T hole indication af ter the beam has bounced from the opposite { }
surface. The indication should appear near sweep line 10. Mark the peak on the screen for the 5/4T position.
(f) Connect the screen marks for the side-drilled holes to provide the distance amplitude curve. This is the primary reference level.
6.5.2.2 Calibration From the Unclad Side (a) From the clad side of the block, de,termine the dB change in amplitude between the 3/4T and 5/4T positions.
(b) From the unciad side, perform calibrations as noted in 6.5.2.1 (a) through (d).
l l
Efje Virginia Corporation "' "~ ~ "*" '
l l OfRNhntonb Date' 3/1/83 Page lo of _ 24 (c) To determine the amplitude for the 5/4T hole, position the search unit for maximum amplitude from the 3/4T hole. Decrease the signal amplitude by the number of dB determined in (a). Mark the height of this signal amplitude at sweep line 10 (5/4T).
(d) Connect the screen marks to provide the distance-amplitude curve. This is the primary reference level. This will permit evaluatior of indications down to the clad surface (near sweep line 8).
6.5.2.3 Calibration for Unclad Areas (Ref. Fig. 4) l l (a) Position the scarch unit for the maximum response from the hole giving the highest signal amplitude. Adjust the sensitivity control to 80% of full screen height (FSH). Mark the peak of the indication on the screen.
(b) Position the search unit for the maximum response from the remaining hole (s).
Without changing the sensitivity control, mark the peak of the indication (s) on the screen.
I I
"' "' ~ "** '
EI)e TTirginia Corporation Of 3Rkbnmonb Date' 3/1/83 Page 11 of _ 24 l l 6.5.2.3 (c) Connect the screen marks and extrapolate through the thickness (kT on each side) to provide a smooth DAC curve. This shall be the primary reference level. 3 (d) The sensitivity shall then be establisaed from the 0.D. surface notch by setting the signal response amplitude from the O.D. notch at the level of the DAC curve.
7.0 Examination 7.1 Straight Beam Examination of Base Metal 7.1.1 Prior to performing angle beam examinations, the base material through which the angle beam will pass (reference Figures 4, 5, 6, and 7) shall be completely scanned with a straight beam search unit to detect reflectors l I which might affect the interpretation of the results of the angle beam examinations.
7.1.2 C.libration shall be as indicated in paragraph 6.3.
7.1.3 Scans shall overlap at least ten percent.
7.1.4 Alternatively, the base metal examination may be conducted concurrently and at the same calibration as described in paragraph 6.4, provided that the scan sensitivity (2 x reference) is at least as sensitive as that required in paragraph 6.3.
7.2 Straight Beam Examinatica for Weld Metal and RAZ 7.2.1 The examination for planar reflectors shall be performed on the entire volume of weld and adjacent base material in accordance with Figure 4, 5, 6, and 7.
7.2.2 Calibration shall be as indicated in paragraph 6.4.
I l
Proc.No. 1sl 2.6 sg,y_ 3 Efje Virgtnta Corporation
{ Of Richmont Date: 3/1/83 Page_12 of 24 7.2.3 Penetration shall be verified by obtaining a -
reflection from an opposite surface of the material being examined when the two surfaces are parallel.
7.2.4 Scans shall overlap at least ten percent.
7.3 Angle Beam Examination for Reflectors Parallel to the Weld 7.3.1 The primary scan fo'r reflectors parallel to the veld shall be node from both sides of the weld.
7.3.2 If it is impossible to examine the required material with a node examination from both sides of the weld, the reasons for the par tial examination shall be documented in accordance
{ } with paragraph 9.4.
7.3.3 The area of interest shall be the veld and HAZ, and the required amount of base metal on each side of the veld (reference Figures 4, 5, 6, and 7) .
7.3.4 Calibration shall be as indicated in paragraph 6.5.
7.3.5 The scan pattern shall start at one edge of the area be examined, with the ultrasonic search unit transmitting an angle beam perpendicular to the weld axis. The search unit shall be moved towards and away from the weld such that the calibrated beam passes through the whole area of the weld and base metal to be examined. Concurrent with this scan, the search unit shall be swiveled 15' right and 15' left, and progressively indexed along the length of the weld such that the whole scan pattern follows a "saw tcoth" pattern.
7 l I
,.,r --
m , , - . - , -
Prce.No. 1s1 2,6 gey- 3 EIje "t7ttstma Corporation Of M Rient Date- 3/1/83 pagg 13 gf 24 -
7.3.5, continued The " pitch" of the "saw-tooth" shall be such that on eoch pass the ultrasonic beam covers at least 10 percent of the area covered by the previous l
adjacent pass. The weld and required amount of adjacent base metal is to be fully examined by this procedure. When practical, the examination shall be j accomplished from both sides of the weld except where restricted oy part geometry or access.
l 7.4 Angle Beam Examination far Reflectors Transverse to the Weld 7.4.1 The angle beam examination for reflectors transverse to the weld shall be performed on the weld crown and adjacent base material as necessary to examine the required volume of weld and base material by node in two directions along the weld.
7.4.2 If it is impossible to examine the required material
- with a 1/2 node examination from both sides of the weld, the reasons for the partial examination shall be documented in accordance with paragraph 9.4 7.4.3 The area of interest shall be the weld and HAZ, and the required amount of base metal or each side of the weld (reference Figures 4, 5, 6, and 7.
7.4.4 Calibration shall be as indicated in paragraph 6.5.
i 7.4.5 The search unit shall be placed at T on one edge i
of the inspection area directing the angle beam into the material parallel to the weld axis. From this position the search unit shall be moved parallel to the weld and indexed toward the opposite side of the weld such that the next can will cover at least 10 percent of the area covered by the previous adjacent scan. Parallel scans shall be repeated in this manner until the opposite side of
. the weld and base metal is reached and examined. The 8 %B
..n .......s. --
_v . . -. _ . _ y _ y, ...y,. -. _ _ _ - . , - . - ~ - -- _ _ - . - - . _ _ . ~ - - - - . - . - . , . . - -
Proc. No. 1st 2.6 gey 3 Efje 't7ttstuta Corporation of Mut0Rb DQte* 3/1/83 PagG 14 of 24 7.4.5. continued search unit shall be swiveled' 15' right and 15' lef t and progressively indexed along the length of the veld such that the whole scan pattern follows a "saw-tooth" pattern.
The " pitch" of the "saw-tooth" shall be such that~on each pass the ultrasonic beam covers at least 10 percent of the area covered by the previous adjacent pass. The weld and required amount of adjacent base metal is to be fully examined by this procedure, except where restricted by part geometry or access.
7.4.6 Where the weld axis is not perpendicular to the examination surface, scanning shall be performed on an overlapping pattern as detailed in paragraph 7.4.5, until the entire volume of the weld metal and required base metal is examined.
j 7.5 Scanning shall be performed at a gain setting of at least 2 times the reference level (6dB increase in amplitude). Recording of indications shall be carried out with the gain control set at the reference level.
7.6 Rate of search unit movement shall not exceed 61n./sec. (153 mm/sec.).
8.0 Evaluation and Recording of Straight Beam Examination -for Laminar Reflectors 8.1 All areas giving indications equal to or greater than the back reflection shall be recorded.
8.2 All areas where one or more discontinuities produce a continuous total loss of back reflection accompanied by continuous indications in the same plane shall be recorded.
8.3 The following data shall be recorded for laminar reflectors:
8.3.1 Sweep reading of laminar reflectors from the surface.
8.3.2 Position from the reference marking.
8.3.3 Location parallel to the reference marking for each search unit position, giving the recordable extent of the indication as the laminar area is scanned on parallel scan paths.
l I
, , , Proc. No. 1st 2.6 gey .,
Efje "tTirginia Corporation of Rk$mont Date: 3/l/83 Page 15 of 24 8.4 Where laminar reflectors interfere with the scanning of examination volumes for planar reflectors, the angle beam examination technique shall be modified to examine the maximum feasible volume, within the specified examination volume, and the description of the volume excluded by the lamination shall be noted on the data sheet.
9.0 Evaluation and Recording of Straight Beam and Angle Beam Indications in the Weld and Heat Affected Zone 9.1 All indications 20% of the primary reference DAC or greater shall be investigated to determine the shape, identity, location, and type of indication. Additionally, all indications, regardless of amplitude, which the examiner judges to be potentially indicative of a crack or lack of fusion shall be investigated to determine the shape, identity, location, and type of indication.
9.1.1 Any indication categorized as a flaw shall be recorded and reported in accordance with the requirements of reference 2.3.
9.1.2 Any indication resulting from the metallurgical structure within the material shall be considered when assessing the effectiveness of the examination. Restrictions or variations to the examination due to the metallurgical structure shall be reported. Additional search unit angles may be used during evaluation as an aid in interpretation.
9.1.3 Clad interface and back wall reflections need not be recorded.
9/1.4 Geometric indications that are equal to or greater than 50% of the primary reference DAC shall be acknowledged by recording their length and location.
9.2 Any flaw indication which is equal to, or greater than, 50% of the primary reference DAC shall be evaluated to the extent necessary to determfle the size, shape, identity, and location of the reflector.
Indications shall be recorded in accordance with paragraph 9.3, and reported in accordance with the requirements of reference 2.3.
e , wee e-
_ _ _ - . , _ . , , , y.,,s. --
Proc.No' ist 2.6 q ,s,_ _ 3 Efje Virgtnta Corporation l l Of WM Date' 3/1/83 Page is of 24 1
9.3 Data required when indications are equal to, or greater than.
50% of DAC:
9.3.1 All search unit position and location dimensions shall be recorded to the nearest tenth of an inch.
9.3.2 Maximum percent of DAC, sweep reading of indication, search unit position, location along the length of the weld, and beam direction.
9.3.3 Through-Wall Dimension:
9.3.3.1 For reflectors 50 to 100% DAC, the minimum and maximum sweep readings and their position and location along the length of the reflector for 50% DAC when approaching and moving away from the reflector's maximum signal direction.
9.3.3.2 For reflectors exceeding 100% DAC, minimum and maximum sweep readings and their position and location along the length of the reflector for 50% of the maximum amplitude when approaching and moving away from the reflector's maximum signal direction.
l l
_ _ _ _ ,_ _._ _. __.,,w _ . , . , _ _ _ . _ . _ _ , _ . . _ - _ ., ,_. _
Prce.No' ist 2.6 q,y' 3 Efje "17ttstma Corporation Of RI4W Date* 3/1/83 Page_17of_ 24 9.3.4 Length Dimension 9.3.4.1 The length of the reflector shall be obtained by recording the position and -
location along the length of weld as determined by 50% of DAC for each end of the reflector.
9.4 Welds that did not receive a complete examination according to paragraph 7.0 shall have the partial examination noted on the data sheet as follows:
9.4.1 The extent of the examination performed shall be noted.
9.4.2 If the volumetric examination was performed from one side of the weld only, it shall be noted and an entry made indicating what steps were taken to ensure that the required area on the far side of the weld was examined.
9.4.3 The reason (s) that a specific examination was impractical shall be noted. For example, support or component I
t restricts access, fitting prevents adequate ultrasonic I
coupling on one side, component to component veld prevents ultrasonic examination, etc.
9.5 Investigation and reporting of indications shall be performed at the reference sensitivity.
10.0 Documentation of Examination 10.1 All data relative to the examination and r ,i ab. _i ica* tons shall be reported in accordance with reference 2.', and on forms similar to those shown in Figures 8, 9, and 10.
l l
I
i
. .. Proc.No._ ISI 2.6 gey__ 3 Efje Virgtuta Corporation i I of Rf4mo 4 Date: 3/1/83 Page 18 of _ 24 i
Figure 1 TRANSDUCER AND SFARCH UNIT SELECTION Angle Beam Examination
- Nominal Transducer Material Maximum Nominal Nominal Thickness Size Frequency Angles
.25" to .40" 1/4" dia. or 1/4" x 1/4" 2.25 MHZ 45 ' 60
>.40" to 1.00" 1/2" dia. or 1/2" x 1/2" 2.25 MHZ 45 60
> 1.00" to 1.20" 3/4" dia. or 3/4" x 3/4" 2.25 MHz 45 60
> 1.20" 1-1/8" dia. or 1" x 1" i 2.25 MHZ 45 60 Straight Beam Examination *
$ I Nominal Pipe Transducer Diameter Maximum Size Nominal Frequency less than 12" dia. 1/2" dia. or 1/2" x 1/2" 2.25 MHZ 12" dia. and greater 1-1/8" dia, or 1" x 1" 2.25 MHZ CNote: Other transducers may be used where weld geometry or metallurgical characteristics impede effective use of the above listed angles, frequencies, or sizes.
l l
l l I l
m ,w , ,- ,, - - . . , . . , - ,
-- - - - , , - - - - - - , - . . - -, , e-, -,n.
, , o , ProceNo. ISI 2.6 5tev 3 tlEije Virgtuta Corporation of Rithmonb Date' 3/1/83 Page 19 of 24 2 in. long 1/8 to 1/4 in. Dia. Flat End 0
M4 Notches 2% T Deep Through Clad Thackness 2 % T Deep mio the Base Metal
/ / - -
=~
/ i ,
, / ,.
g 3 in'* I /' '
y' & , /,'I }- - - - - - - ,/,'S- - - yl'- '
0 714 [// ,/sf ',' ,s,
/ -
Clad T $ b{'l ' _
'/ /, f
+
T/2 + t, v .
,/ -
/ 6 in.'
qf T/4 ,A__ _
- 1 /
f 1 1/2 in. min.-- > 4 -
Orilled and Reamed Holes 3 in. Deep
- Y 7 ,
T/4* -+ 4- -
- % g, T/4' - > 4---13/4 T
- O 3T* ;-
Basic Calibration Hole yeld Thickness (t) Block Thickness (T) Diameter ***
Over 2 in. thru 4 in. 3 in. or t 3/16 in.
Over 4 in. thru 6 in. 5 in. or t 1/4 in .
Over 6 in. thru 8 in. 7 in. or t 5/16 in.
Over 8 in, thru 10 in. 9 in, or t 3/8 in.
Over 10 in. thru 12 in. 11 in. or t 7/16 in.
Over 12 in. thru 14 in. 13 in or.t 1/2 in.
Over 14 in. ** **
- Minimum dimensions.
- For each increase in thickness of 2 in or fraction thereof, the hole diameter shall increase 1/16 in.
- The tolercnces for hole diameters shall be i 1/32 in.
The tolerances on notch depth shall be +10 and -20%.
The tolerance on hole location through the thickness shall be i 1/8.
The perpendicular tolerance on notch reflecting surface shall be ! 2 degre,es.
l I "1LLUSTRATiVE ONLY" Typical Calibration Block Figure 2
-, * - - ,.r - - , , ...--,-----m,. e-,m,, we-p , -- y. -,--+m.w . ---,---.---w
Efje "Firginia Corporation "' " * " "*" '
Of Rf4M Date: 3/1183 PGge 20 of 24 Detail "A" l
\
%oW
}
l
. Detail "B" l D /'
4 h.q ss 4 '
/ %..' ' Detail "C" N
s s.
s ^
j N, Detail "D" uma e amma i k \/
i l
1 l .
J k I
I 1
h Illustrative Only" General Layout - Steam Generator Support Cylinder Welds G ' Figure 3
-- ,..-p -
9,, 9y, . . - - - - - - - - - _ - ,p -. ,-,w g- ,,y,, y._,,,,,,wwwge-_.-,p_..- y, w w- - - -, ,,y.s-e.,.., -,w--.
t Proc. No._ ist 2.6 sgay' 3 Elje "Y7(rginia Corporation of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 21 of 24 4 g l.
O' Bos Metal m 60*
(Scon2)
. 45' (Scan 2) q- -
l t }
- O M eld B Reti. Vol 7' j { )
45", 60*(Scan g-I l 7,, 7 8 8)
. i 6"
4' s
6" g ; _
75 a
Weld i
r s'
t, ' Req. 8Vcn '
_ oc - [
45' 60*(Scan 7 8 8) 45'(Scan 5) 3, / 60'(Scan 5) o
=O' Base Metal l l Detail "A" Figure 4 (Minimum Scan Lengths)
-,--y.pw.wwg-w er - - .----- .,.%,,m..--,e-m.,,,_- - , , - - -
- - - - - - , - --e e g,,w-- ,- ,,w.w..-,p. --,
is1 2.6 i Proc.No' tlEfje Virginia Corporation q,v- 3 4 of Richmont -
Date: 3/1/83 Page 22
,,24 s
y _ _
-O' Bose Metal O (Scan 2)
- O' Weld B k
j a Reg. Vol.
3.2 22.5" 45'(Scan 2)
N 1
12.2" N 175" N j 's 24.5" 12" I _
. \ /
x x
_ 1 s
e.-
-O*hWeld B Req. Vol.
~
'MScon 5) 60'-4 Scan 5)
I l
i O
Base Metal i
l 6.4"-
Detail "B" Figure 5 l l ) (Minimum Scan Lengths)
_ _ __ ,_.,_m.. - . - --,----r * ~ * " ' - ^^*-'~"'-*"--"# * ~-
~
"' ' " ' ~ " "**
I IJB Y IT9 inia ( Orp 0salitin '
of Ricfjmont Date: 3/1/83 Page 23 24 gy H I e v- -
, - O* Bose Metal N
60* (Scan 2)
\
45 /
21" (Scan 2
- . - O*
Weld 8 I l 17" } 3 2.. { }
47" Req. Vol.
i u47" 6 I
,7 3.2" 1
-y I 21" Weld 8 Req.Vol.
) on 5)
/ 60*
(Scan
, . 5)
.- O' Base Metal
~
l 6.4"-
Detail "C" Figure 6 (Minimum Scan Lengths) l I I
.-,,-,,-,,-,-w----,- - -
L i
Proc.No 1st 2.6 Rev. 3 o Efje "t7ttgtnta Corporation V Of Ri@tnonb Date.- 3/1/a3 Pagdof 24 6.4"
, , O' Base Metal 60*(Scan 2) 45*(Scan 2)
V 195" O* Weld 8 Re q. Vol.
15 a 45*,60*(Scan 7 8 8) 32,,
4.7,,
n" 80" 4.7" 3.2" 45*, 60*(Scan 7 8 8) 0 Weld B
/ynom. Req. Vol.45*(Scan 5)
O Base Metal
-/ Betail "D" '
Figure 7 (Minimum Scan Lengths) ys ev - -4 ~ ,.er,*v- -p v-v,,- ve- - . - . , -,,-,----....L. rw ,+w,- - - - - - - , - - - - - - - - - -,-----,--------,,-n,,-, -
- - - - - - - - ,---,.-,-4w
1 Figure 8 Ultrossnic Examinction R port Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Iso / Drawing No..
The i (f- Virginia Corp. erocedure exam Surface examiner / Level VCR Supervisor Date y i Eichenend I
%M Component / Piping System Pirn Size Weld Type Cal. Block (/ lCouplant:
l Type _ _ Batch No._.
I j Continuation Sheet Attached Tranndticer 0* 45' 60* T n n e riimon e Yes N S/N Mfer. Mnan1 j
Size S/N RenRate
!' Field Changes:
Filter Ye s_ ._ No -
Frecuency Reiect
- - If Yes, Number Renm Ano' n Damn Coax Calibration 0* 2&5 Scan __
7&8 Scan Freo. Vfdan S und Entry Sound Entry - Calibration Checks Calibration Signal Signal P int To: Signal Point To: I 0* 45' 60*
Reflector Sweep Amp. Sweep Scribe 50% Amp. Sweep Scribc 50% In out In out In out Location Amp.
. r n\ \\L F\1 n \\ \\J l A \\ t i \") l\ \ H
(,A IK \\ \' T \\ f \DV
~
('s i\\ \\ \\ .\~ \U N W., \uv
( \>
- .m;.
/y '
- g Ref. dB 10 -
DAC 10 '
DAC 10 DAC Additional Comments / Sketch 8 .
8 .
8 -
6 .
6 . 6 .
4 . 4 .
4 -
2 -
2 -
2 0 -
0 -
0 ,
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 i
Form 101 2/82
i O O O -
Figure 9 Ultrasonic Examination Report - Continuation Sheet Page of i E Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Iso / Drawing No, j w \m
. t \/ Virginia Corp. eroceaure exam suriace examiner / Level vCa Supervisor Date Y of Richm6nd
% sf Component / Piping System Pipe Size Weld Type Cal. Block Couplant: Type & Batch #
3 i . , .
Base Surface Condition
] Weld :!:;ii;f:l Metal Scan Direction -
Base Examination Results j No. ;if$i: Scan 2 5 768 0 Inspection Limitations Metal Weld UT Visual Remarks i
i i
! - r1 l # N\\ E
! m F\ \\ q )\ \ \ .3
) O L\\ C , \\ J \ \ _T W 4
(W \ \\ h \\\ \ \Ju NT " \\ i\ UU i fu J P" ' -
l v
i i
i I
i
.. .m.
- 9 pq g
e 2
8
/
e 2 d
r n s o o s c Z e s e /
k n k r _
R p c a ^ -
o i m o e h e n L t T R i
o D a /.
t o a N c d i
r l s d a as I
n d n
t e e end a Mki t cS
_ S ei r sh5
_ t o . aT s
_ i l B
_ n i a U v C .
_ r dk
_ e l c p ei
- u Whr
_ S a
l s
_ C v
as t ee
_ end
- Mki -
o
. ei sh2 cS CJW b \
N 3
B aT A \
\
\
\ 9'
\'
n \ \
- i m.
ar C\T )
w t
r i e
a r
ei BD (\ \
o t
_nV
~
n v D p
e l a
t e
O S ml e \\
\
1 i
\
P / k\3 R
n n i
r e
I ag en BA WVO \\\
\
\
o m g _
\\ -
i t a x h ei pn f\\ \
a e t ed hu P n pwa t i
m m
e t
D eS e R a \ \ \ \
s) a -
E x S s
y g
i m
u . .
m U. o xSP s
nNU
(
O -
t v c n a i
i p M n i g o P h n
_ s e
/ t pi
_ a r r r t
n ped eea e u e D we t n
_ m d SR
. l o e o m
_ U t c p u s o m m . .
u r o s C P C inU. o iSP M
0 .
1 p n e r o o r
u od ihT t t ag i
g Conm cn i e F ah dL m i c n o it nla I r F
n go r -
\g i V %C xA aD
% # M
= / d .
s p \
V N no I N
/g_i d .
l o eN W
,! :! l :; 4 l!, ' ,:i .
!, , iI
, , I!:!!
m
,,s'*"
/ %\ -
g' p_ The (804) 266 8741 P 0 **= '474 Virginia Corp.
- sao, tak.a Av..
s %s Richmond, Virginia 23228 t Procedure
Title:
~ MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF FULL PENETRATION CIRCUMFERENTIAL AND LONGITUDINAL AUSTENITIC BUTT WELDS . EBASCO SERVICES INC0f1PCf!ATED AbURA!kE Procedure No.: ISI 2.7 m:;CINI:ERI;*G E, Sn. w .. .. .. . ... hW.wd W6 maut Caemets ! Q h==d 52 tem,wh .i tretes: Plant Site: Waterford No. 3 e .n . . c.m h-e-.i: r=w m ., u. ~
] .hjected: asws.
4 Arm 6mit NOTE: har. .e mi. en . . . ! Customer Louisiana Power and Light w e ei. .. . ) Ebasco Services Inc. - Agent *" ",', *[$'",,***QO i eniw et set en***,e s *c mq Approved for Use m,,.,,,,,,,,..,,,,',, >
- ,, ,g Virginia. Corporation: D . M " -^ e T-
==*4* r
*/ y. ov.ed . . w ,nir
.v .
Approved for Use DAT5:. *$.d.7 Y. 7a? .. l Customer: l l Rev. 0 Date 2/10/82 Rev. Date: ( Prepared by: b d "' - - Prepared by: Reviewed by: N%N N O M ' = L*l1EF Reviewed by: Reviewed by:M 8_#OI Reviewed by: Customer: Rev. 1 Date: 3/1/83 Rev. Dates Prepared by: b_2 . Ob m - Prepared by: V Reviewed by: 7 6 4-- m is/1E- Reviewed by: Reviewe4 b - Reviewed by: Customer LhN m Customers HMn
/M/N/n Rev. Dates Rev. Date:
1 Frepared by - Prepared by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: i Customers Customer: ' ~
*:_ . _ _ _ 2 :__T r L r .~: L ..~:_..._ -... - _ _ L_-.-. -
. , , Pr:c.No. ISI 2.7 ,g,y 1 tEfje Virgtma C.orporation of Risbmod Date: 3/1/83 Page 1 of 27 1.0 Scope 1.1 This procedure is applicable to, and describes, the requirements for manual ultrasonic examination of full penetration circumferential and longitudinal auster.itic butt welds and adjacent base metal in piping having a nominal wall thickness of 0.2 inches to 6.0 inches, and ver.sels with a nominal wall thickness of less than 2.0 inches, that are formed by extrusions, castings, forgings, or rolled plate.
Materials to be examined include similar metal welds in austenitic steels. This procedure is written in compliance with ASME Code, Section XI, Appendix III and Supplement 7 of Appendix III. 2.0 References 2.1 1977 edition of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, with addenda through summer, 1978. 2.2 The Virginia Corporation Written Practice for the Qualification and Certification of NDE Personnel, NDE 4.1, Rev. 3, dated 3/6/81. 2.3 The Virginia Corporation Procedure ISI 1.2, Preservice Inspection Documentation (latest revision). 2.4 The Virginia Corporation Procedure ISI 2.1, Ultrasonic Equipment Calibration Confirmation (latest revision). 2.5 The Preservice Inspection Program Plan. 2.6 The Virginia Corporation Procedure VC-QA-103, Generation and Control of Procedures for Waterford No. 3 Preservice Inspection (latest revision). 3.0 Personnel Qualifications 3.1 Personnel performing examinations to this procedure shall be qualified and certified to at least Level II in accordance with the document referenced in paragraph 2.2. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) may be employed as assistants. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) shall not independently evaluate or accept the results of an ultrasonic examination. p---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ ~ , - , ~ . ,
Proc.No. Isl 2.7 q,y 1 EIJe E,rgima Corporation { ) ofRic$ntonb Date:_ 3/1/83 Page 2 of 27 1 4.0 General Requirements 4.1 The area to be examined and contacted by che search unit shall be checked to ensure that it is free of dirt, loose scale, machining or grinding particles, weld splatter, or other foreign matter that would impair the free movement of the search unit or affect the examination. If such conditions are detected, they will be rectified prior to conducting the examination. 4.2 The identity and location of welds to be examined shall be as specified in reference 2.5. 4.3 The examinations conducted in accordance with this procedure shall be done from the 0.D. surface using contact methods. 4.4 Calibration shall be . performed from the side of the calibration block which corresponds to the 0.D. surface j g of the component. The calibration / examination surface shall be noted on the report. 4.5 Examinations shall consist of nominc.1 4'5 degree angle beam shear wave techniques applied in two directions parallel and two directions perpendicular to the weld axis. Other angles.may be used where part geometry, access, or metallurgical chara'cteristics impede effective use of 45 degree angle beam. A zero degree longitudinal beam shall be applied to all areas l through which the angle beam must pass. 5.: Equipment and Material Requirements 1 5.1 Ultrasonic flaw detection instrumente shall be of the A-scan pulse echo type equipped with a stepped gain control calibrated in units of 2 dB or less, and shall be qualified to the requirements of reference 2.4 prior to use at the Waterford 3 l plant site. Qualifications may be valid for a period not to exceed three months. l I
- - - Proc.No' ISI 2.7 q,y 3 Efje Virgmta Corporatiott of Ekbmont Date: 3A /83 Page 3 of 27 g 5.2 Search units shall be selected in accordance with figure
- 1. Transducers used shall be certified by the manufacturer as to serial number, size, and central frequency. Search units shall be capable of providing the applicable calibrations as required in paragraph 6.0 5.3 Cables connecting the flaw detector to the search unit shall be tha coaxial type. Standard lengths of 6 f t. or 12 ft. shall be used for preservice examinations.
5.4 A couplant medium, such as Sonotrace 40, manufactured by Echo Laboratories, Inc., or equivalent, shall be applied to the test surface. Couplant materials shall be analyzed for halogen content according to ASTM D-808 and the residdal halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Couplant materials shall also be analyzed for sulfur content according to ASTM D-129 and the residual h sulfur shall not exceed 1% by weight. All areas shall be dry wiped to remove excess couplant following examination. 5.5 Calibration Blocks 5.5.1 The basic calibration blocks shall be made from material of the same nominal diameter and nominal wall thickness or pipe schedule as the pipe to be examined. 5.5.2 The finish on the surf ace of the calibration blocks shall be representative of the s'arface finishes of the piping.
'5.5.3 Design of the calibration blocks and reflectors shall be essentially as depicted in Figures 2 through 5. Additional reflectors may be installed provided they do not interfere with establishing i
the primary reference.
NC Yit'9IRIA C01* pot'AtiOH Of RIM DQt0* 3/1/83 P098 ' Of 27 5.6 Wedges used to produce shear wave for angle beam examination shall be within 12' of the manufacturer's designated angle as required by reference 2.4. 6.0 Calibration 6.1 Prior to conducting examinations, the complete system to be utilized shall be calibrated on the applicable calibration block. The system shall include the ultrasonic unit (and battery pack, if applicable), cable or cables, search unit, couplant, and any other apparatus, instrument or circuit employed between the instrument and the calibration block surface. Once calibration has been established, any change to any part of the system, including the operator, will require at least a verification of the calibration, which shall be documented. 6.1.1 The search unit shall be selected in accordance with Figure 1. 6.1.2 The calibration block shall be identified and selected from reference 2.5. 6.1.3 The temperature difference between the examination surface and basic calibration block surface shall not exceed 25 F. 6.1.4 The maximum calibration indications shall be obtained with the sound beam oriented essentially perpendicular to the axis of the calibration reflector. The center line of the search unit shall be at least 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the nearest side of the block or pipe. (Rotation of the beam into a corner formed by the reflector and the side of the block may produce a higher amplitude signal at a longer beam path; this beam path I shall not be used for calibration.)
.I
Proc.No. IST 2.7 ftet 1 Efje "t7ttstitta Corporation 8f Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 5 of 27 q p 4 6.1.5 Calib.ation shall be performed from the surface (clad or unclad) of the calibration block which corresponds to the component surface to be examined. 6.2 Straight Beam Calibration for Weld Metal and HAZ 6.2.1 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the tT hole. Using the sweep delay control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the iT hole is positioned at 2.0 on the graticule. 6.2.2 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the 3/4T hole. Using the sweep range control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of thd response from the 3/4T hole is positioned at 6.0 on the graticule. 6.2.3 Repeat steps 6.2.1 and 6.2.2 until no further ad- l justment is necessary. Note: Other sweep posi-tions may be used when necessary to obtain a g broader sweep range for piping systems with vary-ing thickness. 6.2.4 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the hole giving the maximum signal amplitude. Adjust the sensitivity control to 80% of full screen height (FSH). Mark the peak of the indication on the screen. 6.2.5 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the remaining hole (s). Without changing the sensitivity control, mark the peak of the indica-tion (s) on the screen. 6.2.6 Connect the screen marks and extrapolate through the thickness (tT on each end) to provide a smooth DAC curve. This shall be the primary reference level.
Proc. No. Ist 2.7 gey i Efje Virginia Corporation I l of EUsbnumb Date: 3/1/83 Page 6 of 27 i 6.2.7 The use of delay line transducers and/or dual transducers for evaluation of indications in the near zone is permitted if applied in accord-ance with the requirements of paragraph 6.1. 6.3 Angle Beam Calibration for i Node Examination' 6.3.1 The response from the tT and 3/4T side-drilled holes shall be used to establish the slope and
, the shape of the DAC curve in the following manner:
6.3.1.1 Position the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the tT hole. Using the sweep delay control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the tT hole is positioned at 2.0 on the graticule. l I 6.3.1.2 Position the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the 3/4T hole. Using the sweep range control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the 3/4T hole is positioned at 6.0 on the graticule. 6.3.1.3 Repeat steps 6.3.1.1 and 6.3.1.2 until no further adjustment is necessnty. 6.3.1.4 Position the search unit for the ma>i-mum response from the hole giving the highest signal amplitude. Adjust the sensitivity control to 80%'of full screen height (FSH). Mark the peak of the indication on the screen. 6.3.1.5 Position the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the remaining hole (s). Without chan8 1ng the sensi-l l tivity control, mark the peak of the indication (s) on the screen.
- - - - - - - . - , , - , - - - - - - - - - - - , - _ , , , _ _ - , , , . - - - - - , , , , , , . _ _ . , -, - - _ - - - - , - - ---- w
Prce.N~' TST 2.7 5tev 1 Efje TT,rstnia i Corporation of Richmont Date: 3/1/83 Page 7 of 27 i 6.3.1.6 Connect the screen marks and extrapo-late through the thickness (tT on each end) to provide a smooth DAC curve. This shall be the primary reference level. 6.3.1.7 The sensitivity shall then be estab-lished from the I.D. surtace notch by settin8 the signal response amplitude from the I.D. notch at the level of the DAC curve. 6.3.2 When it is necessary to examine materials such as centrifically cast stainless steel, using refracted longitudinal waves and the I.D. notch cannot be resolved, the following calibration shall ba"per-formed. 6.3.2.1 Adjust the sweep in accordance with l l paragraphs 6.-3.1.1 through 6.3.1.3. 6.3.2.2 Position the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the iT hole. Ad- I just the sensitivity control to 80% FSH. Mark the peak of the indication on the screen. 6.3.2.3 Position the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the'lT hole. Without changing the sensitivity control, mark the peak of the indication on the screen. 6.3.2.4 Connect the screen marks for the tT and iT holes and extrapolate up to iT on each end to provide a smooth DAC curve. This shall be the primary reference level. 6.3.2.5 Adjust the sensitivity control to bring the iT hole to 80% FSil . Mark
Proc.No. T9T ?7 Rev 1 Efje E,rgtnta Corporation { ) of Richmont Date: 3/1/83 Page_.a._of 27 the peak of this signal on the screen and record the dB. 6.3.2.6 Position the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the 3/4T hole. With-out changing the sensitivity control, mark the peak of the indication ~ on the screen. 6.3.2.7 Connect the screen marks for the iT and 3/4T holes and extrapolate'up to iT on each end to provide a smooth DAC curve. This shall be the primary l reference level. 6.3.2.8 Adjust the sensitivity control to bring the 3/4T hole to 80% FSH. Mark'the peak of this indication on the screen I I and record the dB. 6.3.2.9 With the 3/4T hole at 80% FSH position the search unit on the 7/8T hole and mark the peak of the indication. Con-nect the screen marks for the 3/4T hole and the 7/8T hole and extrapolate up to tT on each end to provide a smooth DAC. This shall be the primary reference icvel. 6.3.2.10 This will produce three DAC curves on the screen. Each DAC curve will have its respective reference gain setting which shall be recorded on the data sheet. 6.3.2.11 Evaluation of reflectors will be to its respective DAC curve and reference gain setting along the sweep base line. J g 6.4 Angle Beam Calibration for Full Node Examination
* *
- Prce.N2 Is1 2.7 q;y 1 EIJe Virgtnta Corporation of Erbmarth Date: 3/1/83 Page 9 of 27 l
6.4.1 The response from the I.D. and 0.D. notches shall be used to establish the slope, shape, and sensi-tivity of the DAC curve in the following manner: 6.4.1.1 Position the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the I.D. notch. Us-ing the sweep delay control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the I.D. notch is positioned at 4.0 on the graticule. 6.4.1.2 Position the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the 0.D. notch. Us-ing the sweep range control, adjust the sweep position so that the leadin8 edge of the response from the 0.D. ndtch is positioned at 8.0 on the graticule. 6.4.1.3 Repeat steps 6.4.1.1 and 6.4.1.2 until no further adjustment is necessary. 6.4.1.4 Position the search unit-for the maxi-mum response from the I.D. notch. Ad-just the sensitivity control to 80% of FSH. Mark the peak of the indication on the screen. 6.4.1.5 Position ,the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the 0.D. notch. Without changing the sansitivitv con-trol. mark the peak nf the indication nn the screen. 6.4.1.6. Connect the screen marks and extrapo-late the DAC at either end for a dis-tance of iT. This shall be the pri-mary reference level. 6.5 Angle Beam Calibration for 13 Node Examination 6.5.1 The response from the I.D. and 0.D. notches shall be used to establish the slope, shape, and sensi-
i
- - - Proc' No' Ts1 2.7 stav EIJe Virgtnta Corporation 1 I I of Ricbment Date: 1/i/83 Page_LO of 27 4
tivity of the DAC curve in the following manner: 6.5.1.1 Position the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the I.D. notch. Us-ing the sweep delay control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the I.D. notch is positioned at 3.0 on the graticule. 6.5.1.2 Position the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the 0.D. notch. Us-ing the sweep range control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the 0.D. notch is positioned at 6.0 on the graticule. 6.5.1.3 Repeat steps 6.5.1.1 and 6.5.1.2 until l l no further adjustment is necessary. 6.5.1.4 Position the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the I.D. notch (13 node). Check that the leading edge is at or near 9.0 on the graticule. 6.5.1.5 Position the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the I.D. notch (i node). Adjust the sensitivity control to 80% FSH. Mark the peak of the indi-cation on the screen. 6.5.1.6 Position the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the 0.D. notch (1 node). Without changing the sensi-tivity control, mark the peak of the indication on the screen. 6.5.1.7 Position the search unit for the maxi-mum response from the I.D. notch (1) node). Without changing the sensi-I I tivity control, mark the peak of the indication on the screen.
1 Proc.No. Tc7 77 Rev= EIje Virgtnta Corporation 1 of Richment Date: 1/1/R3 Page 1.Lof 27 ; 6 . 5 .1' . 8 Connect the screen aarks and extrapolate the DAC at either end for a distance of iT. This shall be the primary refer-ence level. 6.6 When using the straight beam or angle beam techniques, variables such as weld prep,aration, weld crown width, or physical interference may be encountered. These variables may be eliminated by one or more of the following. Note: Other sweep positions may be used when necessary to obtain j e broader sweep range for piping systems with varying thickness. 6.6.1 Reducing the dimension of the wedge edge-to-beam entry point. , 6,6.2 Reducing search unit size. 6.6.3 Increasing beam angle. 6.6.4 Increasing the metal path by at least an additional l l
} node.
6.6.5 Additional surface preparation. 6.7 Calibration Verification 6.7.1 A system calibration check, which is the verifica-tion of the instrument sensitivity and sweep range calibration, shall be performed at the beginning and end of each examination category, or every four hours, whichever is less, and with any change in examination personnel. 6.7.2 A decrease in sensitivity of 20% or 2 dB shall re-quire recalibration and re-examination of all items examined since the previous acceptable calibration check. All data taken since the last calibration check shall be marked void. 6.7.3 An increase in sensitivity of 20% or 2 dB shall re-quire recalibration, re-ex' amination, and data cor- , rection of all indications reported since the pre-vious acceptable calibration or check.
Proc.No' Tsi 2.7 Rev=1 Efje "t7ttginta Corporation I } of W4mont Date: 1/1/a3 Page_12_of 27 6.7.4 If any point on the DAC curve has moved on the sweep line more than 10% of the sweep division reading, correct the sweep range calibration and note the correction in the examination record. If recordable reflectors are noted on the data sheets, those data sheets shall be voided, a new calibration shall be recorded, and the voided examination areas shall be re-examined. 7.0 Examination 7.1 Stra18ht Beam Examination for Base Metal 7.1.1 Prior to performing angle beam examinations, the base material through which the angle beam will pass (reference, Figures 6 and 7) shall be completely scanned with a straight beam search unit to d'etect laminar reflectors which might affect the interpre-l l tation of the results of the angle beam examination. 7.1.2 The sensitivity of the instrument shall be adjusted at a location free of indications so that the initial back reflection from the far side of the plate will be 80 percent of full screen height. 7.1.3 Areas containing laminar indications that may affect angle beam examinations shall be noted. All areas giving indications equal to or greater than the re-maining back reficction shall be recorded on the data sheet. Also, record all areas where one or more discontinuities produce a continuous loss of back reflection accompanied by continuous indica-tions in the same planc. 7.1.4 Alternatively, the base metal examination may be conducted concurrently and at the same calibration as described in paragraph 6.2, provided that the scan sensitivity (2 x reference) is at least as { l sensitive as that required in paragraph 7.1.2. 7.2 Straight Beam Examination for Weld Metal and HAZ
Proc. No. Tsi 7 7 Rev. Efje Virstnia Corporation 1 Of WW Date' 1/1/A, Page 13 of 27 l 4 7.2.1 If the angle beam examination is restricted to a full node or li node examination from one side of the weld, a calibrated straight beam examination i shall be performed, providing the weld crown is flat enough to make satisfactory transducer contact. 7.2.2 The area to be examined shall be the weld metal and the adjacent base material on the restricted side of the weld to the extent allowed by the geometric configuration (see Figure 6). Scans shall over-lap at least ten percent. - 7.2.3 Calibration shall be as indicated in paragraph 6.2. 7.3 Angle Beam - Reflectors Parallel to the Weld 7.3.1 The primary scan for reflectors parallel to the weld shall be i node from both sides of the weld. 7.3.2 Full node or 1} node shall only be used when it is impossible to examine the required material with a i node examination from both sides of the weld. 7.3.3 The area of interest shall be the weld and il A Z , and the required amount of base metal on each side of the weld (reference Figures 6 and 7). 7.3.4 The scan pattern shall start at one edge of the area to be examined with the ultrasonic search unit transmitting an angle beam perpendicular to the weld axis. The search unit shall be noved to-wards and away from the weld such that the cali-brated beam passes through the whole area of the weld and base metal to be examined. Concurrent with this scan, the search unit shall be , swiveled 15' right and 15* 1 eft and progressively t indexed along the length of the weld such that l e
, , , Proc.No. Is1 2.7 sg,y__ 1 Efje Virgtnta Corporation
(] of Ris$mont Date: 3/1/83 Page 14 of 27
\. ,
the whole scan patter'n follows a "saw-to,oth" pattern. The " pitch" of the "saw-tooth" shall be such that on each pass the ultrasonic beam covers at least 10 percent of the area covered by the previous adjacent pass. The weld and . required amount of adjacent base metal is to be fully examined by this procedure. The examination shall be accomplished from both sides of the weld. For welds where scanning access is not available from both sides, the I..P.& L. P.S.I. coordinator will be notified. 7.3.5 Calibration for 1/2 node, full node, or 1-1/2 node examination shall be accomplished according to g paragraph 6.3, 6.4, or 6.5. 8 Q! 7.4 Angle Beam - Reflectors Transverse to the Weld 7.4.1 The angle beam examination for reflectors transverse to the weld (examination directions 7 and 8) shall be performed on the weld crown and adjacent base material as necessary to examine the veld root by 1/2 node in two directions along the weld. When the weld crown configuration prohibits a 1/2 node examination, a full node examination shall be performed with the search unit adjacent to the weld crown. ( 7.4.2 The search unit shall be placed on one edge of the inspection area directing the angle beam into the material parallel to the weld axis. From this position the search unit O V
. .. ~- _ _ _ - - _ - . - __ -_ - - _
Proc.No. Ist '7 5tev.1 EIJe Virgtuta Corporation dR Date'3/1/83 Page i s of.2L g sha.1 be moved parallel to the weld and indexed toward the opposite side of the weld such that the next scan will cover at least 10 percent of the area covered by the previous adjacent scan. Parallel scans shall be repeated in this manner until the opposite side of the weld and . base metal is reached and examined. Alternately, the search unit may be swiveled 15 right and 15 left and progressively indexed along the length of the weld such that the whole scan pattern follows a "saw-tooth" pattern. The " pitch" of the "saw-tooth" shall be such that on each pass the ultrasonic beam covers at least 10 percent of the area covered by the previous adjacent pass. 7.4.3 The weld and the required amount of adjacent base metal is to be fully examined by one of the techniques described in paragraph 7.4.2. 7.4.4 Calibration for node, full node, or 1 node examination shall be accomplished according to paragraph 6.3, 6.4, or 6.5. l l O
Proc No- ist 2.7 g,y i Efje Virgtnta Corporation 1 I of W4mont Date: 3/1/83 Page16 of 27 1 7.5 Extent of Examination 7.5.1 The volume subject to examination and extent of scan length shall be in accordance with Figures 6 and 7. 7.5.2 Butt welded branch connection welds shall be examined by scanning both transverse and paralici to the veld according to paragraph 7.3 and 7.4. The examination volumes are shown in Figure 9. 7.5.3 Longitudinal welds adjacent to circumferential welds shall be examined by scanning both transverse and parallel to the weld according to paragraphs 7.3 and 7.,4. 7.6 Examinations utilizing more than one DAC curve shall be { } examined once at the higher sensitivity, and evaluated at the applicable sensitivity. 7.7 Rate of search unit movement shall not exceed 6" per second. 7.8 Scanning sensitivity shall be at least twice (4 dB) the calibration or reference sensitivity. 8.0 Evaluation and Recording of Indications 8.1 All indications 20% of the primary reference DAC or greater shall be investigated to determine the shape, identity, location, and type of indication. Additionally, all indications, regardless of amplitude, which tue examiner
. judges to be potentially indicative of a crack or lack of fusion shall be investigated to determine the shape, identity location, and type of indication.
8.1.1 Any indication categorized' as a finw shall be recorded and reported in accordance with the j requirements of reference 2.3. l l
Proc.No ist u Rev i Efje E,rgtnta (Corporation of Richeionb Date: 3/1/83 page i7 of 27 8.1.2 Any indication resulting f rom the metallurgical structure within the material shall be considered when asaessing the effectiveness of the examination. Restr.'.ctions or variations to the examination due to the metallt rgical structure shall be i reported. 8.1.3 Geometric indications that are equal to or greater than 50% of the primary reference DAC shall be i acknowledged by recording their length and location. 8.2 I Any indication which is equal to or grea*.r than 50% of the primary reference DAC shall be evaluated to the extent necessary to determine the size, shape, identity, and location of the reflector. Indications shall be reported in accordance with the requirements of reference' 2.3. 8.3 Welds that did not receive a complete examination according to paragraph 7.0 shall have the partial examination noted on the data sheet as follows: 8.3.1 The extent of the examination performed shall be noted. 8.3.2 If the volumetric examination was performed from one side of the weld only, it shall be noted and an entry made indicating what steps were i taken to ensure that the required area on the far side of the weld was examined. 8.3.3 The reason (s) that a specific examination was impractical shall be noted. For example support l or component restricts access, fitting prevents adequato ultrasonic coupling on one side, component
, to component veld prevents ultrasonic examination.
l etc. Q
t @HA MPEHf OH { I , Of R(M Datg* 3/1/83 pagg 18 0f 27 8.4 Investigation and reporting of indications shall be performed at the reference sensitivity. Other frequencies, sizes, or beam angles may be used as an aid in evaluating or interpreting examination results. 9.0 Documentation of Examination 9.1 All data relative to the examinations and reportable indications sh'all be reported in accordance with reference 2.3, and on forms similar to those shown in Figures 10, ll, and 12. l . l l - i I t
-=_ = . . _ _ . - = - . - . _ _ . - - . . _ _ - - - - - _ . . _ _ _ _ _ . -_-_
. . . . Proc.No. 1st 2.7 gey, i Efje Virstma Corporation of Ekhment Date: 3/1/83 Page 19 of 27 g Figure 1 TRANSDUCER AND SEARCH UNIT SELECTION Angle Beam Examination
- Nominal Transducer Material Maximum Nominal Nominal Thickness Size Frequency Angle
.250" to 400" 1/4" dia, or 1/4" x 1/4" 2.25 MHZ 45'
.400" to 1.000" 1/2" dia. or 1/2" x 1/2" 2.25 MHZ 45' l.000" to 1.200" 3/4" dia. or 3/4" x 3/4" 2.25 MHZ 45*
1.200" and greater 1" dia. or 1" x 1" 2.25 MHz 45" Straight Beam Examination
- Nominal Pipe Transducer Diameter Maximum Size Nominal Frequency less than 12" dia. 1/2" dia. or 1/2" x 1/2" 2.25 MHZ 12" dia, and greater 1" dia. or 1" x 1" 2.25 MHZ l
- Note: Other transducers may be used where weld geometry or metallurgical characteristics impede effective use of the above listed angles, frequencies, or sizes.
-- , p,-. . .,---_.7 --.w-. -.-g y-- , - - . . , - --.9_ - _ . ,, --- _-m--,-., w yap, . - , _ -
Topz9 Us'y e xe# m N@f
- M' 9mg gmt%$s2 e n O P Wwre5E F,_=, a?S* ton *Lo yo*
e a
.k s .)
1
' e ' i _g 4 f*
O" f 7 . 4.- ;ij' s 4 b - o s
-+
* ~ ,
l -
\ ,.,
)
w ,. s a l.I I}
'I
-i
. 'I 1 L d
s e n a
\ "2 V.
1 TA NT e z _5 '
" i S "y
- e O
l p n _ - i O P
. i e 2
_ f l a i e v n 0 . n t r 2 ii t i a u m r g o t i N s F u r l Al o l l l I I l 1 l g I I ! I l I l I I l I i I 1 l I l F I ( " I.
- k A II!l . "
- S
" c o
W u t i s 1 1 V l B V e n o i t a r
' l l i lI b
- i l
a
- C il l l 1 I l l I I I l l l l l l I i l l
- I I I I I l l l I I l 1 I ! ! l I l l l l I i I l I I l
=
l [u - 7 :!:! 7 :! .! ['
.h f2 - '
i2
.f O I z
- I I a t 2 I
!l:' ! .) i l iIi j: lIiJ!!i1i jI>i;i 1 ;1 j<iiJl .
' . . obp @
2 g<. s greM "qg M tekAQon 4" gW hr~ a~ ,3 $ oa pQ
- w
,h .
T t { T - T ' a4 f 3 u
, i u'{,
r i' W *3 4
/
0 W a s 9 u
/. / i v
)
- 24 f
i ,/ g. t W s t o t k" y
- c4l A .
o1 n
- l o s
i B e ze3 v niv 7 oSi e i t r z T 1 4 V/ t eau aprg riti T bPsF i u P w V ll1 aa1 Cn1 i" m o N r _ o F ( O _ n 2 _ _ ~ l I i I pI - l l l ! i } ! I l I _
,la l
,tl bl I
' ' ' ! l l 'l 4 "
~ a
,! i l l '
w i
. ! i l i' w _
v i v il .I \ l I \ i l I l ! ; li; I w i , l - 2 2[ ;, " 2 iv
2.7 g,y, Proc.No. Ist g gj(g g g 1 d of R@mont Date: 3/1/83 Page 22 of 27 VIEW "A" s, iI A II n ll lI I'l 3 yl u er l
-+
VIEW "A"
.,, w il" 2 24 30 -lt.....f d
,li I
[- so- 4 n i +, g. U l l T 2[2 g 4 l ,, I ,m T j l l j --- iO I I e T 17 l 2' O f / 4 u ;a- ' l 15* . 3,,
! 15/. I_
1 J _2
',, .I_ __ i 30' G i g .! ,,
I l , VIEW "B"
< l '?
3 l 2 j 4 a n i I I
- 8 gT l
, 21 lli l l ' 2 l l l ,e 1:i i, i I V VIEW "B" Calibration Block (For Nominal Pipe Size 36" and Above)
" Illustrative Only" Figure 4
_ - . - _ .:. .__ _ _ - _ _ _ _.. _ ____ _,.. ~ _ ._ _ -.___ _ _,. - - ,_ ___ ____., .__.. _ .__ _.. ._,.--___ _ .-__ _
* ~~~ ~ ~
Proc. No. 1st 2.7 stey,_ 1 Efje Virgtuta C,orporation of Richment Date: 3/1/a3 Page.u of 27 { ) Call 8 RATION BLOCK REFLECTOR SIZE Figure 5 V - (t d "
+ 005 .
- 0.125 .000 -+ e (d) notch depth g" (see table) g" 8 y -0J i TYPICAL 4 PLACES ON EACH CALIBRATION BLOCK i I NOTCH DEPTH FOR ULTRASONIC CAllBRATION BLOCKS NOMINAL PIPE WALL NOTCH DEPTit (d)
THICKNESS (T) INCHES M AT ERI ALS ( INCHES LESS THAN O.312
- AUSTENITIC O.lO T _- ,
fq 0.312 + 10% TO 6.0 AUSTENITIC O.lO T -20% i HCLE DIAMETERS FOR ULTRASONIC CALIBRATION BLOCKS MATERIAL THICKNESS (T) INCHES HOLE DIAMETER (INCHES) UP TO I" INCLUSIVE 3 g .. OVER I" THRU 2" T 3" OVER 2" THRU 4" Te ( )
,o OVER 4" THRU 6" T
-- ~ , , . , _ , , , - , , - , . - - - ---w,,y.,, . , , - - ,.---~v,. ,,
i
, , , Proc. No. Isl 2.7 gey 1 EIje Virgtnta Corporation i
(m -J Of R@ntonb Date' 3/1/83 Page24 of 27 Angle Beam Scan Length T N > 1 > T l 4
\
\\$// :l
\ - ~ / .
Area Subject to Examination O Angle beam scan length as shown above, shall be as follows: Material Minimum Scan Thickness Length 45* l
.200 to .400 1.25"
.400 to 1.000 3.00" 1.200 to 1.200 4.00" 30 to 1.500 5.00"
. 530 and Greater 1.1 x 3T l
l l O - Full Node Examination Figure 6
, , . Proc. No. ISI 2.7 gey, -1 Efje Th,rgtuta Corporation Of RIChmonb Date' 3/1/83 Page 25 of 27 ,
l Angle Beam Scan - Typical Each Side 4 > < T
\ \ ,
, Area Subject to Examination For angle beam scan leigth as shown above, add the following from each side of the weld fusion line.
Material Minimum Scan Thickness Length 45' l
.200" to .400" 1.00"
.400" to 1.000" 2.25" i 1.000" to 1.200" 2.75"
( 1.200" to 1.500" 3.25" l.500" and Greater 1.2 x 2T l l p I Half Node Examination Figure 7
.. - . ~ . . -
- -.._m-, - .
w- e v-myy
, , , Proc. No. Tsr 2.7 stey,1
,s Efje Virgtuta Corporation I of Rfthmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 26 of27 v
"Am I
/
\ -
e E. P. %
\ g :.. ii.ll..li.l.
7 y p w l h V The beam path shall be increased by at least one-half vee if dimension "A" is greater than: l ( l 0.93 T for = 43' to 45' i 1.6 T for = 58' to 60* 2.5 T for = 68* to 70* l l l l l l Weld Coverage Figure 8
Proc. No. Ist 2.7 gey, i Efje "y7ttstuta Corporation of Richmont Date: 3/1/83 Page.22 of 27 { } ro br i 6p 00 b y b, l cL w$l m, 8 e A 3 g %
$ 4h 5 g g g e \
s k a w m I
/
,f j
_ 1 BRANCH _ _ ( CONNECTION ,' g 1 \ > a 2 \ S ( - ~~ g , S ) 5 E .. / v w kN
. WELD I
JOINT 'as^ g ' w _ M m l o
- -> t 4$_; p
-% _ j w $
E l I Figure 9 Butt h'elded Branch Connections
Figure 10 Ultras:nic Exam. mat. ion Repcrt k Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Ico/ Drawing No,
% The t \]p Virginia Corp. Proceaure exam Surrace sxaminer/tevel vcR Supervisor Date y .# akha d
%d Component / Piping System Pipe Size Weld Type Cal. Block # Couplant:
l Type Batch No i Continuation Sheet Attached Trnnnducer O' 45* 60* Yn=rrimone j Yes No S/N Mfer. Mndol i Size S/N RenRste Field Changes: Frequency Reiect Filter Yes No - j If Yes, Number nonm Ancia Dnmn Coax Calibration 0* 2&5 Scan . 7&8 Scan Fren. Viden S und Entry Sound Entry Ca'ibration Checks ! Calibration Point To: 0* 45' 60* Signal Signal Point To: Signal Raflector Sweep Scribe Amp. Swe Scribc 50% In out In out In out j Location Amp. Sweep Amp. 50% Line DAC e, Line DAC A\ \\M M \\ G T\ \\ C n \ % t \\ ' / 6 L\ '3 1 /~T\\ \\ \ h \\ \ V
- ( W \\\M \\ \\\U N \\ 'n%3 "
( U )V v
' i?
i l Ref. dB
- 10 10 10 DAC Additional Comments / Sketch DAC DAC i
e 8 . 8 . 8 - I 6 . 6 . 6 . i 4 . 4 . 4 . 2 - 2 - 2 l 0 - 0 ' O -
! 2 4 6 8 10 7 4 f. 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 Form UT-101 2/82
, Fibre 11 Ultrasonic Examination Report - Continuation Sheet Page of Customer
- Plant Unit Loopf Zone Iso / Drawing No.
Q j e 1 The Virginia Corp. Procedure Exam Surface Examiner / Level lVCR Supervisor Date g \/y elakhmond j .
% ,ssf Component / Piping System Pipe Size Weld Type Cal. Block Couplant: Type & Batch #
l Base Surface Condition l Weld $Nj8 Metal Scan Direction - Base Examination Results i No. ;;:;p;:: Scan 2 5 7&8 0 Inspection Limitations Metal Weld UT Visual Remarks 4 I
- i. -
i (3 I _ C\ \L I Af n T\ \ \d ! m A\ \\ V )\ i .\ M i _ F , \ \ O t \\ ( \ ' 3V
- (< A \ h \\ k i\ \\ \
- \' A \ O \\ \\ W '
l N M r-QV i vju 49 9 I. l l l
" W W
- c.
Figure 12 Ultrascnic ExaminaticA Report Indicatian Record
/p%\ Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone g 3, j g \/y Virginia Corp. Proceaor, ex,,1,,r/ toy,1 yea sop,,y1,o, o,t, j
of Ekhmond
%# Component / Piping System ISO Drawing No. Cal. Standard No./ Thickness Indication Minimum Depth Maximum Depth Base Metal Base Metal Wald Ind Max.% Length S.U. Sweep S.U. Sweep Beam Beam Thickness Weld Thickness No. No. DAC From To Pos. Reading ~
Pos. Reading Angle Dir. 2 Side rhick. 5 Side Remarks i i i i ! , /\ A t1 \ i' . ! - CM \\ 3 m n\ _ \\ V . \\\ L Is \\ O t \\ / \' W ( cd \ k \\ h A\\\
\N\ D \\ \W i
A gv H.# 4 e i l l i .- . . . . . - 9/g7 l
/-s\
L p The (804) 266 8741 1 V Virginia Corp. P. O. Box 9474 y e 5809 Lakeside Ave. s
\ %s 7 e -' Rit.hmond, Virginia 23228 Procedure
Title:
~ MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF CIRCUMFERENTIAL BUTT WELDS BETWEEN CLAD FERRITIC PIPING AND AUSTENITIC SAFE ENDS EBASCO SERVICES IHCCf!PCRATIID L..._.. AS3UAAUCE , Procedure No.: ISI 2.8 E iCETEERI"G
. .us u w.m.i u.
j [,.ewwe.=ci g an e w.m c..,...is = not,v: Plant Sitt: Waterford No. 3 .:. c. . ..s , news.. : r,. 4 -ui wa. O "" (~' , NOTE: l Customer: Louisiana Power and Light aa = .r ma dan-~t. m ., m. l Ebaseo Services. Inc. - Agent 0,( ***,O,[ [ '",",',,7,"e*,"' ans i. == n. m .. Qt O..ita. . g ru a _, ve, , Approved for Use """ "
- mw.i. -,
A' Virginia.Corporr,teon: ='1 ."- g m. . m ."E O Approved for Use D4. . .g w.. , ' A n Ja Y&
..y........,
D A :. .. '/..d"/.I.'.k. Customer:
/
Rev. O Date: 2/15/82 Rev. Date: Prepared by: I d % -- - Prepared by: l Reviewed by: N ^- = O W ^r=->4#l2EE Reviewed by: Reviewed by: WM M. _ Reviewed by: U i f Customer: Rev. 1 Date: 4 /29/82 Rev. Date: . Prepared by: Y d Aso,. - Prepared by: Reviewed by: 6 M" " ~2v/K Reviewed by: Reviewe<t by: 8C N- % vie.wed by: Customer: Customer: Rev. 2 Date: 3/1/83 Rev. Date: 3 Prepared by:- 0
'~ Prepared by:
Reviewedbysf 6 ft4 u m_1 . L/.23 . Reviewed by: . Reviewed by:MMd, Reviewed by: ' Customer: 'b ,k # Customer:
~ ,~ ~ ~
~ - - - ~ -
Proc. No' ISI 2.8 Rey 2 Efje "Tr7(rginia Corporation of RWJmont . Date: 9 /, /n Page1 of 31 1.0 Scope 1.1 This procedure is applicable to, and describes, the requirements for manual ultrasonic examination of full penetration circumferential butt welds between clad ferritic piping and nozzles, and austenitic safe ends. This procedure complies with ASME Code, Section XI. Appendix 3, and ASME Code, Section V, g Article 4, where applicable. 2.0 References 2.1 1977 edition of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section II, with addenda through summer, 1978 2.2 The Virginia Corporation Written Practice for the Qualification and Certification of NDE Personnel, NDE 4.1, Rev. 3, dated 3/6/81 2.3 The Virginia Corporation procedure ISI 1.2, Preservice Inspection Documentation (latest revision) 2.4 The Virginia Corporation procedure ISI 2.1, Ultrasonic Calibration Confirmation (latest revision) 2.5 The Preservice Inspection Program Plan 2.6 1977 Edition of ASME Boiler and Presssure Vessel Code, Section V, with addenda through summer, 1978 2.7 The Virginia Corporation procedure VC-QA-103, Generation and Control of Procedures for Waterford No. 3 Preservice Inspection (latest revision) 3.0 Personnel Qualifications 3.1 Personnel performing examinations to this procedure shall be qualified and certified to at least Level II in accordance with the document referenced in paragraph 2.2. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) may be employed as assistants. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) shall not independently evaluate or accept the results of an ultrasonic examination.
Proc. No. Tsr t a Rev. 2 EIJe "tTirgtuta Corporation i I 2 31 of 3Rirbatant Date: '/1/a3 Page of 4.0 General Requirements 4.1 The area to be examined and contacted by the search unit shall be checked to ensure that it is free of dirt, loose scale, machining or grinding particles, weld splatter, or other foreign matter that would impair the free movement of the search unit or af fect the examination. If such conditions are detected, they will be rectified prior to conducting the examination. 4.2 The identity and location of welds to be examined shall be as specified in reference 2.5. 4.3 The examinations conducted in accordance with this procedure shall be done from the 0.D. surface using contact methods. 4.4 Calibration shall be performed from the side of the calibration block which corresponds to the 0.D. surf ace of the component. { } The calibration / examination surface shall be noted on the report. 4.5 Examinations shall consist of nominal 45' and 60* angle beam shear wave techniques applied in two directions parallel and two directions perpendicular to the weld axis, except where restricted by part geometry or access. A 0* longitudinal
- beam shall be applied to all areas through which the angle beams must pass. Other angles may be used provided the measured difference between the angles is at least 10 l degrees. The use of the refracted longitudinal beam technique may be applied when necessary, in two directions parallel and perpendicular to the axis. The refracted longitudinal shall l be restricted to a half node examination.
l l 5.0 Equipment and Material Requirements 5.1 Ultrasonic flaw detection instruments shall be of the A-scan pulse echo type, equipped with a stepped gain control calibrated in units of 2 dB or less, and shall be qualified to the requirements of l l I reference 2.4 prior to use at the Waterford 3 site. Qualifications l l may be valid for a period not to exceed three months.
- j
, , , Proc.No, IS1 2.8 q,y 2 EIje "t7trginia Corporation I of Richmonb .
Date: ,/,/9, Page 3 of31 5.2 Search units shall be selected in accordance with Figure 1. Transducers used shall be certified by the manuf acturer as to serial number, size, and central frequency. S'earch units shall be capable of providing the applicable calibrations as required in paragraph 6.0. 5.3 Cables connecting the flaw detector to the search unit shall be the coaxial type. Standard lengths of 6 ft. or 12 ft. shall be used for preservice examinations. 5.4 A couplant medium, such as Sonotrace 40, manufactured by Echo l Laboratories, Inc., or equivalent, shall be applied to the l l test surface. Couplant materials shall be analyzed for halogen content according to ASTM D-808, and the residual halogens j shall not exceed 1% by weight. Couplant materials shall also
)
be analyzed for sulfur content according to ASTM D-219, and l the residual sulfur shall not exceed 1% by weight. All areas shall be dry wiped to remove excess couplant following l I, i examination. l 5.5 Calibration Blocks 1 l 5.5.1 Design of the calibration blocks and reflectors 1 shall be essentially as depicted in Figure 2, and shall comply with the requirements of reference 2.6. Exceptions shall be noted in the final report. , 5.5.2 Where possible, the material from which the block is fabricated shall be from one of the following: (a) nozzle drop out from the component (b) a component prolongation (c) material of the same material specification, product form, and heat treatment as the materials being joined. l 5.5.3 The finish on the surfaces of the block shall be , representative of the surface finishes of the g component. 5.5.4 Additional reflectors may be installed; these reflectors shall not interfere with establishing l l the primary reference. l
e e-* Proc.Pto. 1st 2.8 Rev. 2 EIJe Virgtuta Corporation I of Richmonb Date:- 3/1/93 Page 4 of 31 5.5.5 Figure 2 shows calibration block configuration with hole size and location. Each weld on the component
- or piping system shall be represented by a calibration block having a thickness which meets the requirements ~
of Figure 2. The calibration block thickness must be within one inch (plus or minus) of the component or piping weld thickness. Where the calibration block thickness, plus or minus one inch, spans two of the weld thickness ranges shown in Figure 2, the block's use shall be acceptable in the range of plus or minus one inch of the block's thickness. 7or example, a four-inch calibration block shall be acceptable for veld thicknesses of three inches to five inches. The holes shall be in accordance with the thickness of the block. Where two or more l I base metal thicknesses are involved, the calibration block thickness is determined trom the average thickness of the weld. 5.5.6 The basic calibration block shall be curved for welds in materials with diameters 20 in. (508 mm) a,nd less. A single curved basic calibration block i may be used to calibrate the examination on surf aces in the range of curvature from 0.9 to 1.5 times the basic calibration block diameter. 5.5.7 For examination of welds in materials where the diameter is greater than 20 in. (508 mm), a block of essentially the same curvature, or, alternately, i a flat basic calibration block, shall be used. 5.6 Wedges used to produce ahear wave for angle beam examination j shall be within 22' of tbe manufacturer's designated angle as required by reference 2.4.
- - , , - - - . - - - - -- -- ,- e - - - - - , - - , , - , , - . - - ,
, , , Proc. No. Isl 2.8 q,y 2 Efje "t7ttstuta Corporation Of E C$ ment D01e[ 3/1/83 Page 5 of 31 g
6.0 Calibration 6.1 Instrument calibration for screen height linearity, amplitude control linearity, and beam spread measurement shall be performed prior to use at the Waterford 3 plant site, and every three months thereaf ter in accordance with reference 2.4. 6.2 Prior to conducting examinations, the complete system to be utilized shall be calibrated on the applicable calibration block. The system shall include the ultrasonic unit (and battery pack, if applicable), cable or cables, search unit, couplant, and any other apparatus, instrument or circuit employed between the instrument and the calibration block surface. Once calibration has been established, any change to any part of the system, including the operator, will require at least a verification of the calibration, which shall be documented. 6.2.1 The search unit shall be selected in accordance with Figure 1. ! 6.2.2 The calibration block shall be identified and selected from reference 2.5. 6.2.3 The temperature dif ference between the examination I surfcce and basic calibration block surface shall not exceed 25'F. 6.2.4 The maximum calibration indications shall be obtained I with the sound beam oriented essentially perpendicular to the axis of the calibration reflector. (Rotation of the beam into a corner formed by the reflector and the side of the block may produce a higher amplitude signal at a longer beam path; this beam path shall not be ased for calibration). 6.2.5 Calibration shall be performed from the surf ace ,
+
of the calibration block which corresponds to the component surface to be examined.
Proc. No. Tst 28 Rev- ? EIJe Virgtnta Corporation I of Risbmonb Date: 3 /1/" Page 6 of 31 6.3 Straight Beam Calibration for Weld Metal and HAZ 6.3.. Position the search unit for the maximum response from the kT hole. Using the sweep delay control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading - edge of the response f rom the kT hole is positioned at 1.5 on the graticule. 6.3.2 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the 3/4T hole. Using the sweep range control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the 3/4T hole is positioned at 4.5 on the graticule. 6.3.3 Repeat steps 6.3.1 and 6.3.2 until no further adjustment is necessary. 6.3.4 Other sweep positions may be used in 6.3.1 and 6.3.2, if necessary, to keep the back reflection { } on the screen when thicker sections are encountered. 6.3.5 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the hole giving the highest signal amplitude. Adjust the sensitivity control to 80% of full screen height (FSH). Mark the peak of the indication on the screen. 6.3.6 Position the search unit for the maximum response j from the remaining hole (s). Without changing the sensitivity control, mark the peak of the indication (s) on the screen. 6.3.7 Connect the screen marks and extrapolate through the thickness (kT on each end) to provide a smooth DAC curve. This shall be the primary reference level. 6.3.8 The use of delay line transducers and/or dual transducers for evaluation of indications in the near zone is permitted if applied in accordance sdth the requirements of paragraph 6.1. l l
Efje Virginia Corporation OfR(Chmotth . Date 3/1/83 Page 7 of 31 , 4 6.4 Angle Beam Calibration for Examination from the Clad Ferritic Side 6.4.1 Sweep Range Calibration 6.4.1.1 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the IcT side-drilled hole. Adjust the lef t edge of this indication to line 2 on the screen with the delay control. 6.4.1.2 Position the search unit for the maximum response from the 3/4T hole. Adj ust the lef t edge of this indication to line 6 on the screen with the range control. 6.4.1.3 Repeat delay and range control adjustments
, until the IcT and 3/4T hole reflections start at sweep lines 2 and 6 respectively.
6.4.1.4 Position the search unit for maximum response frou the square notch on the I opposite surface. The indication will appear near sweep line 8. 6.4.1.5 Two divisions on the sweep equal icT. 6.4.1.6 Other sweep positions may be used when ! calibrating to paragraphs 6.4.1.1 through L 6.4.1.5 when it is necessary to obtain a broader sweep range for piping systems
~
with varying thicknesses, 6.4.2 Distance-Amplitude Correction 6.4.2.1 Calibration from the clad side (a) Position the cearch unit for maximum l response from the hole which gives the highest amplitude. (b) Adjust the sensitivity control to provide an 80% FSH response from i the hole. Mark the peak of the
. indication on the screen (c) Position the search unit .for maximum response f rom each of the rc=aining holes.
,----,,.m- - y e.p-m,-- - - - , -
>- w -.--- , - - - -
*------swy- --. - -v-- ---%-
Proc.No ist 2.8 gey 2 EIJe "ETi rgtnta Corporation { } 8fRichmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 8 of 31 1 (d) Mark the peak of these indications on the screen. (e) Position the search unit for maxi-mum amplitude from the 3/4T hole indication after the beam has bounced from the opposite surface. The indication should appear near sweep line 10. Mark the peak-on the. screen for the 5/4T~ position. (f) Connect the screen marks for the side-drilled holes to provide the distance amplitude curve. This is the primary reference level. 6.4. 2. 2 Calibration from the Unclad Side { } (a) From the clad side of the block, determine the dB change in ampli-tude between the 3/4T and 5/4T positions. 1 (b) From the unclad side, perform calibrations as noted in 6.4.2.1 (a) through (d). (c) To determine the amplitude for the 5/4T hole, position the search unit for maximum amplitude from the 3/4T hole. Decrease the sig-nal amplitude by the number of dB determined in (a). Mark the height of this signal amplitude at sweep line 10 (5/4T). l (d) Connect the screen marks to pro-vide the distance-amplitude curve. This is the primary re-l I ference level. This will permit evaluation of indications down
\
l Prce.No TsT 28 Rev 2 I EIJe "tT*rstma i Corporation of R@mont Date: 1/1/81 Page 9 of.n__. I I to the clad surface (near sweep line 8). 6.4.3 When it is necessary to examine materials such as carbon steel clad to centrifugally cast stainless steel safe ends on pipe diameters which will not permit calibration of the 3/4T and 5/4T holes due to the curvature of the I.D. surface. The following calibration with a 45' refracted longitudinal wave shall be used from l the carbon steel side and the centrifically cast stainless steel side. i 6.4.3.1 Adjust the sweep positions in accord-ance with paragraph 6.4.1.1 through 6.4.1.4 uhen the I.D. notch can-be resolved. 6.4.3.2 Distance amplitude correction 6.4.3.2.1 Calibration from the carbon I 1 steel side b-l (a) Position the search l l unit for the maximum l response from the hole I which gives the high- j est amplitude. (b) Adjust the sensitivity l control to provide an ! 80% FSH response from l l the side drilled hole. Mark the peak of the , indication on the screen. (c) Position the search l unit for the maximum response from the re-
~
maining holes. l
---a- - - - - - - - - - - _m ---- -------_
. . . Proc. No. TsT 28 Rev. - 2 EIje TTirginia Corporation .
l } of Richmonb Date: 1/1/a1 Page 12of 31 4 (d) Mark the peak of these indications on the screen and extrapolate the DAC curve iT on' each end to provide a smooth DAC curve. This shall be the primary reference level. (e) The sensitivity shall then be established from the I.D. notch by setting the signal re-sponse amplitude from the I.D. notch dt the 2 level of the DAC curve. { l 6.4.3.3 When the I.D. notch cannot be resolved, adjust the sweep positions in accord-i ance with paragraph 6.4.1.1 through 6.4.1.3. 6.4.3.4 Distance amplitude correction (a) Position the search unit for the maximum response from the hole that gives the highest amplitude. (b) Adjust the sensitivity control to l provide an 80% FSH response from the side drilled hole. Mark the peak amplitude of the' indication on the screen. (c) Position the search unit for the maximum response from the remain-ing holes and mark their peak amplitude oositions on the screen and extrapolate iT on each end to produce a smnoth DAC curve. This
II)2 Virgiftia Corporatioli ~ Of 3$idhutBnb ()QiG 3/1/83 PGg6 11 Of 31 } shall be the primary reference level and sensitivity level. For calibrations on the austenitic side, the calibrations shall be 'in accordance with 6.4.3.1 through 6.4.3.4 for whichever situation applies. 6.4.4 For dissimilar metal welds less than 2" nominal wall 2 thickness that fall into Appendix III Examination Criteria, the calibration block will have an I.D. notch on the clad side that vill not penetrate the carbon steel-clad interface. 6.4.4.1 When the I.D. notch does not penetrate the carbon steel-clad interface, use the same calibration technique as paragraph 6.4.3.4 (a) through (c) . 6.5 Angle Beam Calibration for Examination from the Austenitic Side 6.5.1 Ar. -le Beam Calibration for Node Examination 6.5.1.1 The response f rom the kT and 3/4T side-drilled holes shall be used to establish
- the slope and the shape of the DAC curve in the following manner.
1 (a) Position the search unit for the maximum response from the kT hole. Using the sweep delay control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the kT hole is positioned at 2.0 on the graticule. (b) Position the search unit for the l maximum response from the 3/4T
Proc. No. TSI 2.8 Rev; 2 EIJe Virgtnta Corporation g Of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page12 of 31 hole. Using the sweep range con-trol, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the 3/4T hole is. positioned at 6.0'on the graticule. (c) Repeat steps 6.3.1.1 and 6.3.1.2 until no further adjustment is necessary. (d) Position the search unit for the maximum response from the hole giving the highest signal ampli-tude. Adjust the sensitivity control to 80% of full screen height (FSH). Mark the peak of the indication on the screen. q g (e) Position the search unit for the maximum response from the remain-ing hole (s). Without changing the sensitivity control, mark the peak of the indication (s) on the screen. (f) Connect the screen marks and extrapolate through the thickness (tT on each end) to provide a smooth DAC curve. This shall be the primary reference level. (g) The sensitivity shall then be established from the I.D. surface notch by setting the signal re-sponse amplitude from the I.D. notch at the level of the DAC curve. 6.5.2 Angle Beam Calibration for Full Node Examination l I 6.5.2.1 The response from the I.D. and 0.D. notches shall be used to establish
Prec.No' Tsi 2.8 Rev 2 EIJe Virstma Corporation of Rit$mont Date: ,/1/91 Page.L:Lof 31 4 g the slope, shape, and sensitivity of the DAC curve in the following manner. (a) Position the search unit for the maximum response from the I.D.' notch. Using the sweep delay con - trol, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the I.D. notch is positioned at 4.0 on the graticule. (b) Position the search unit for. the maximum response from the 0.D. notch. Using the sweep range con-trol, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of th'e re-sponse from the 0.D. notch is positioned at 8.0 on the grati-cule. (c) Repeat steps 6.4.1.1 and 6.4.1.2 until no further adjustment is necessary. (d) Position the search unit for the maximum response from the I.D. notch. Adjust the sensitivity control to 80% of FSH. Mark the peak of the indication on the screen. (e) Position the search unit for the maximum response from the O.D. notch. Without changin8 the sensitivity control, mark the peak l of the indication on the screen. (f) Connect the screen marks and ex-
, trapolate the DAC at either end for a distance of iT. This shall 1
l ? _ L
Proc No ist 2.s gay 2 Efje Virgtnta Corporation i l of Richmont Date: 3/1/83 Pagel.4_of 31 4 be the primary reference level. 6.5.3 Angle Beam Calibration of li Node Examination 6.5.3.1 The response from the I.D. & 0.D. notches shall be used to establish the slope, shape, & sensitivity of the DAC curve in the following manner. (a) Position the search unit for the maximum response from the I.D. , notch. Using the sweep. delay con-trol, adjust the sweep posit-ton so that the leading edge of the response from the I.D. notch is positioned at 3.0 on the Braticule. (b) Position the search unit fo'r the maximum response from the 0.D. l I notch. Using the sweep range control, adjust the sweep position so that the leading edge of the response from the 0.D. notch is positioned at 6.0 on the grati-cule. (c) Repeat steps 6.5.1.1 and 6.5.1.2 until no further adjustment is necessary. (d) Position the search unit for the maximum response from the I.D. notch (li node). Check that the leading edge is at approximately 9.0 on the graticule. (e) Position the search unit for the maximum response from the I.D. notch (i node). Adjust the sen-l } sitivity control to 80% FSH. r- --~ . w --, e , , -_w-~,--,,--,,,m_,m- , , , , _ m _, -,,_,,,__,,,-w- - - , - - - - - - - . _ - . _ , . - - ,
EIJe Virginia Corporation "' "~ "' ' ' Of 3&itbD10Rb Date* 3/1/83 Page 15 Of 31 t Mark the peak of the indication on the screen. (f) Position the search unit for the' maximum response f rom the 0.D. notch (1 node) . Without changing the sensitivity control, mark the peak of the indication on the screen. (g) Position the search unit for the maximum
, response from the I.D. notch (1 node).
Without changing the sensitivity control, mark the peak of the indication on the screen. (h) Connect the screen marks and extrapolate 3 the DAC at either end for a distance of
, hT . This shall be the primary reference level.
6.5.4 Other sweep positions may be used when calibrating to paragraph 6.5.1 3 6.5.2. or 6.5.3 when it is necessary g to obtain a broader sweep range for piping systems with
~
varying thicknesses. 6.6 When using the straight beam or angle beam techniques, varf eAles such as veld preparation, weld crown width, or physical interference may be encountered. These variables may be eliminated by one or mere of the following. 6.6.1 Reducing the diaension of the wedge edge-to-edge beam
. entry point.
i 6.6.2 Reducing search unit size 6.6.3 Increasing beam angle 6.6.4 Increasing the retal path by at least an additional node. 6.6.5 Additional surface preparation 6.7 Calibration Verification 6.7.1 A system calibration check, which is the verification of the instrument sensitivity and
- l l aem - y edW eepuS Wu. m e a estipe .e.6 e p 44+ e =w e - - - - - ---epw- - , . -y ,9.-ww,, y wy e ,-y vw-----
e Proc. No' TsT 28 Rev 2 EIje TTi rstma Corporation q p of W4mont Date: m /6 Page Lfi.of 31 sweep range calibration, shall be performed at the beginning of each day of examinations and at the end of each examination category, or every four hours, whichever is less, and - with any change in examination personnel. 6.7.2 A decrease in sensitivity of 20% or 2 dB shall require recalibration and re-examina-tion of all items examined since the previous acceptable calibration check. All data taken si nc e the last calibration check shall be marked void. 6.7.3 An increase in sensitivity of 20% or 2dB shall require recalibration, re-examination, and data correction of all indications rea ported since the previous acceptable cali- { } bration or check. 6.7.4 If any point on the DAC curve has moved on the sweep line more than 10% of the sweep division reading, correct the sweep range calibration and note the correction in the examination record. If recordable reflectors are noted on the data sheets, those data sheets shall be voided, a new calibration shall be recorded, I and the voided examination areas shall be re-examined. 7.0 Examination 7.1 Straight Beam Examination for Base Metal 7.1.1 Prior to performing angle beam examinations, I the base material through which the angle beam will pass (reference Figures 4, 5 and 6) shall be completely scanned with a straight beam search unit to detect laminar reflectors which l I l
w
- - - Prce.Nr. 1st 2.8 Rey 2 Efje "17ttstnia Corporation of Risbmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 17 of 31 I l might affect the interpretation of the results of the angle beam examination.
7.1.2 The sensitivity of the instrument shall be , adjusted at the location free of-indications so that the initial back reflection from the far side of the plate will be 80 percent of full screen height. 7.1.3 Areas containing laminar indications that may affect angle beam examinations shall be noted. All areas giving indications equal to or greater than the remaining back re-flection shall be recorded on the data sheet. Also, record all areas where one or more dis-continuities produce continuous loss of back reflection accompanied by continuous indica-tions in the same plane.
~
7.1.4 Alternatively, the base metal examination may be conducted concurrently and at the same calibration as described in paragraph 6.2, trovided that the scan sensitivity (2 x reference) is at least as sensitive as that required in paragraph 7.1.2. 7.2 Straight Beam Examination for Weld Me'tal and HAZ 7.2.1 If the angle beam examination is restricted to a f ull node or li node examination from the austenitic side of the weld, a calibrated straight beam examination shall be performed, providing the weld crown is flat enough to make satisfactory transducer contact.
Proc.No. Ist 2.8 g, ff lH 0porMig 00f6'. 3/1/83 Page 13.of,tt,_ 7.2.2 The area to be examined shall be the weld metal and the adjacent base materia:z un the restricted side of the weld to the exten. allowed by the geometric configuration (see Figure 7 ). Scans shall overlap l at least ten percent. l 7.2.3 Calibration shall be as indicated in paragraph 6.3. l l 7.3 Angle Beam-Reflectors Parallel to the Weld 7.3.1 The primary scan for reflectors parallel to the-weld shall be node from both sides cf the weld. 7.3.2 Full node or 1 node shall only be used when it is impossible to examine the required material with a node examination for the austenitic side of the weld only. A full or lh node ex4mination shall never be performed on the carbon clad side. 7.3.3 The area of interest shall be the weld and HAZ, { } and the required amount of base metal on each side of the weld (reference Figures 4, 5 and 6) . 7.3.4 The scan pattern shall start at one edge of the area to be examined with the ultrasonic search unit transmitting an angle beam perpendicular to the weld axis. The search unit shall be moved towards and away from the weld such that the calibrated beam passen, through the whole area of the weld and base metal to be examined. Concurrent with this scan, the search unit shall be swiveled 15' right and 15' lef t and progressively indexed along the length of the weld such that the whole scan pattern follows a "saw-tooth" pattern. The " pitch" of the "saw-tooth" shall be such that on each pass the ultrasonic beam covers at least 10 percent of the l I
r f 1 Prce. N2. Ist 2.8 Rev 2 Efje E,rstuta Corporation Of Risbad Date' 3/1/83 Page 19 of 31 g area covered by the previous adjacent pass. The veld and required amount of adjacent base metal is to be fully examined by this procedure. The examination shall be accomplished from.both sides of the weld. For velds where scanning access is not available from both sides, the L.P& L. PSI coordinator will be notified. 7.3.5 Calibration for node from the clad ferritic side shall be accomplished according to paragraph 6.4. 7.3.6 Calibration for h node, full node, or 1 node examination from the austenitic side shall be accomplished according to paragraph 6.5 7.4 Angle Beam-Reflector Transverse to the Weld 7.4.1 The angle beam examination for reflectors transverse to the weld shall be performed on the weld crown and adjacent base material as necessary to examine the weld root by node in two directions along the weld. When the weld crown configuration prohibits a node examination, a full node examination shall be performed with the search unit adjacent to the crown for the austenitic side only, and highlighted on the report. A full node examination shall never be performed on the carbon clad side. 7.4.2 The search unit shall be placed on one edge of the inspection area directing the angle beam into the material parallel to the weld axis. From this position, the search unit shall be moved parallel to the weld and indexed toward the opposite side of the weld such that the next scan will cover at least 10 percent of the area covered by the previous adjacent scan. Parallel scans shall be repeated in this manner until the opposite side of the wald and base metal
- - . Proc.No. IS1 2.8 q,y_ 7 Efje Virgtnta Corporation I of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page_29.of 31 is reached and examined. Alternately, the search unit may be swiveled 15' right and 15' left and ,
progressively indexed along the length of the veld such that the whole scan pattern follows a "saw-tooth" pattern. The " pitch" of the "saw-tooth" shall be such that on each pass the ultrasonic beam covers at least 10 percent of the area covered by the previous adjacent pass. 7.4.3 The veld and the required amount of adjacent base metal is to be fully examined by one of the techniques described in paragraph 7.4.2. 7.4.4 Calibration for node from the clad ferritic side shall be accomplished according to paragraph 6.4. { } 7.4.5 Calibration for h node, full node, or Ib node examination from the austenitic side shall be accomplished according to paragraph 6.5. 7.5 Extent of Examination 7.5.1 The volume subject to examination and extent l of scan length shall be in accordance with Figures 4, 5, and 6. 7.6 Examinations utilizing more than one DAC curve shall be examined once at the higher sensitivity, and evaluated at the applicable sensitivity. 7.7 Rate of search unit movement shall not exceed 6" per second. l 7.8 Scanning sensitivity shall be at least twice (+6 dB) the calibration or reference sensitivity. l 8.0 Evaluation and Recording of Straight Beam Examination for Laminar Reflectors 8.1 All areas giving indications equal to, or greater than, the back reflection shall be recorded. I
. , , Prce.N _ 1st 2.8 q,y 7 EIje "t7ttgtttta Corporatiott Of E t$m0Rb DGier* 3/1/83 PGge 21 of31 0
8.2 All areas where one or more discontinuities produce a continuous total loss of back reflection accompanied by continuous indications in the same plane shall be recorded. 8.3 The following data shall be recorded for laminar reflectors: . 8.3.1 Sweep reading of laminar reflectors from the surface. 8.3.2 Position from the reference marking. 8.3.3 Location parallel to the reference marking for each ! search unit position, giving the recordable extent of the indication as the. laminar area is scanned on parallel scan paths. 8.4 Where laminar reflectors interfere with the scanning of examination volumes for planar reflectors, the angle beam l l examination technique shall be mddified to examine the maximum f easible volume, within the specified examination volume, l and the description of the volume excluded by the lamination shall be noted on the data sheet. 9.0 Evaluation and Recording of Straight Beam and Angle Beam Indications in the Weld and Heat Affected Zone. 9.1 All indications 20% of the primary reference DAC or greater shall be investigated to determine the shape, identity, location, and type of indication. Additionally, all indications, regardless of amplitude, which the examiner L judges to be potentially indicative of a crack or lack of fusion shall be investigated to determine the shape, identity, location, and type of indication. 9.1.1 Any indication categorized as a flaw shall be recorded and reported in accordance with the requirements of reference 2.3. 9.1.2 Any indication resulting from the metallurgical structure within the material shall be considered when assessing the effectiveness of the examination. Restrictions or variations to the examination due 0
1s1 2.8 Proc.No. Flev 2 1Efje "tTirgtnta Corporation 4
, of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page.ZLof 31 4
to the metallurgical structure shall be reported. Additional search unit angles may be used during evaluation as an aid in interpretation. 9.1.3 Clad interface and back wall reflections need not be recorded. 9.1.4 Geometric indications that are equal to, or greater than, 50% of the primary reference DAC shall be acknowledged by recording their length and location. 9.2 Any indication which is equal to, or greater than, 50% of the primary reference DAC shall be evaluated to the extent necessary to determine the size, shape, identity and location , of the reflector. Indications shall be recorded in accordance with paragraph 9.3, and reported in accordance with the ' requirements of reference 2.3. 9.3 Data required when indications are equal to, or greater than, l } 50% of DAC: 9.3.1 All search unit position and location dimensions shall be recorded to the nearest tenth of an inch. 9.3.2 Maximum percent of DAC, sweep reading of indication, search unit position, location along the length of the weld, and beam direction. 9.3.3 Through-Wall Dimension: 9.3.3.1 For reflectors 50 to 100% DAC, the minimum and maximum sweep readings and their position and location along the length of the reflector for 50% DAC when approaching and moving away from the reflector's maximum signal direction. l I w - - - - - - - . --=y y -.---.--w--.--w,-.-.,y _-._-.w.- . . - - , . - - , - - - , - - - - , - _ _ _ ,-
, , , Prec.blo. 1st 2.8 ptey 2 Efje Virgtnta Corporation of Ec$mont Date: ~3 /1/83 Page 23 of 31 9.3.3.2 For reflectors exceeding 100% DAC',
minimum and maximum sweep readings and their position and location along
~
the length of the reflector for 50% of the maximum amplitude when approaching and moving away from , the reflector's maximum signal direction. 9.3.4 Length Dimension 9.3.4.1 The length of the reflector shall be obtained by recording the position and location along the length of weld as detarmined by 50% of DAC for eact end of the reflector. 9.4 Welds that did not receive a complete examination according to paragraph 7.0 shall have the partial examination noted on the data sheet as follows: 9.4.1 The extent of the examination performed shall be noted. 9.4.2 If the volumetric examination was performed from one side of the weld only, it shall be noti 1 l and an entry made indicating what steps were taken to ensure that the. required area on the far side of the veld was examined. 9.4.3 The reason (s) that a specific examination was impractical shall be noted. For example, support or component restricts access, fitting prevents l adequate ultrasonic coupling on one side, component-to-component veld prevents ultrasonic examination, etc. 9.5 Investigation and reporting of indications shall be performe'd at the reference sensitivity. l I 1 I
Proc.No' Ist 2.8 q,y 2 Efje "t7trginia Corporation l l of Rittment Date: 3/1/83 Page 24 of 31 10.0 Documentation of Examination 9.1 All data relative to the examinations and reportable indications shall be reported in accordance with reference 2.3, and on forms similar to those shown in Figures 8, 9, and 10. 1 l l l h
Proc.No. m 2 a Rev.2 Eije Virstma Corporation RM Date: 3/1/83 Page.15.of 31 g Figure 1 TRANSDUCER AND SEARCH UNIT SELECTION Angle Beam ExaminationA Nominal Transducer Material Maximum Nominal Nominal Thickness Size Frequency Angle
.250" to .400" 1/4" dia. or 1/4" x 1/4" 2.25 MHz 45"
.400" to 1.000" 1/2" dia. or 1/2" x 1/2" 2.25 MHZ 45' l.000" to 1.200" 3/4" dia. or 3/4" x 3/4" 2.25 MHZ 45*
1.200" and greater 1" dia. or 1" x 1" 2.25 MHZ 45*- Straight Beam Examination * , Nominal Pipe Transducer Diameter Maximum Size Nominal Frequency less than 12" dia. 1/2" dia. or 1/2" x 1/2" 2.25 MHZ 12" dia. and greater 1" dia. or 1" x 1" 2.25 MHZ
- Note: Other transducers may be used where weld geometry or metallurgical characteristics impede effective use of the above listed angles, frequencies, or sizes.
O . /
, , , Proc. No. Is1 2.8 q,y ,
E e Virgtnta Corporation Of AI4Riottb Date' 3 /1/83 Papa U_ofL J i . I , d E-l -
! , cl/4"TYR
~ ' .075" IN DEPTH . ,,
l lD8OD i 1/2" TYR I i L I"'TYR I 4 f n l r e t l e I
, _ _ _ _ _ _ - ei i I
l l
' {i :e 2
I :- - { _ __ 2 :
' O !S ::-- -br l W D l l :
mT , 3 .
, ! LN b' i i -l/2" U i 11/2" !
I i 1 5 1 I '
\.050"IN k DEPTH l l 10 &OD ,rx , , T h. ,
1 ! , SCRIBE LINE ON THIS SURFACE (TYP)
. d._
5/8
> /
\ e, f s ,,
T+ s\ z, s' ,~' , sh i ,, O 9 e' ' ,'s s's
s b
, ,, s's yee s -
7/32,, 17/3 2" + $4 #. 3 s, C+ s% ) 27/32" p i . .
" ILLUSTRATIVE ONLY" lOq
)
Calibration Blocks Ficure ?
~
~ l l Ist 2.8
. , , Proc.No. Rey 2 i tElje "tTirstnia Corporation of R4 mod Date* 3/1'/83 Page 27 of 31 i
. I VIEW "A-A" .
l 15'(TYP.) , i
//
- iP l-5/64"11/16"
/ \ l I/2 T HOLE
'l/4"t 1/16" -
VIEW "B-B" if4" uin, I I 1/4 T HOLE
/? ,r,r
/ ,
~
5/IS" THIS HOLE TANGENT 3/4 T HO.E[ ' TO WELD (WELD VI EW '" C -C" 125" DI A. HOLES y 7/16' l \ ,
. ". ILLUSTRATIVE
... ONLY" la T HOLE I l Calibration Blocks Figure 3
Proc.No. Ist 2.s Rey 2 Efje "t7ttgtuta Corporation { } of Richmont Date: 3/1/83 Page21.ofH _ Angle Beam Scan - Typical Each Side q T y T i Area Subject to Examination
, m, k I For angle beam scan length as shown above, add the following from each side of the weld fusion line.
Material Minimum Scan Minimum Sean Thickness Length 45' Length 60*
.200" to .400" 1.00" 1.75"
! .400" to 1.000" 2.25" 4.00" 1 1.000" to 1. 200" 2.75" 4.75" l 1.200" to 1.500" 3.25" 5.75" 1.500" and Greater 1.2 x 2T ' 1.9 x 2T Straight beam scan length shall be in accordance with the above, as determined by the beam angle being used. l I 11alf Node Examination Figure 4 _o /
Proc. No. 1st 2.8 q,y 2 1EIje Virgtnta Corporation of Rkbmont Date: 3/1/83 Page29 of31 q ; Angle Beam Scan Length , T , m, , , T z I 4 s
\ ,/ T
\ - ~ / -
Area Subject to Examination , Angle beam scan length as shown above, shall be as follows: Material Minimum Scan Minimum Scan Thickness Length 45' Length 60*
.200 to .400 1.25" 1.75"
.400 to 1.000 3.00" 5.75" 1.000 to 1.200' 4.00" 7.00" 1.200 to 1.500 5.00" 8.75" 1.500 and Greater 1.1 x 3T 1.9 x 3T Straight beam scan length shall be in accordance with the above, as determined by the beam angle being used.
Full Node Examination Figure 5
Proc. No. 151 2. 8 gey, 2 Elje Virgtnta Corporation { l of R @ mont Date: 3/5/83 Page 30 of 31 Angle Beam Scan Length T 4 T l s i , */ / r
\ - ~ / .
Area Subject to Ex2mination l l l [ ! Angle beam scan length as shown above, shall be as follows: Material Minimum Scan Minimum Scan Thickness Length 45' Length 60*
.200 to .400 1.75" 2.50"
.400 to 1.000 4.00" 6.50" 1.000 to 1.200' 5.25" 9.25" 1.200 to 1.500 6.50" 10.00" 1.500 and Greater 1.1 x 4T 1.9 x 4T Straight beam scan length shall be in accordance with the above, as l determined by the beam angle used.
l l Node and Examination Figure 6 l l L*
Proc.No. Ist 2.8 Rev 2 EIje Virginia Corporation
- OfRI4m0Rb Dol 8 3/1/83 pagg 31 of31-
+Am
/ .
>.\
3D E. P. N { j g :: '!!III I 7 - f ( U r . A The beam path shall be increased by at least one-half vee if dimension "A" is greater than: 0.93 T for = 43' to 45* 1.6 ~ for - 58' to 60* 2.5 T for = 68* to 70* I l 4 Figure 7 i O
1 Figure 8 Ultrasonic Excminaticn R:ptrt 1 s
) Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Iso /Drawiag No.,
1 Th h /( 1 \/ Vi.rginia Corp. erocedure exam Surrace exa.iner/tevel vCa Supervisor Date Y *t ah
%M Component / Piping System Pipe Size Weld Type Cal. Block # Couplant:
h Type Batch No. i, Continuation Sheet Attached _ ,
.rran=diirar_ n' 45' 60* T n = r ri .,'n e ;
Yes No' M S/N Mfer. Mndal l Field Changes: , Size S/N ReoRate Yeo No j:[::.j: Freenentv Reiect Filter If Yes. Ntmber Hamm Ane' a _ D mn' Coax Calibration 0* 2&5 Scan 7&8 Sean Frea. Vfden Calibrction S und Entry Sound Entry Ca ibration Checks Point To: Point To: 0* 45* 60* l R:flector Signal Signal S 1 In out ' Location Amp. Sweep Amp. Sweep Scribe 50% . Sweep Scribc 50g In out In out Line DAC(\ Line DAC l / N \\M
- A G .\h\/
i ^\ . \1 / \/ I ^ \? WN
\ t \\ V \\ V i / 3\ \\ \\ W
\ N %y
%1V W) - '
Raf. dB 10 DAC 10 " DAC 10 DAC Additional Comments / Sketch I8 - 8 . g . ]6 i
. 6 . 6 4 . 4 .
4 . , 2 - 2 - 2 i
;O -
0 - e -
! 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 l l Fcrm UT-lOI 2/82 ,
i
Figure 9 Ultrasonic Examination Report - Continuation Sheet Page of
/ Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Iso / Drawing No.
Q } w \M fyginia Corp. Examiner / Level care g \/y of anchenood Procedure Exam surface vCa supervisor
% ,sf Component / Piping System Pipe Size Weld Type Cal. Block Couplant: Type & Batch i Base Surface Condition Wald i:!;2[ Metal Sean Direction -
Base Examination Results No. gg.. Scan 2 5 7&8 0 Inspection Limitations Metal Weld UT Visual Remarks f) (\ \ b _ A\'\ \ > m r \\ \) )\ \ _\ 9 e \ \\ \ \\ /" \ T
,1 \\ \ \\ \\ \
/M \ \\ \\ \\ \V
(N \" \V"
> U" V '
f O - (~') . V V
}p%\
Figure 10 Ultrasonic Examination Report Indication Record . g, Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone g \/ Vg,ia Corp. , erocedure examiner /Levet vca Supervisor Date t
\NM[ Component / Piping System ISO Drawing No.
Cal. Standard No./ Thickness 1 Indication Minimum Depth Maximum Depth Base Metal Base Metal Wald Ind Max.% Length S.U. Sweep S.U. Sweep Beam Beam Thickness Weld Thickness
! No. No. DAC From To Pos. Reading Pos. Reading Angle Dir. 2 Side rhick. 5 Side Remarkt 4
1 1 4 1 I t
,-m
- med\\ F
! - m F\ \\ G )\ \ \ 7 j / d '
< \\ s' < \\ 'J\\ < L,
! \ T \ \\ % \ \\ \ \nu ! hT ' \\ \\ UU ^ l &) - rw-I i l l I i l I i Form IIT lO? 2/82
#m\ m r p (804) 266 8741 O - Qif Virginia Corp.
,4 P. O. Box 9474 5809 Lakeside Ave.
O Richmond, Virginia 23228 L Procedure
Title:
Liquid Penetrant Examination Using the Color-Contrast Solvent Removable Technique EUASCO SERVICES liiCORPCRATED v.-s
.RUR.UICE Procedure No.: Is1 3.1 E"C "rE".mo
-- r-en.x ve:u.::ei; is
[aa.=e w.m,,,e c .. a Plant Site: Waterford #3 O *~,...* in. *n,ce='
. , , , ,'.a
, , ,.', a.i.e-me *a.e. e .=2 .a ,,
O _"'" *'a
- NOTE:
Curtoner: W .: m, en ..m ., m. Louisiana Power & Light a.i a==:.ei.ine- w-w <= w Ebasco Services, Inc. - Agent ,"""**"""'""d'"'*'
- mi,= = r,.. ,,. ,,,,,
.,u ,,,
Approved for Use "'**"
,",4 Z',",*,; ,,, qj
, Virginia. Corporations - -- 4 4, _ , _ m-1,iw 'a ' 7tm Is n. r.#, o,s rn. a.,.:.:. .'f . :..... l Approved for Use oT;.7. @INf DATE:. /. l. . s$~3 Customer: Rev. O Date: 1/8/82 Rev. Dates t -a Prepared by: _ 'Ik - 6 W - - - Prepared by: Reviewed by: 7b-- d! Ar = Ls/ "" Reviewed by: Reviewed by:M# ((M _ Reviewed by: Customer: Rev. 1 Date 3/1/83 Rev. Dater Prepared by: Ak '. O Prepared by: V Reviewed by b% 6 M - - AIK Reviewed by: Reviewed byL8+=# // M Reviewed by: Customers k %.N @ Customers d' 4/mN 3
- evie Rev. Date Rev. , Date:
Prepared by: Prepared by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Customer Customer
, = ~ ::_=: u.-_LL.- _. --. . . . - - . , - - - - - - - - - _ . - -
, , , Proc.No._ ISI 3.1 q,y_ 1 tEfje TTirgtnta Corporation Of Mithmottb Date.' 3/1/83 Page 1 of 20 l.0 Scope 1.1 This procedure describes the requirements for the p.erformance o2 color contrast solvent removable liquid penetrant examination of ferrous and nonferrous materials for defects open to the surf ace.
This procedure is in compliance with ASME Code Section XI and the requirements of ASME Section V, Article 6. 2.0 References 2.1 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section XI,1977 edition with addenda through Summer,1978. 2.2 ASME Section V, Article 6,1977 edition with addenda through Summer, 1978. 2.3 The Virginia Corporation of Richmond procedure NDE-4.1, Rev. 3. dated 3/6/81, Written Practice for the Qualification and Certi-fication of NDE Personnel. 2.4 l I The Virginia Corporation procedure ISI-2.1, Rev. O. Preservice Inspection Documentation. 3.0 Personnel Requirements 3.1 Personnel performing examinations to this procedure shall be qualified and certified to at least Level II in accordance with reference 2.3. Level I and/or Level 1 trainees (Level 1-LTD) may be employed as assistants. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-LTD) shall not independently evaluate or accept the results of a liquid penetrant examination. 4.0 Equipment and Materialu 4.1 All penetrant materials shall be supplied with batch number and certification attesting to the residual amounts of sulfur and halogen. Penetrant materials shall be analyzed for halogen con-tent according to ASTM D-808 and the residual halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Penetrant materials shall also be analyzed for sulfur content according to ASTM D-129 and the residual { }
, , , Proc. No. mu Rey,1 tEfje TTirgtnta Corporation Of RIthm0rth Date: 3/1/83 Page 2 o' 20 sulfur shall not exceed 1% by weight. The VCR Site Job Supervisor shall document acceptance of materials received in .accordance with this section.
4.2 All penetrant materials used to perform the examination shall be from the same family groupings. Interm'xing of penetrant mater-ials from different family groups is nu. armitted. This includes cleaner / remover, penetrant and developer. 4.3 The.following penetrant materials are approved for use with this procedure. Approved equivalents may be used if they meet the requirements of paragraph 4.1; however, the procedure must be re-qualified. Sherwin Incorporated Remover / Cleaner Dubl Check Type DR-60 1 C t Penetrant Dubl Check Type DP-51 U Developer Dubl Check Type D-100 Materials by different manufacturers shall not be used concurrently for the examination of a particular item. 4.4 Clean lint-free, dry cloths or absorbent paper shall be used during the performance of the examination. 5.0 General Requirements 5.1 Lighting at the work area during all steps of examination per paragraph 6.0 Examination shall be suf ficient to resolve a 1/32 inch wide (maximum) black line on an 18% neutral gray background placed on or near the surface to be examined. Flashlights and/or extension lights may be used to achieve sufficient lighting. 5.2 Surface preparation 5.2.1 The surface area to be examined and adjacent area for at least one (1) inch shall be dry and free from all oil, grease, scale, lint, slag, welding flux, weld spatter, dirt, pa in t , or other extraneous matter that would
) obscure openings or otherwise interfere with the exami-nation. If such conditions are detected, they will be rectified prior to conducting the examination.
, , , Proc.No. m ti Rev= 1 Elje Virgtma Corporation of3&fcbenonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 3 of 20 4 g 5.2.2 As-welded surfaces, following the removal of slag, shall be considered suitable for dye penetrant examination without grinding if this does not interfere with interpretation of the test results, and, if the weld contour blends into the base metal.
5.2.3 Power wire brushing is permitted for removal of extraneous materials, at the discretion of the PSI Construction Coordinator. 5.3 Examination Area 5.3.1 The examination area shall be the weld surface and adjacent base metal on each side of the weld edge, as required by Figures 1 through 13. 5.3.2 The specific welds or other areas to be examined shall be as defined in the preservice inspection plan. I l 5.4 The temperature of the part to be examined shall not be below 40*F nor above 125'F. Temperatures outside of this range will require an additional procedure qualified to the requirements of reference 2.2 5.5 Associated eouipment used to perform liquid penetrant examinations, that contain mercary or mercury compounds, shall not ha used. 5.6 Safety 5.6.1 Some penetrant materials are highly flammable and therefore shall not be heated nor used near any open flame. 5.6.2 Penetrant materials that are flammable shall not be used in open containers. Safety type cans shall be used. 5.6.3 Adequate ventilation shall be maintained during the use of all penetrant materials, especially in confined areas. q g
Isl 3.1 q,y 1
, , , Proc. No.
m Efje "t7ttstuta Corporation 4 20 f of Richmod Date: 3/1/83 Page of v 6.0 Examination 6.1 Pre-cleaning - The area to be examined shall be thoroughly cleaned using the remover / cleaner of the family type listed in paragraph 4.3. 6.1.1 Allow a minimum of ten minutes for excess cleaner / remover to evaporate before proceeding with the , examination. 6.2 Penetrant application , 6.2.1 Penetrant shall be applied by spraying or brushing only. If the surface is too large for complete examination in the prescribed time, the surface shall be examined in suitable increments with suf ficient overlap to assure , complete coverage of the surfaces being examined. 6.3 Penetrant dwell time
/'~5 6.3.1 Penetration, or dwell time, is critical. The complete \- / examination surface shall be kept wet by the addition of penetrant, as necessary, to ensure that no drying oc-curs during the entire dwell time. Whenever possible, the penetrant shall be applied to the examination area plus an adaitional one (1) inch on each side. If drying of any portion of the examination surface occurs during the dwell time, the part shall be thoroughly re-cleaned and re-tested.
For temperstures of the surface under exami-
~
6.3.1.1 nationE 40'F and 460'F, the dwell time shall be a minimum of 30 minutes and a maximum of 75 minutes. 6.3.1.2 For temperatures of the surface under exami-nation h60*F up to 125'F the dwell time shall be a minimum of 15 minutos and a maximum of 60 minutes.
.3
)
v/ l
, , , Proc. No. Ist 3.1 Rev. 1 tlEfje TTttginta Corporation of Ekhmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 5 of._20 { j 6.4 Excess penetrant removal 6.4.1 As much excess penetrant as possible shall be removed by wiping the surface thoroughly with a clean lint-free dry-cloth or absorbent paper.
6.4.2 Remaining excets penetrant shall be removed by wiping the surface with a clean lint-f ree cloth or absorben't paper lightly dampened with a penetrant remover / cleaner (Ref. par. 4.2 and 4.3. 6,4.3 Flushing of the surface with any liquid following appli-cation of the penetrant, and prior to development. is prohibited. 6.5 Surface drying 6.5.1 Drying of examination surfaces af ter removal of excess penetrant shall be accomplished only by normal evapora-tion. Forced air circulation in excess of normal venti- { } lation in the examination area shall not be used. 6.5.2 Drying time, for surface drying after removal of excess penetrant, and prior to developer application shall be a minimum of five minutes and a maximum of ten minutes. 6.6 Developar application 6.6.1 Prior to developer application, the developing liquid shall be agitated to assure that the solids are in liquid suspension prior to its application, and shall be applied by spraying. 6.6.2 Developer shall be applied so as to produce a thin, uniform coating over the entire examination area. Insufficient coating may not be adequate to draw the penetrant out of discontinuities. Conversely, exces-sive coating of developer may result in pooling and may mask indications, requiring the item being examined to be re-cleaned and re-tested. l I
- - - Proc. lNo' TsT 3a Rev 1 EIJe "t7ttstma Corporation
( ) of 3Mcbuzab Date: 3/i/a3 Page 6 of 20 4 6.6.3 Developing time shall be a minimum of seven minutes and not longer than thirty minutes. The surface should be observed during the application of the developer and during the developing time, in order to detect the nature of certain indications which might tend to bleed out excessively. 7.0 Evaluation and Recording of Indications 7.1 Mechanical discontinuities at the surface will be indicated by bleeding out of the penetrant. However, localized surface imperfactions, such as may occur from machining marks or surface conditions, may produce similar indications which are non-relevant, 7.2 Any reportable indication which is believed to be non-l q relevant shall be regarded as a discontinuity and shall be re-examined to verify whether or not actual discontinuities are present. Additional surface conditioning may be re-quired. 7.3 Relevant indications are those which result from mechanical discontinuities. 7.4 The examiner shall investigate and evaluate all relevant indications in terms of the reporting requirements of paragraph 7.5. Followin8 investigation, the examined area shall either be wiped clean of developer or, as a minimum, the recordable indication area (if any) may be left as is for subsequent review by customer or regulatory agency personnel subject to the time limitations of para-graph 6.6.3. 7.5 Reportable Indications 7.5.1 The indications in the table below, occurring in the examination area, are considered relevant and are to be recorded and reported to the customer or his l I agent within 24 hours.
, , , Proc.rdo. Is13.1 q ,y__ 1 1Efje TTirgtnta Corporation of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 7 of 20 Nominal Wall Reportabie Description Thickness /Other Indications Dissimilar and similar welds in 35 312" > 1/8" piping, both ferritic and >. 312" to 2.0" > 3/16" i austenitic 2.0" S over 71/4" Pressure retaining bolting non-axial indications > 1/4" 2" and over axial indications > 1" Vessel supports and support members for piping, valves, and .625" to 2.0" > 3 /16" pumps, both ferritic and 2.0" & over 71/4" austenitic Pressure retaining welds in pump casings and valve bodies ==2.0" PL/4" Pressure retaining welds in control rod drive housings N/A p 3/16" 8.0 Final Cleaning 8.1 When examination and evaluation are complete, the examination area shall be thoroughly cleaned with cleaner / remover which may be applied by flushing or spraying directly onto the surf ace and wiping with cloth or absorbent pape".
9.0 Documentation of Examination 9.1 All data relative to the examination shall be reported in accord-ance with Reference 2.4 and on forms similar to those shown in figures 14.15. and 16. I I I
Proc. No. 1st 3.1 g ey,,,,y Efje TTirgtnta Corpcratton , 20 of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page- of I l k
, SURF. EX AM. AREA' _
A-B s \w PROFILE OF VALVE BODY, 1 VESSEL N0ZZLE, OR in*. in. [ PUMP CONNECTION A,.. v
// ,s v
0 - c 9 l ) Er INNER SURFACE l ' NOM. PIPE Sli. LESS THAN 4 IN. { } , SURF. EXAM. ARE A
' ^
A-B PROFILE OF VALVE BODY, f VESSEL N0ZZLE, OR
+- l .-+ PUMP CONNECTION pm. +-ly ;n. > p .
A, s v f iB v i n f N \# l \ l l NOM. PIPE SIZE 4 IN. AND GREATER Fig. IWB-2500-8 I Similar and Dissimilar Metal Welds in Piping i Figure 1 ,
Proc.No. Ist 3 1 Nev. 1 Efje Virginia torporation , of Richmonts Date: 3/1/83 Page 9 of 20 0 't &o 4 4# -
&g,% '& &n,%
%l c w. 8 L s. .
t A . 8 o -[ W x z 48 o si - w o _
'N G \
l kC w m
\ I
~
l
/ ~
/
~
T 2 BRANCH /
}
* ~
CONNECTION g' { l
.3 4
2- z h b fu I f %
~ ~
)
e w l z m V w WELD 4 JOINT B s"
- 4 8g 5 g Fn e
--> t 4-U N @
^^- d y b 4
T H
$y Fig. Ik'B-2500-9 l I Pipe Branch Connection Figure 2 L
~
EIje Virginia Corporation 0 _ Of E(Chm 0!!D [)0f0 3/1/83 Page Of O hs
#O O 04 AA 95 .
a V A E 5 - - s - - r M Id 5 Z m W yt r* *
/
, BRANCH. [
CONNECTION \
.1 I 4
5 i
~
( D
~
g 7 l
\ \
l $ 8 " z - ! $. c l g sk^\ l E < j V Ns D g . I - y+v/ e a i i - of 0 e
# e*%.m - N.
I
-+ t (-
Fig. IWB-2500-10 I Pipe Branch Connection Figure 3 l 1 e e -w-- y --- ---y - - - - - - - - - - -, -----------,,-------4 --.---.---,p-- ---- a-w s--, -w-----------
~
'" '
- 3'l 1
, , . , Proc.No. Rev' Ef.je E,rgtuta Corporation of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page11 of 20
&0 6
Op & 5, "O / #+& Up O. l ) ' I # ? r < A '\ , w A/ l E 2 w 2 - l
> -- i l
H g - - l
; 8 1
< m \'
g : I IN. ,
- F I'd l ( l 1
2 BRANCH 0 - _ _ ' J CONNECT 10N
-->' e-I IN. l
# )
z g , -
$ 5 's s[ !
f T bA m l
~
3 B p n. It , s O z ) N : M l N 1 ch d . 1 e w - Z b
-u s j l
IWB-2500-11 ( l , Pipe Branch Connection Figure 4
j 1st 3.1 Proc.No.- Rev.1
.E; e "t7ttgtnia sorporation of Eichmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page_12 of 20 N0ZZLE SIZES OVER 4 in. NOM. PIPE SIZE VESSEL THICKNESS - t = 1/2 in.OR LESS h '
E X AMIN ATION SURFACE,A-B n A o 1/2 in. v i/2 In.
.B o
t JL l I - ( N ( E X AMIN ATION l SURFACE , A-B
. 1/2 in. .
A , s f B T i {It k J y_ l [ Fig. IWC-2520-3 Nozzle to Vessel Welds l I 1 1 Figure 5 1
-m --,. .- ----,_y. . , , _ . . - . _ . - . . , . , _, .,,.r__.__..-m-_.
,_m,_,.,_--_-,m,v,,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ , _ . , , - . - - . , _ _ _ . _ - - . ,
Is1 3.1 1
. , , , Proc. No. Rev.-
Ef.Je Yttgtuta Corporation 13 20 of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page of N Exam Surface l A-B b
^ o i
, 1 la x I i l
Exam Surface A-B q..
- /
p l T ( /_ 1 l l IWC-2520-4 Nozzle to Vessel Welds l l Fig. 6 l l
Ist 3.I 1 Proc. No. Rev-Efje T6ttgtnta Corporation of Richmonb Date: 3'_2/83 Page 14 of 20 COMPONENT ,A y . 1/2in. 1/2 in. N d b *- l COMPONENT \iB -
, l I SUPPORT 1/2 in. 1/2 in. {
} B" 'C j h 1 SUPPORT , q
- O- 1/2 in.
ALL AROUND A-B D E X AM. SURFACES A-B COMPONENT A f 1/2 in' BEYOND WELD AREA { } A
\i 1/2 in. COMPONENT [B
=
l . 5
> h b STRUCTURAL C SECTION 1/2in.
3 SUPPORT b e ,g
=
SUPPORT A t/2 in. I l
- -~
l l EX AM. SURFACES EX AM. SURFACES l A-B A-B I PL ATE AND SHELL TYPE LINE AR TYPF l SUPPORT WELCS SUPPORT WELDS Fig. IWC-2520-5 Integrally Welded Component Supports Fig,2re 7 1 - . - _ _ _,.
Ist 3.1 1
. , , . . Proc. No. Rev
,. .Efje T6ttgtnia Corporation of Richmonb Date: / 3/1/83 - Page is of 20
/
EXAM. SURFACE D A~B [ PROFILE VESSEL NOZZLE, OF OR VALVE BO' Y,' 1/2 in. PUMP CONNECTION g 1/2 in.
,. l A, / _B ,
N INNER SURFACE 1 l NOM. PIPE WALL THICKNESS, t = 1/2in. OR LESS [ PROFILE VESSEL NOZZLE OF VALVE
, OR BODY, EX A M. SURFACE
- e '
, PUMP CONNECTION I/2 in. 1/2 in. l l e- - ,. ~
/*
A. /* B l Y l 6
\ I i
t l l l I / x )_,,L NOM. PIPE WALL THICKNESS t OVER 1/2 in. IWC-2520-7 Welds in Piping l l Figure 8
Ist 3.1 l Proc. No. Rev-ILI.Je T6trginia Corporation 6 20 q , of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 09 _ EXAM.SURE _ ' C-D N N O, 's- 's-
,0 Y Y i l
l[ I k l l ( 1 - 1 \.
. g .
.g MEASURED ALONG SURFACE
'$' '{'
5' 5' EX AM. SURF. _ A-B l l Fig. IWC-2520-8 l Welds in Pump Casing and Valve Bodies
~
l I Figure 9
- Proc.No Ist 3.1 Rev- i Eije Vttgtnta Corporatton OfEICDm0IID Date' 3/1/83 Page 17 of 20
' ' ( >
EXAMINATION SURFACE AROUND ' BRANCH Q0NNECTION , A-B 1/2 in. A n [-, *-1/2 in.
,B E ,
5 8 \ g p
\ f -
I z 8
$ i w e l
g . _ l g BRANCH CONN. q g z g r j -j S w z
, 1/2in.
[ {-
@ $ v Q B 3 y -> ,
+-- 1/ 2 in.
4 2E o 3-A
.w2
%.~-%
Fig. IWC-2520-9 Branch Conneciton Welds , l l l I l t Figure 10 l
g'oO* gP gm F~ areew mMD N .U e A\DtD w f" a = t S%e.=Oa
" ~smu 2 m<'
R $ O!n Oc w O _ O- 3OoO Ha t O
"<om m 'g.n mmo452- M-9
_- mCg-o n>1zo e - m
~
M a x A E
*
- o t$EoM X B D
*f g
E - e - A c C E a C n f a A A i r e
, F E 2 u r R R / S A U A f
S
- B C c ,'
5Eo - Mq^ ** eo E ,- l NM g I l al
- ! s#
O O # A i n 2
/
1
* :ony1xog?C 2
~E*" f'. uC5-
-r.g. -
O
. ; ;1!iii
yH
' , . T3O. 29 xE* M rN e ~t@
=
c M M @OMDk,t.SOQ Oa8. wNU* R N.O! $
- Oe NO g e8< a~4 h mEzm r 6E" $O 5 v EN$ gz
-. <gm
. M _ A
- X E Q E P C
' A A m
F . f .
. 3 R E U R m o p S A a tJv .'
x "E - ' + 2 B - + .n e - ,j ,' c A 1I - l* a N g 5 f a [ * - r e 6 r S A
% B C
._ - t r
i[Y 1
~
I
- M
. A 5pO X
- 'iM E
M in- E -
-, ; f C L A
J-l-}[Y D F A R E A_ K L; U R 1I8
- S A
]
In .'l
- in
,2 1[.$ ,?
J
~
1 j
< i m* (
r w
- t
?
o x
- [_ s 7 4_ y u g A u 4 y aca N 3z.
>:nm o[
o
@ c.w ~2G"m8* "8 r.*~
, , , Proc.No._ ist 3.1 gey 3 E,fje %,rgtuta Corporation Of Richmont Date' 3/1/83 Page 20 og 20
$ A
-tu -
e 4 -ju
.E F y WELD
-Im BUTTERING
$1
-lN
~~ 4 (as D
-=i a m (d)
IT
-lu -
l A Av *
-In WELD BUTTERING A
.it
-> At h )
~
4 D o v (e)
.e A
Am 4f3 #
-)
-li
!I,)- *- 3
.g
. D
~. _,
(d (f) SURFACE EXAM. AREA A-D IWB 250018 CONTR01. ROD DRIVE HOUSING WELDS Fig. 13
Figure 14 ISI 3.1
/e%\1* Liquid Penetrant
- b / ' .
t \,/ Virginia Corp. . g% # g . ink w Examinat,on i Report 4 Customer Plant Unit Loop /Zone Procedure Examiner / Level Date Ccmponent/ Piping System ISO Drawing No. VCR Supervisor Manufacturer Type Batch No. Penetrant
.. Developer - - - - - - -
SM Remover Weld / Item PT Results VT Results Number Comments NRI RI SAT. UNSAT . l I i <\ \L l c'sl \ i s i\ \ \ d l , si,\\s N L \\ 'J \ \ \ H ! ( N i h \ \ \\ \\\\ \ J' I
\ T i D \\ \\ 1 U U l rt } l # ~
V" Form PT-2ol 2/82
' r Figure 15 ISI 3.1
/r%\g .
L.iquid Penetrant p u,. g
\,/
Virginia Corp. { } Weld Indication Record N %& / oritich...a Cuntomer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure Examiner / Level Date Component / Piping System VCR Supervisor Wald No. ISO / Drawing No.
- Circumferential Length of Weld :
e Start Point Liquid Penetrant Inspection i I I I i 1 1 I l l t
.____+____ + _ _ -. - 4 -___
l I weld _ _ _ _ _ .;- _ _ _ _ _ p _ _ _ _ 4____
.t t a :
1 I I I I I I I l O' 90* 180* 270* 360* l Remarks i O l _C\ \ % l AC n T\ \ \ C _ A\ \\ V ) \ b\ 9 l C \ \ O k \\ f V I O \ h \\ \\ \\ \U ( % \ O \\ \W l NMV ! \"J ' l . l Form PT-202 2/82
. Figure 16 ISI 3.1 f\
b b ' "* Liquid Penetrant 1 \/ Vir g "i / ginia .a -Corp. Indicat. ion Record l I Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure Examiner / Level Date Component / Piping System VCR Supervisor Item No. ISO / Drawing No. l l 9 l k l Comments: PT -203 ro
. . - - - . - _ _ , _ _ - - . - _ . - - . . . . . ~ _ _ . _ - . . _ -
/ K-
' The (804) 266 8741 Virginia Corp. P o 8a= 9474
( Qy .e - .5809 Lakeside Ave. s
%s 7 Richmond, Virginia 23228 Procedure
Title:
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION OF BOLTING UTILIZING THE DRY CONTINU0US METHOD EBACCO SERV:CES INCCRPORATED C E 2"I ISI 4.1 C ;' E 'dTI Procedure No.:
.T Cf 'i Thi: Dn: 7:: b:
[g 4. w v.tietcn,.-e. Plant Site: Waterford No. 3 $ ^ *r an a rard-0 ". 1"es~p' . '.. . .. 1. a f Resabeit: f. sun ei.tk A. eas acw.,a. t.* C " r~- Customer: Louisiana Power and Light Ebasco Services, Inc. - Agent C';,'Q.','2 , , "[ ,,- ",', "];
-its is. .. , 4 . , ,, , , , ,
*
- 81 CJ " A' ' t .a a.L rer Approved for Use - ' u s -a i v r=
Y. Virginia. Corporation: I 6 h- ' ~ [".$ ,' 2:t* *[,',_'.:l?,,7llll); [q~m) .,,...m CY:.MNEaw!.
,4,c.,.em,r Approved f Ue Customer:
3 g Jg2. Q .JJ.Q;[ . g f__ _ :.. NY..W. e l Kev. _ 0 Date: 2/10/82 Rev. Date: Prepared by: .'l b 6 M - --- Prepared by: 1 Reviewed by: Y d""^'r&lE Reviewed by: Reviewed by: N j h b.t.. . Reviewed by: l Customer: Rev. Date: Rev. Date: Prepared by: Prepared by: l l l Reviewed by: Reviewed by: 1 Reviewed by: Reviewed by: l Customer: Customer: Rev. Date: Rev. Date: Prepared by: Prepared by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Customer: Customer:
, , , Proc.No. ISI 4.1 q,y 0 tEf.je TTirgtnta t.orporation of R4monb Date .2/10/82 Page1 of 9
( l l 1.0 Scope 1.1 This procedure describes the requirements for the performance of magnetic particle examination of ferromagnetic bolting for indications open to the surface, using continuous method and longitudinal magnetization as produced by yoke or coil , techniques. Dry medium is to be used with this procedure. This procedure is written in compliance with ASME Code, Section XI, and the requirements of ASME Code, Section V, Article 7. 2.0 References 2.1 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, 1977 edition with addenda through summer, 1978. < 2.2 ASME Section V. Article 7, 1977 edition with addenda through summer, 1978. { } 2.3 The Virginia Corporation of Richmond procedure 4.1, Written Practice for the Qualification and Certification of NDE Personnel, Rev. 3, dated 3/6/81. 2.4 The Virginia Corporation ISI 1.2, Preservice Inspection Documentation (latest revision). 2.5 Preservice Inspection Program Plan. 2.6 The Virginia Corporation Procedure VC-QA-103, Generation and Control of Procedures for Waterford No. 3 Preservice Inspection (latest revision). 3.0 Personnel Requirements 3.1 Personnel performing examinations to this procedure shall be qualified and certified to at least Level II, in accordance with reference 2.3. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) may be employed as assistants. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) shall not independently evaluate or accept the results of a magnetic particle examination. i I
N m w.e g
, , , Proc.No. ISI 4.1 q,y o o Elje TTirgtuta Corporation V of Ekbmont Date: 2/lo/s2 Page , of 9 4.0 Equipment and Materials 4.1 Magnetizing. equipment shall be electromagnetic yokes capable of producing longitudinal magnetization by A.C., or portable magnetic particle unit capable of passing the required amount of half wave D.C. (HWDC) current through a multiturn coil looped around the part.
4.1.1 This equipment shall be calibrated at least once evbry twelve months and following major repair, periodic overhaul, or damage. 4.1.2 Electromagnetic yokes shall be Parker Research Corp. , Model DA-200 contour probe, or approved equivalent. Yokes shall have a calibrated lif ting power of at least 10 pounds f or A.C. at the maximum pole spacing to be used. A calibration sticker shall be af fixed to the yoke, and shall state the ( ,) serial number of the yoke, the maximum pole spacing, the date of calibration, and the person responsible for calibration. Minimum pole spacing will be three (3) inches, and yokes shall not be used with pole spacings beyond that stated on the calibration sticker. 4.1.3 Portable magnetic particle equipment shall be Econospect Corp. or equivalent, and shall produce HWDC amperage in the desired range. Specific equipment shall be chosen depending upon the amperage necessary for a specific examination. The unit's meter readings shall be compared to those of a control test meter with current transformer arrangement, connected so as to monitor the output currer.t . The accuracy of the entire control test meter arrangement shall be verified annually by means traceable to a national standard. Comparative Os
~
0
, , , Proc.No. ISI 4.1 ROV Efje Virgtma Corporation , of Richmonb Date: 2/10/82 Page , of a g readings shall be taken at a minimum of three output levels encompassing the useable range. 'The unit's meter reading shall not deviate by more than !10%
of full scale, relative to the actual current value as shown by the test meter. , 4.2 All examination medium materials shall be supplied with batch number and certification attesting that the medium material was manufactured in accordance with ASME Code Section V. The medium selected for examination shall provide adequate contrast with the background of the surface being examined. 4.2.1 The following dry medium materials, or approved equivalent, shall be used. 4.2.1.1 Magnaflux Corp. , No.1 ' Grey) No. 3A (Black), or No. 8A (Red). 4.2.1.2 Detek, Inc., M10-100 (Blue-Black), I l M10-200 (Red), M10-300 (Grey), M10-400 (Yellow) . 4.3 A magnetic particle field indicator (MPFI), see Figure 1, shall be available to determine or verify the suitability of examinations, equipment or materials, as may be necessary. The MPFI may be used to determine or verify such as: 4.3.1 Adequacy and/or direction of the magnetizing field. 4.3.2 Range (extent of surf ace area) that may be examined and interpreted for any single " shot". 5.0 General Requirements 5.1 Lighting for visible ne'diums shall be suf ficient to resolve a 1/32 inch wide (maximum) black line on an 18% neutral gray background placed on or near the surf ace to be examined. Flashlights and/or extension lights may be used to achieve sufficient lighting. l I
, , , Proc.No. ISI 4.1 ggy 0 o Elje Virgittta Corporation 2/10/82 4 9 W Med Date- Page of 5.2 Surface Preparation 5.2.1 The surf ace area to be examined, plus at least one inch on all cides, and the contact area for yokes, if outside this area, shall be dry and free of dust, dirt, scale, grease, or other matter that.
would interfere with the examinations. 5.2.2 Surface irregularities that, in the opinion of the examiners, would nask or hamper interpretations shall be corrected. 5.2.3 Precleaning and surface or area preparations, if required, shall be the responsibility of the contractor. 5.3 The examination area for bolting shall be the entire exposed
/m) surface. \ / '~' Surf ace temperature shall not exceed 600*F when using dry 5.4 mediums.
6.0 Examinations 6.1 Examinations shall be conducted by the continuous method. Visible, dry powder shall be applied in such a manner that a light, uniform, dust-like coating settles upon the surface of the test part while the part is .being magnetized. After application, and before turning off current, excess dry powder is removed by means of a dry-air current of sufficient force to remove the excess particles without disturbing any particles attracted by a flux leakage field that is indicative of discontinuities. 6.2 Examinations shall be conducted in two directions such that the lines of flux from one examination are approximately perpendicular to the other. Orientation of the lines of ' flux shall be such that the bolting is examined for circumferential and axial indications.
s.-----
~
, , , Proc.rdo. Tsr 4 1 Rev. o Efje TTirgtuta Corporation of Richmonb Dat.e: moe Page 5 of 9 , ;
6.3 Examinations shall be conducted with sufficient overlap to assure 100% coverage of the area required to be examined. Succeeding examinations shall overlap the appropriate area of the preceding examination by at least 1 inch. 6.4 Examination for Axial Indications 6.4.1 A longitudinal field, generally perpendicular to suspected axial indications, shall be induced in the part with an alternating current electromagnetic yoke. 6.4.2 The area of examination shall be limited to within k of the pole spacing on each side of the yoke. Minimum pole spacing shall be three inches. 6.4.3 The adequacy of the magnetizing field may be determined by positioning the MPFI on the surface to be examined. The flux intensity, or field i i strength, is suitable when a clearly defined line, or lines, of particles form across its copper face when the particles are applied simultaneously with the magnetizing force. 6.4.3.1 If the line, or lines, are not formed, or are not formed in the desired direction, the magnetizing technique, or equipment shall be changed or adjusted so that the required examination is achieved in accordance with this procedure. 6.4.3.2 Satisfactory definition of the line, or lines, on the MPFI verifies the adequacy and suitability of the technique and equipment. 6.4.4 Following the determination of field adequacy, the entire exposed area of the bolting shall be sequentially examined, being careful to allow ( ) sufficient overlap as detailed in paragraph 6.3
, , , Proc.No. ISI 4.1 qgy_ o o Efje TTirgtuta Corporation C of Richmont Dat.e:
2/10/82 Page 6 of 9 6.5 Examination for Circumferential Indications 6.5.1 A longitudinal field, generally perpendicular to suspected circumferential indications, shall be induced in the part with an HUDC coil coupled to portable magnetic particle equipment as described in paragraph 4.1.3. 6.5.2 Magnetization is accomplished by passing HWDC current through a multiturn coil looped around the bolting to be examined. This produces a magnetic field parallel to the axis of the coil. 6.5.2.1 For bolting with a length (L)/ Diameter (D) ratio greater than, or equal to, 4, the following formula shall be used to calculate the ampere-turns to be used for magnetization: Ampere-turns = 35,000 2 + L/D 6.5.2.2 For bolting with a L/D ratio greater than, or equal to, 2 and up to 4, the following formula shall be used: ampere-turns = 45,000 L/D 6.5.2.3 For L/D ratios less than 2, alternate magnetizing methods shall be used. 6.5.3 The magnetizing coil shall be made of cable, wound around the bolting, and the coil's turns shall be closely spaced. l 6.5.4 The area of examination shall be limited to within five inches on each side of the coil. 6.5.5 Parts longer than twelve inches shall be examined in sections not exceeding eleven inches nominal length.
, - - .-,-----n.,.. - - - - - . - - - . - - - - , . -.- - .n . - - - -
ggy 0
, , , Proc.No. ISI 4.1 Efje Virgtuta Corporation
, g(g(Chm 0ttb Date: 2/10/82 Page , of o i
)
6.5.6 The adequacy of the magnetizing field may be determined by positioning the MPFI on thh surface to be examined. The flux intensity, or field strength, is suitable when a clearly defined line, or lines, of particles form across its copper face, l
. when the particles are applied simultaneously with l
- the magnetizing force. i 6.5.6.1 If the line, or lines, are not formed. l or are not formed in the desired j direction, the magnetizing technique, equipment, or medium shall be changed or adjusted so that the required examination is achieved in accordance with this procedure.
6.5.6.2 Satisfactory definition of the line, ( ) or lines, on the MPFI verifies the ! adequacy and suitability of the techniques and equipment. 6.5.7 Following the determination of field adequacy, the entire exposed area of the bolting shall be sequentially examined, being careful to examine the area within the coil. Sufficient overlap shall l l be provided as deca 11cd in paragraph 6.3. l 6.6 Demagnetization of bolting shall be accomplished by slowly passing the bolting through the inside of the coil, prepared in paragraph 6.5, until it is approximately 2 feet beyond the coil. Demagnetization in this manner may also be accomplished by moving the coil instead of the bolting. ! 6.7 Post examination cleaning, associated with the test, shall l be the responsibility of the contractor, i l t
* *
- Prce.No. ISI 4.1 ggy o e EIJe TTirgtata Corporation 2/10/82
! OfRI($Ul0Hb DQte.
Page 8' Of 9 7.0 Evaluation and Recording of Indications 7.1 Discontinuities at the surface are indicated by the retention of examiaation medium. However, localized surface irregularities due to machining marks or other surface conditions may produce false or nonrelevant indications. . 7.2 Broad areas of particle accumulation or nonrelevant indications which could mask indications of discontinuities are unacceptable, and those areas shall be cleaned and reexamined. 7.3 Repcrtable Indications 7.3.1 The following relevant indications occuring in the examination area are to be recorded and reported:
- a. non-axial indications, greater than is inch in length I b. axial indications, greater than 1 inch in length l
8.0 Documentation of Examination 8.1 All data relative to the examination, including any reportable indications, shall be reported in accordance with refererence 2.4. and on forms similar to those shown in figures 2 and 3. I 1 l O
f Ist 4.1 0
, , , Proc.No. Rev Efje Virginta Corporation -
of Richmonb Date. 2/10/s2 Page 9 of 9 ) l l EIGHT CAR 80N STEEL PIE SECTIONS. I FURNACE BRAZE TOGETHER Y B
\
l s i j NONFERROUS HANDLE OF
\ g / ANY COWENIENT LENGTH y
\ / i
/ \
e' l \- ARTIFICIAL FIAW s
- x. ')
ORAZE WELD OR UECHANICALLY ATTACH NONFERROUS TRUNNIONS k ( j [e f COPPER PLATE. A80UT C.080 THICK ll C l l t l ILLUSTRATIVE ONLY l l - l l I Figure 1 Magnetic Particle Field Indicator
g ._w..n -. t - Figura 2
/em\'m Magnetic Porticle
,y V l w V t \/ Virginia Corp.
a' aichaaad Exominat,on i Report g%&/ 1 Customer Plant Unit I.aop / Zone Procedure Examinc r/I,evel VCR Supervisor Date Component / Piping System ISO Drawing No. Surface Condition Type of Particles Manufacturer Type Batch Number Wet Dry Visible Flourescent , Current Machine Mfr. Type /Model Serial No. AC DC HWDC Magnetization Coil Prods Yoke continuous Amps. Spacing Spacing Residual No. Turns Amps. MT Results VT Results Weld / Item Comments NRI RI Sat Unsat O
- O n\ \ \ \-,
! n\ n W \ \ ? A \ M s, \\ "1 \ L,\ 9
/ N \ \ \ \ V \\ \\ \ \7
( W \ \\ \\ \\ \\ \V l N T\1\U W (U v
)V "
lO l l
]
_ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ Form MT _D_i 2/82
Figure 3
~ Magnetic' . Particle Virginia Corp.
V -
.' a - Indication Record
%s*/ { }
Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure Examiner L/ evel Date Component / Piping System VCR Supervisor Item No. ISO / Drawing No. i i 9 k 9 Comments:
.,y - - - , - , , . - - - - , , , , e, ,-
s
. f% !
./ \ s TM . (804) 266 8741 P o Sa= 9474 7 -
ify- - Virginia Corp.
.e me e 5809 Lakeside Ave.
((
- v ,
Richmond, Virginia 23228 Procedure
Title:
~ MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION OF BOLTING BY CONTINUOUS METHOD UTILIZING WET, FLUORESCENT MEDIUM
~
EBASCO SERV'CES INCCRPCRATED s .-- .
/
E:CC.MM E
.?tecedu,te No.: ISI 4.2 nr r ","E N .>
Thi:; Drggis: i [ . vrimot c mes a*8 ** ce= "'t 8: Plant Sita: ince.i. ecu ,ri. 'i.a= Waterford No. 3 Resu%n;t: Preezed w.tle order. , 'f e T g Rejecki Rrme xg
' ' NOTE:
stom r: Louisianai Power and Li8h t """.*....d~~""","*** mi c o. u, ,, ,e c :m :. Ebasco Services. Inc. - Agent =m me a enx v c at a **
. , i., - . -i . .. n, n ian i,,,
- c.vmo, . , . . .,
eer- e su mena *=i. Approved for Use '**' f Virsinia Corporation: O W --- - r - - ~* (
""'"'n'"Ad"ev '"' ""L'A o v ...w. >.m .:.m. ...= .. ....
PProved f se D ATE:. h..OfP [ Customer: 3/JI/g2. ( 4 {g_ _ g, t Rev._,, 0 Date: 2/10/82 Rev. Date: Prepared by: ib d Wu - -- .r - Prepared by: Reviewed by: M e su2- - - 14 ' 2E Reviewed by: Reviewed by: % M 1 - 4:5cn_n Reviewed by: Customer: Rev. Date: Rev. Date: l Prepared by: _ Prepared by: 7 Reviewed by: Reviewed by: _ Reviewed by: - Reviewed by: Customer: Customer:
- 1. ,
Rev.$ Date: Rev. Date: Prepared by: Prepared by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by:
- Reviewed by:
- Reviewed by:
Custome Customer:
.. , .m.,_. -
__._m _ . - _ , _ _ _ _ . _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ . . _ _ . . _ . _ - . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
, ,, Pr'oc.No. m o2 'q,y, O Efje Virgtnta (Corporation 2/10/82.
Of M M DQj PGge 1 Of 10 I 1.0 Scope 1.1 This procedure describes the requirements for the performance of magnetic particle examination of ferromagnetic. bolting for indications open to the surface, using continuous method and longitudinal tagnetization as produced by yoke or coil techniques. Wet, fluorescent medium is to be used with this procedure. This procedure is written in - compliance with ASME Code, Section XI, and the requirements of ASME Code, Section V Article 7. l 2.0 References 2.1 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, 1977 l edition with addenda through summer, 1978. 2.2 ASME Section V, Article 7, 1977 edition with addenda l summer, 1978. 2.3 The Virginia Corporation of Richmond procedure 4.1, Uritten Practice for the Qualification and Certification l l of NDE Personnel, Rev. 3, dated 3/6/81 2.4 The Virginia Corporation ISI 1.2. Preservice Inspection l Inspection Documentation (latest revision) . 2.5 Preservice Inspection Program Plan. 2.6 The Virginia Corporation Procedure VC-QA-103, Generation and Control of Procedures for Waterford No. 3 Preservice Inspection (latest revision). 3.0 Personnel Requirements 3.1 Personnel performing examinations to this procedure shall be quali-fied and certified to at least Level II, in accordance with reference 2.3. Levul I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) may be employed as assistants. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) shall not independently evaluate or accept the results of a magnetic particle examination. 4.0 Equipment and Materials
- 4.1 Magnetizing equipment shall be electromagnetic yokes capable of pro-ducing longitudinal magnetization by A.C., or portable magnetic q g particle unit capable of passing the required amount of half wave D.C. (HWDC) current tl. cough a multiturn coil looped around the part.
, , , Proc.No. Ist 4.2 g,y a s Efje Virgtnta Corporatton
((,[ of Richment Date:. 2/10/82. . pag, 2 og lo 4.1.1 This equipment shall be calibrated at least every twelve months and following major repair, periodic overhaul, or damage. 4.1.2 Electromagnetic yokes shall be Parker Research
. Corp., Model DA-200 contour probe, or approved equivalent. Yokes shall have a calibrated lif ting power of at least 10 pounds for A.C. at the maximum pol'e spacing to be used. A calibration sticker shall be affixed to the yoke, and shall state the serial number of the yoke, the maximum pole spacing, the date of calibration, and the person responsible for calibration. Minimum pole spacing will be three (3) inches, and yokes
-sp shall not be used with pole spacings beyond that x stated on the calibration sticker.
, 4.1.3 Portable magnetic particle equipment shall be Econospect Corp. or equivalent, and shall produce HWDC amperage in the desired range. Specific equipment shall be chosen depending upon the amperage necessary for a specific examination. f The unit's meter readings shall be compared to those of a control test meter with current transformer arrangement, connected so as to monitor the output current. The accurac,y of the entire test meter arrangement shall be vertified annually < by means traceable to a national standard. Com-parative readings shall be taken at a minimum of three output levels encompassing the useable range. The unit's meter reading shall not deviate by more than 210% of full scale, relative to the actual current value as shown by the test meter.
, <"*g
.-. _ , , _ , . _ . . . . . _ . - _ - - . . . - _ . . _ . ~ - _ . . _ . - . , , _ . - . , _ _ . - . , , , , , _ . , . _ _ _ _ _ - . , . - , _ _ . - ,
, ,, Proc.N<g ISI 4.2 ROV O EIJe "t7ttgtma Corporation
( of RM Date: 2/10/82 p ,g , 3 ,,1o g 4.2 All examination medium materials shall be supplied with batch number and certification attesting that the medium material was manufactured in accordance with ASME Code, Section V. Fluorescent mediums shall be such that the particles emit a brilliant fluorescence when exposed to a suitable " black light." The degree of brilliance shall provide adequate contrast with the similarly exposed background of the surface being examined. 4.2.1 Wet, fluorescent mediums shall be provided in prepared bath containers (spray cans). 4.2.2 The following wet, fluorescent medium materials, or'appro'ved equivalent, shall be used. 4.2.2.1 Magnaflux Corporation No.14 AM 4.3 When fluorescent particles are used as the examination medium, " black light" (light in the .near ultraviolet range - 3300 to 3900 A* of wave length) shall be used to expose the particles and cause them to fluoresce. The light shall have been activated for at least five minutes prior to use in the examination. 4.3.1 Suitable intensity of " black light" at the surface under examination shall be determined using a meter which is sensitive to light in the ultraviolet spectrum, centered on 365nm (3650A). Two readings shall be taken: the first without a filter and the second with an ultraviolet (365nm (3650A)) absorbing filter over the sensing element of the meter. The second reading is deducted from the first and the dif ference shall be a minimum of 800j4W/cm2,
'e
s ..
, , , Proc.No. _1sl 4.2 q ,,- o EIJe Virginia Corporation e .
Of R M gg* 2/10/82' P096 4 ' Of 10 4.4 A magnetic particle field indicator (MPFI), see figure 1, shall be available to determine or verify the suitability of examinations, equipment or materials, as may be necessary. The MPFI may be used to determined or verify parameters such as: 4.4.1 Adequacy and/or direction of the magnetizing field. 4.4.2 Fluorescent suitability of fluorescent particle aediums and their compatibility with the " black light" being utilized. 4.4.3 Range (extent of surface area) that may be examined and interpreted for any single " shot"~. 5.0 General Requirements 5.1 Lighting a 5.1.1 The adequacy of " black light" intensity shall be verified in accordance with paragraph 4.3.1 at least once every eight hours of continuous operation, and whenever the work location is changed. l - 5.1.1.1 The work area lighting shall be subdued, shaded or darkened as necessary to allow easy recoginition of particles when they are being exposed to " black light". 5.2 Surface preparation 5.2.1 The surf ace area to be examined, plus at least one inch on all sides, and the contact area for yokes, if outside this area, shall be dry and free of dust, dirt, scale, grease, or other matter that would interfere with the examinations.
Proc.No.: Isl 4.2 gay o Efje Virganta Corporation ( Of R M - Date. 2/1o/82 pag, 5 of lo 4 5.2.2 Surface irregularities that, in the opinion of the examiner, would mask or hamper interpretations shall be corrected. 5.2.3 Precleaning and surface or area preparations, if required, shall be the responsibility of the contractor. 5.3 Examination area The examination area for bolting shall be the entire exposed surface. 5.4 Surface temperature shall not exceed 135"F when using vet mediums. 6.0 Examinations 6.1 Examination shall be conducted by the continuous method. The part shall be bathed with the inspection medium to provide an abundant source of suspended particles on the surface of the part and terminating the bath application simultaneously with the initiation of the magnetizing current. Thus, there is no application of the inspection medium while the magnetizing current is flowing. Typically, there may be some overlap relative to cessation of bath application and the flow of magnetizing current. 6.1.1 The wet prepared bath shall be suf ficiently agitated prior to application. 6.2 Examinations ahall be conducted in two directions such that the lines of flux from one examination are approximately perpendicular to the other. orientation of the lines of flux shall be such that the bolting is examined for circumferential and axial indications. 6.3 Examinations shall be conducted with sufficient overlap ( to asure 100% coverage of the area required to be examined. Succeeding examinations shall overlap the appropriate
~
area of the preceding examination by at least 1 inch.
Proc.No. 1st 4.2 q,y, 0 g $fje Virgtuta Corporation Of E M M g- 2/10/82 P0gG 6 Of 10 6.4 Examination for Axial Indications 6.4.1 A longitudinal field, generally perependicular to suspected axial indications, shall be induced in the part with an alternating current electromagnetic yoke. 6.4.2 The area of examination shall be limited to within is of the pole spacing on each side of the yoke. Minimum pole spacing shall be three inches. 6.4.3 The adequacy of the magnetizing field may be determined by positioning the MPFI on the surface to be examined. The flux intensity, or field strength, is suitable when a clearly defined line, or lines, of particles form across its copper face when the particles are applied as described in paragraph 6.1 6.4.3.1 If the line, or lines, are not formed, or are not in the desired direction, the magnetizing technique or equipment shall be changed or adjusted so that the required ! examination is achieved in accordance with this procedure. j 6.4.3.2 Satisfactory definition of the line, or lines, on the MPF1 verifies the adequacy and suitability of the technique and equipment. 6.4.4 Following the determination of field adequacy, the entire exposed area of the bolting shall be sequentially examined, being careful to allow sufficient overlap as detailed in paragraph 6.3. _ , . - . . - .-,..---s...
, , , Proc.No. 1st 4.2 q,y 0 EIje Virgtnta Corporation Of R @ m08U Dote . 2/10/82 Page 7 of 10 l I 6.5 Examination fo'r Circumferential Indications 6.5.1 A longitudinal field, generally perpendicular to suspected circumferential indications, shall be induced in the part with an INDC coil coupled to portable magnetic particle equipment as described in paragraph 4.1.3.
6.5.2 Magnetization is accomplished by passing INDC current through a multiturn coil looped arcund the bolting to be examined. This produces a magnetic field parallel to the axis of the coil. 6.5.2.1 For bolting with a length (L)/ Diameter (D) ratio greater than, or equal to, 4, the following formula shall be used
,to calculate the ampere-turns to be I used for magnetization:
Ampere-turns = 35,000 l I 2 + L/D 6.5.2.2 For bolting with a L/D ratio greater than, or equal to, 2 and up to 4, the following formula shall be used: ampere-turns = 45,000 L/D 6.5.2.3 For L/D ratio.s less than 2, alternate magnetizing methods shall be used. 6.5.3 The magnetizing coil shall be made of cable, wound around the bolting, and the coil's turns shall be closely spaced. 6.5.4 The area of examination shall be limited to within five inches on each side of the coil. 6.5.5 Parts longer than twelve inches shall be examined in sections not exceeding eleven inches nominal (y length. l l
r en-
, Proc.No. ISI 4.2 qqy 0 Efje E,rgm, ta Corporatiott MRionli Date'. 2/10/82 P0ge8 of 10 6.5.6 The adequacy of the magnetizing field may be determined by positioning the MPFI on thh surface to be examined. The flux intensity, or field strength, is suitable when a clearly defined line, or lines, of particles form across its copper face, when the particles are applied simultaneously with the magnetizing force.
6.5.6.1 If the line, or lines, are not formed, or are not formed in the desired direction, the magnetizing technique, equipment, or medium shall be changed or adjusted so that the required examination is achieved in accordance with this procedure.
/} 6.5.6.2 Satisfactory definition of the line, or lines, on the MPFI verifies the adequacy and suitability of the techniques and equipment.
6.5.7 Following the determination of field adequacy, the entire exooued area of the bolting shall be sequentially examined, being careful to examine the area within the coil. Sufficient overlap shall l be provided as detailed in paragraph 6.3. 6.6 Demagnetization of bolting shall be accomplished by slowly passing the bolting through the inside of the coil, prepared in paragraph 6.5, until it is approximately 2 feet beyond the coil. Demagnetization in this manner may also be accomplished by moving the coil instead of the bolting. ! 6.7 Post examination cleaning, associated with the test, shall be the responsibility of the contractor. !O l l
m42 Rey o
. . . . Proc.No.
Elje Virgtuta Corporation 2/10/82 'Page.L_of 10 Of RM Date-g . 7.0 Evaluation and Recording of Indications ' 7.1 Discontinuities at the surface are indicated by the retention of examination medium. However, localized surface irregularities due to machining marks or other surface conditions may produce false or nonrelevant indications. 7.2 Broad areas of particle accumulation or nonrelevant indications which could mask indications of discontinuities are unacceptable, and those areas shall be cleaned and reexamined. 7.3 Reportable Indications 7.3.1 The following relevant indications occuring in the examination area are to be recorded and reported: l a. non-axial indications, greater than l Is inch in length
- b. axial indications, greater than 1 inch l
in length { ) 8.0 Documentation of Examination 8.1 All data relative to the examination, including any reportable indications, shall be reported in accordance with refererence 1 2.4, and on forms similar to those shown in figures 2 and 3. l 1 i l I l l
. Pr~oc. No. Ist 4.2 q,y_ 0 Elje "t7irginia Corporation g( Riggg6RD gagg* , 2/10/82. pagg 10 Of 10 EISNT CARoom STEEL Pit Sections.
I uRNACE F ORAZE ToGETHER
=
4 l -
\N j j mourEnnous ManoLE or ANY CoWENIENT LENGTH
,/ 7 e' !\
e' l \- ARTIFICIAL FIAW s
- O enAZE wEto on MECHANICALLY ATTACH mourEnnous TRunnlows CorPEn PLATE, AeouT c,olo THiCa l l C l l t
ILLUSTRATIVE ONLY O Figure 1 Magnetic Particle Field Indicator
, , , - , , - _ _ _ , . - - - , _ , . . . - . , . _ , - - - , , , - - _ - , , , _ . _ _ . , _ , _ . . , . , . ,,-,,_._,.,,,,,_._,.,...,.,.,__.,,,,,.,_.n.n.,_,- -
Figura 2
/a* %\1 ss. Magnetic Porticle p j.
g i/ Virginia Corp. f g%.*/ i ' k'""*"d Exomination Report I I Customer Plant Unit 1. cop / Zone Procedure Examincr/t.evel VCR Supervisor Date Component / Piping System ISO Drawing No. Surface Condition Type of Particles Manufacturer Type Batch Number Wet Dry Visible Flourescent Current Machine Mfr. Type /Model Serial No. AC DC HWDC Magnetization Coil Prods Yoke Continuous Amps. Spacing Spacing Residual No. Turns Amps. MT Results VT Results Weld / Item Comments NRI RI Sat Unsat l A
> \C n\ \ \ ')
A\ n T\ \ \ M
^\ . \\ " / \ MV A\ O k\\ \ v
^ \ \ \\ \\ \\ \V
( N \ \\ \\ \W' Wh\AY
& JY v
i 0 i ( Form MT-3ol 2/82
, Figura 3
\~ Magnetic' Particle t Vir
.a -
( ', ( NY% .s*/ ginia Corp. - Indicati6n Record Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure Examiner L/ evel Date Component / Piping System VCR Supervisor Item No. ISO / Drawing No. GP e l t l l l 9 D' 9 l l l l l~ Comments:
~
l l .. __- - _ - . _ - - - _ __ _ n i _..__._ _ ___ _ _ _ _i z -- ~ _ i _- ~ _-__._._-.________._..T_,._______
. . _~.
/n\
g' p The (804) 266 8741 Virginia Corp. P. O. Box 9474
't ni 5809 Lakeside Ave.
W / Richmond, Virginia 23228 Procedure
Title:
~ MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION OF WELDS UTILIZING THE DRY CONTINUOUS METHOD EUASCO SERVICES INCCRPORATED w._. . AEOURANCE - Procedure No.: ISI 4.3 ENCHTEERHIG ims UQ;U;Uce;[ g3; Renend Wi%wt Csomets Plant Site: Waterford No. 3 O'"'-'"'"'mce--'t==a.i.d:
"*"*:**'*'ad Rasetast: Prate:J e.tg orgw, O "','",d : '
fl0TE: Customer: Louisiana Power and Light Aases of this dacumut. with or =ttn. ene ee==ws. i: en eman ww.,=m. Ebasco Services, Inc. - Agent j" " f', "l*j ,",'j' '*'j', "j ,
= . , , ,.y - , ,,
dm
- Approved for Use 8' "t* . e c c.
Virginia Corporation: -- O ^' - ~ -
=k'" i a l d
) ,,m ur j -
-v-
- . . Y,,,. ,[ p.,7 *, . . . . . . . . . h. .
Approved for Use DA : ' Customer: g Rev. , ,n Date: 9 /in /A 9 Rev. Date: Prepared by: 7b 6 e -- s Prepared by: Reviewed by: Ne- : 6 M ' - S Lv/ F Reviewed by: Reviewed by:Mdd YW7f/
~
Reviewed by:
/
i Customer: Rev. 1 Date: 1/1/ A 1 Rev. Date: l Prepared by: /h" B N Prepared by: Reviewed by: Y 6 --+ m l # Reviewed by: t / Reviewed by: Reviewedbyk L,hh1 Customers J Customer:
// %//b'/ifA l %\t.N< h l Rev. Date: Rev. ___ Date:
( Prepared by: Prepared by: ( Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Customer: Customer: l -.
, , , Pr:c.Nr. ISI 4.3 ReV, 1 Efje Virgima Corporation 3/1/a3 1 21 of Richmont Date.' Page of 1.0 Scope 1.1 This procedure describes the requirements for the performance of magnetic particle examination of ferromagnetic weldments in piping 4" diameter and greater and adjacent base metal for indications open to the surface, using continuous method and longitudinal magnetiza-tion as p'roduced by yoke technique. Dry medium is to be used with this procedure. This procedure is written in compliance with ASME Code, Section XI, and the requirements of ASME Code, Section V, Article 7.
2.0 References 2.1 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, 1977 edition with addenda through summer, 1978. 2.2 ASME Section V, Article 7, 1977 edition with addenda through summer, 1978. 2.3 The Virginia Corporation of Richmond Procedure 4.1, Written Practice for the Qualification and Certification of NDE Personnel, Rev. 3, dated 3/6/81. 2.4 The Virginia Corporation ISI 1.2, latest revision, Preservice Inspection Documentation. 2.5 Preservice Inspection Program Plan. 2.6 The Virginia Corporation Procedure VC-QA-103, Generation and Control of Procedures for Waterford No. 3 Preservice Inspection (latest revision). 3.0 Personnel Requirements 3.1 Personnel performing examinations to this procedure shall be qualified and certified to at least Level II, in accordance with reference 2.3. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) may be employed as assistants. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) shall not independently evaluate or accept the results of a magnetic particle examination. 4.0 Equipment and Materials 4.1 Magnetizing equipment shall be electromagnetic yokes capabic of producing longitudinal magnetization by A.C. current. l I
Proc.No. ISI 4.3 ggy_ 1 EIJe Virgtnta Corporation of RI4W Date' 3/1/83 Page 2 of 21 l 4.1.1 This equipment shall be calibrated at least once every twelve months, following major repair, periodic overhaul, or damage. 4.1.2 Electromagnetic yokes shall be Parker Research Corp., Model DA-200 contour probe, or approved equivalent. Yokes shall have a calibrated lifting power of at least 10 pounds for A.C. at the maximum pole spacing to be used. A calibration sticker shall be affixed to the yoke, and shall state the serial number of the yoke, the maximum pole spacing, the date of calibration, and the person responsible for calibration. Minimum pole spacing will be three (3) inches, and yokes will not be used with pole spacings beyond that stated on the calibration sticker. 4.2 All examination medium materials shall be supplied with batch l I number and certification attesting that the medium material was manufactured in accordance with ASME Code, Section V. The medium selected for examination shall provide adequate contrast with the background of the surface being examined. 4.2.1 The following dry medium materials, or approved
. equivalent, shall be used.
4.2.1.1 Magnaflux Corp., No. 1 (Grey), No. 3A (Black), or No. 8A (Red). 4.2.1.2 Detek, Inc., M10-100 (Blue-Black), M10-200 (Red) M10-300 (Grey), M10-400 (Yellow). 4.3 A magnetic particle field indicator (MPFI), see Figure 1, shall be avsilable to determine or verify the suitability of examinations, equipment or materials, as may be necessary. The MPFI may be used to determine or verify such as: 4.3.1 Adequacy and/or direction of the magnetizing field. 4.3.2 Range (extent of surface area) that may be examinad and interpreted for any single " shot".
l
- , s Proc.No. ISI 4.3 ROV. I~
Elje "t7ttginta Corporation sf Richmoub Date: 3/1/83 Page 3 of 21 5.0 General Requirements 5.1 Lighting for visible mediums shall be sufficient to resolve a 1/32 inch wide (maximum) black line on an 18% neutral gray background placed on or near the surface to be examined. Flashlights and/or extension lights may be used to achieve sufficient lighting. 5.2 Surface Preparation 5.2.1 The surface area to be examined, plus at least one inch on all sides, and the contact area for yokes, if outside this area, shall be dry and free of dust, dirt, scale, grease, or other matter that would interfere with the examinations. 5.2.2 "As-welded", surfaces, following removal of slag, shall be considered suitable for magnetic particle examination without grinding if this does not interfere with interpretation of the test results if the weld contour blends int'o the base metal. 5.2.3 Surface irregularities that, in the opinion of the examiners, would mask or hamper interpretations shall be corrected. 5.2.4 - Precleaning and surface or area preparations, if ( required, shall be the responsibility of the contractor. 5.2.5 Power wire brushing is permitted for removal of extraneous materials, at the discretion of the PSI
, Construction Coordinator.
5.3 Examination Area 5.3.1 The examination area shall be the weld surface and adjacent base metal on each side of the weld edge, as required by Figures 1 through 13. 5.3.2 The specific. welds or other areas to be examined shall be as defined in the preservice inspection plan.
Proc.No. Isr 4.3 Rev 1 0Q M Non I 8 %c$ nun $ OQfe". 3/1/83 Page 4 of 21 5.4 Surface temperature shall not exceed 600 F when using dry mediums. 6.0 Examinations 6.1 Examinations shall be conducted by the continuous method. Visible, dry powder shall be applied in such a manner that a light, uniform, dust-like coating settles upon the surface of the test part while the part is being magnetized. After application, and before turning off current, excess dry rowder is removed by means of a dry-air current of sufficient force to remove the excess particles without disturbing any particles attracted by a flux leakage field that is indicative of discontinuities. . 6.2 Examination shall be conducted in two directions such that { the lines of flux from one examination are approximately perpendicular to che other. Orientation of the lines of flux shall be such that the surface examined is examined for indications parallel and transverse to the weld axis. 6.3 Examinatiors shall be conducted with sufficient overlap to assure 100% coverage of the area required to be examined. Succeeding examinations shall overlap the appropriate area of the preceding examination by at least one inch. 6.4 Examination for Parallel and Transverse Indications 6.4.1 A longitudinal field in two directions, 90 to each other, shall be induced in the part with an l , alternating current electromagnetic yoke in accordance with requirements of paragraph 6.4.3 j and a setup similar to Figure 14. l 6.4.2 The area of examination shall be limited to within 1/4 of the pole spacing on each side of the yoke. Minimum pole spacing shall be three inches. t l l
Proc.No. Ist 4 3 Rev. 1 EIJe Virginta Corporation of Ric$mont i Date: 3/1/83 Page 5 of 21 g 6.4.3 The adequacy of the magnetizing field may be determined by positioning the MPFI (Figure 15) on the surface to be examined. The flux intensity, or field strength, is suitable when a clearly defined line, or lines, of particles form across its copper face when the particles are applied simultaneously with the magnetizi.ig force. 6.4.3.1 If the line, or lines, are not formed, or are not formed in the desired direction, the magnetizing technique, equipment, or medium shall be changed or adjusted so that the required examination is achieved in accordance with this procedure. 6.4.3.2 Satisfactory definition of the line, or lines, on the MPFI verifies the adequacy and suitability of the technique and equipment. 6.4.3.3 The adequacy of the field shall be determined with the MPFI in both the parallel and transverse directions with respect to the weld axis. 6.4.4 Following the determination of field adequacy, the entire area to be examined shall be sequentially examined, being careful to allow sufficient overlap i as detailed in paragraph 6.3, as depicted in Figure 14, 6.5 Demagnetization of weldment is not required. 6.6 Post examination cleaning, associated with the test, shall be the responsibility of the contractor. 7.0 F. valuation and Recording of Indications 7.1 Discontinuities at the surface are indicated by the retention of examination medium. However, localized surface irregularities due to machining marks or other surfacu conditions may produce false or nonrelevant indications.
- - - Proc.No' ISI 4.3 ggy 1 .
EIJe Virstnta Corporation q l of Richmont Date: 3/1/83 Page 6 of 21 7.2 Broad areas of particle accumulation or nonrelevant indications which could mask indications of discontinuities are unacceptable, and those areas shall be cleaned and reexamined. 7.3 Reportable Indications 7.3.1 The indications in the table below, occuring in the examination area, are considered relevant and are to be recorded and reported to the customer or his agent within 24 hours. Nominal Wall Reportable Description Thickness /Other Indications Ferromagnetic welds ~
< .312" >1/8" piping >.312" to 2.0" >3/16" l 2.0" & over > 1/4" Ferromagnetic vessel .625" to 2.0" > 3/16" supports and support 2.0" & over > 1/4" members for piping, valves, and pumps Pressure retaining welds >2.0" > 1/4" in pump casings and g valve bodies 8.0 Documentation of Examination 8.1 All data relative to the examination, including any reportable indications, shall be reported in accordance with references 2.4, and on forms similar to those shown in Figures 16 and 17.
_,. w - - - -,---,-.--%-,- , , -- -y.,%,.. -
., ,.-,,--.--e.-.-.w.-, ,._--% +----e- ,,-%p. -w-.---w---- -- ., y,w-
Proc. No. 1st 4.3 gey, i
'Efje TTttginta Carperatten of Richmonb Date: 3 /1,/ 8 3 - Page 7. of 21
, SURF. EX AM. AREA' A-B PROFILE OF VALVE BODY,
\(\w VESSEL N0ZZLE, OR
,, I" ,' ,i [ PUMP CONNECTION 2 l n. f A,, / * ', , B '
( t
$5 INNER SURFACE NOM. PIPE SI2E LESS THAN 4 IN.
SURF. EXAM. ARE A A-B PROFILE OF VALVE BODY, I l 4 VESSEL NO22LE, OR
<-l;p2
+- l , ->
7 /, PUMP CONNECTION A, y
, / kB y . , n l > e
/ \ N l
NOM. PIPE SIZE 4 IN. AND GREATER Fig. IWB-2500-8 Similar and Dissimilar Metal Welds in Piping { } l Figure 1 , l [
Proc.No. Ist 4 3 Rev' 1 Ef.Je T8ttgtnia C.orporation .
. Of RfCDm0!!D Dato' 3/1/83 Page 8 of 21 l 40 '/ h O O -
&p%lr, ,/ k"%% l N,
4 %p f N, YJ 8 L w , h . I O ' -l l N 4sD l
$ 2 S/ g/
-g !
g - r- - - E O l
~
/ ~
2 BRANCH ~ I I CONNECTid'N { d i I 2 z \ 1 I 5 0 . { h , I h -) E E . / 1 V w WELD JOINT 'e s"
*d 8 :d a
N ; N o
> t 4 !3 s ,
N %
%^- d W5 ,T 5
Fig. IWB-2500-9 Pipe Branch Connection I Figure 2
ISI 4.3 ggv'
. , . . Proc.No 3 Ef.Je Virgtnta Corporatton Of 3(Ch!110!!D Date' 3/1/83 Page 9 of 21 0 5s
. Op 06 -
J bb
) E & -
. #+ '
A E 5 y g ~ - <
& y
$ g-> 4- /
))
- at J
, , ,, BRANCH , [
CONNECTION \ N I 5 5 I
-b I i u - \ \
E E 3 \ 3 4 ^\ V N^ D g . a g E AY E 0 8 . a , W N
# we%. m ~
h-
-% t 4-Fig. IWB-2500-10 Pipe Branch Connection j l Tigure S
' Ist 4.3
, , , . Proc.No. Rev. 1 Ehe T61rgtuta Corporation 21 of Eichmonb Date: 3/1'83 Page 10 of U,
J Op 'A , 5, #. 4 "O s & U p , O.
> #s e
f & ' 8 A \ w ,A
~
r -
! s \.nc , , N- ~~2 e
3 BRANCH L CONNECTION
% e-1IN.
)
't ,.
$ \
G N T VA 8> w . s k e r. p n. O 2
.s (
2 C) y c ' p ,s - e w - I
-w a N ,
Ik'B-2500-11 Pipe Branch Connection Tigure 4
'8' ' 3 Proc. No.- Rev- 1 Efje TTirginta sorporation of Eichmonb Date: 3/1/a3 Page 11 of 21 NOZZLE SIZES OVER 4 in. NOM. PIPE SIZE VESSEL THICKNESS -t = 1/2 in.OR LESS EXAMINATION SU9 FACE,A-0 H! o 1/2 in.
v 1/2 in.
" ,8 Y T 2.
l I i N I ( i EX AMIN ATION SURFACE , A.B i 1/2 in. A a f i g T o ' i
) t L _
Q Fig. IWC-2520-3 . Nozzle to Vessel Welds l I rigure 5
r i Ist 4.3
, , , , Proc. No. Rev. 1 tElje Virgtnta Corporation -
Of Mi(DN10nb Dato' 3/i/83 Page _12 of 21 O s Exam Surface A-B b ' A '
. .- D )'
(
; T EL o
NJ Exam Surface A-B q.. s--- , A
".: l 3 1
. l T
\
e . p IWC-2520-4 (-) Nonlc to Vessol Welds l'ig. 6
Proc.No. "*3
, , , . Rev 1 Efje TTirgtnta serparation of Rfthmonb Date: '/1/R9 Page 13 of_21 s-COMPONENT c --
A , ,
. V2in.ALL AROUNO
- d b *-
l COMPONENT \n 3
\ 5 i
/
I C SUPPORT 1/2 in. 1/2 in. h ,
} B" 'C j
'B SUPPORT ,
/ 3
-1 H 1/2 in.
A ALL J.ROUNO EXAM.S RF S
, E X AM. MFACES COMPONENT , tA h U2;,.EEYONO WELD AREA
\.i A 1/2 in. COMPONENT -
[8 5
, } = STRUCTURAL
= SECTION 1/2 in-E SUPPORT s t a J 2-- O 5
SUPPORT A, I/2 h-n __-?___ C X AM. SURFACES CX AM. SURFACES
.A-B -
A-B PL ATE AND SHELL TYPE LINE AR TYPE SUPPORT WELCS SUFPORT WELDS Fig. IWC-2520-5 l I Integrally Welded Component Supports Figure 7
'8I ' 3
. . . . . Proc.No. Rev' 1
.k.l.Je TTirginia Corporation of Rhbmonb Dato: 3/i/83 Page 14 of 21 EX AM. SURFACE 2
A-B [ PROFILE VESSEL NOZZLE, OF VALVE OR BOOY,
- U2 in.
I PUMP CONNECTION a g 1/2 in. M ,. A, / e ,
~.
INNER SURFACE NOM. PIPE WALL THtCKNESS,t a 1/2in.OR LESS PROFILE OF VALVE BOOY, VESSEL NOZZLE , OR Ex AM. SURFACE
- r PUMP CONNECTION t /2 in. t/2 in.
A.
/'s4 --
t l \ l i i / A Il NOM. PIPC WALL THiCKNES51 OVER 1/2 in. IWC-2520-7 Welds in Piping i I Figure 8
, , , Proc. No. Ist i. 3 Rev. 1 L.f.Je T6ttgtnta (Corporation of Richmonb Date: '/,/s, Page is of 21 l
j , I l 1 1
, EXAM.SURE _ -
r - 1 N N 5' 5' n, , '
- n o Y Y
)
1 . 1 ' s. MEASURED R C ALONG SURFACE
?. ?
EX AM. SURF.
'l A-B l
l
' Fig. IWC-2520-8 Welds in Pump Casing and Valve Bodies l I l
l Figure 9 l
e Proc. No. Ist 4.3 gey'_ 3 Eve Virginia Corporation Of Richmonb Date' 3/1/83 Page is of 21 EXAMINATION SURFACE AROUND BRANCH GONNECTION , A-B 1/2 in. A
~
+ +-- 1/2 in.
d . m B la ls \ N, . s l
\
,s
. _. l__ g BRANCH _ ,
CONN. { l . l 2 9 r {- -
~
, 1/2 in.
v> z Y s. l 5 Y 3 y -> ,
*-- 1/ 2 in.
H E o W A
~.~~.-%
Fig. IWC-2520-9 Branc "onneciton Welds l I rigure 10
o , o Proc. No. Ist 4.3 q,y 1 Ehe "tTtrgtnta Corporation of Michmonb Dato: 3/1/83 Page 17 of 21 TYPE F PUMP (SECTION E) {, PUMP CASING
. i E!
3 oiscHARGE $ m [fg s w i N .5
- Ef g n w.a
' e W R b5 w :j<
a < '" WELD I
.{. - g - - -- g s_ s JOINT n 3 3.
4 o ,
! l I 3
.E R_
IWB-2500-16 P'JMP CASING WELD I l'in. I1 a i I
=
O' e h a. v hs 7oO.zo 4 3 ?. mo<- W Ne44 .. CCQ b 2 4 @. ~_ "3 @oMC o" pRrcgQa
. s U8. W)S TQo" a oe-H
< m mo$ 34z - . $gm EE {*Z k E"O mo Eme- / Y ? g c,m
@$Q e,< h "
I M I A - _ X E Q E P C A A F h .
. ^g R E
- U R
. O P + S A m L a
h .' x
. ' +y E + n.
B j i e - 1I i' c A N Q a I4 ,
, ?i >-
f a r e u r . S A 8 c i n.k- .1 1 Y 1 M. j A Aro + X E
~ M
' i
- n. s'I _WN 3N E -
C L
. L f A it* _Y
'( N i=l A D F A R E
- U R K
1I i J. S>{ g_. S A in J]'
+
+ i n.
1 J 7 8h > y -. I T J ' Lf m> ) r " c _ - 2
- f_i+ i s-F m m a u
) ym pQ n v_ g m>m>nm og Z mx>E.
- _5pU8h < o toSEpS _
? ;- -
a ' f! ,
i
. . 0 , , Proc.No. Ist 4.3 Rev 1 E!.Je Virgtitta Corporatiott -
Ol13tthlH0nb Dato: 3/1/83 Page 19 of 21 l l 1- A' l $D) A l
-tu e 0 ~
-p l II # WELO l
-I"b0 )- di BUTTERING
-W
~- g tal o' x
g" (d) IT
-la 4 -
N A Ii
-In
~
WEl.D BUTTERING
$1
-b
~
di qy D
~*
v (b) (e) A IDI
-iN .s _
A m 4 -lu,
-lN
.D 4 .g .
-lN E '
)
D (d gg; SURFACE EXAM. AREA A-D IV'B.2500-18 CONTR01. ROD DRIVE IIGUSING WELDS Fig. 13
, , , , Proc.No. Is1 4.3 gey_ 1 Eije Virgittta Corporatiott I l of Richmonb Date~ 3/1/83 Page 20 of 21 YOKE POSITIONING FOR WELD EXAMINATIO'1 ILLUSTRATIVE ONLY I
3 2 4 l
*{(o**
examined v v - weld i I
,u - - --.-- -
I l 2 4 I 3 I" overlap l l PROBE POSITIONS SHOWING 2 DIRECTIONS 90 TO EACH OTHER AND I" OVERL AP PING ON SURFACE TO BE EX AMIN ED Figure 14
Proc.No._ ist 4.3 o gey, i tEfje TTirginia Corporation ~ of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 21 of 21 IEIGHT CAMBON STEEL PIE SECTIONS, FURNACE BRAZE TOGETHER Y +
~ ;
\ '
g l f NONFERROUS HANDLE OF
\ gf p . -- ANY CONVENtENT LENGTH
/lN
,e' s- ARTIFICIAL FIAW
')
l - BRAZE WELD OR MECHANICALLY ATTACH NONFERROUS TRUNNIONS l O l COPPER PLATE, ABOUT CLOIO THICK I Il C I l t ILLUSTRATIVE ONLY i Figure 15 Magnetic Particle Field Indicator _- ,y,, ,-_-----.---.,.,,.._.y,,,-,,-y
~
Figure 16 ISI 4.3 ' em /e%\1 The Magnetic Porticle q
-p t U Virginia amad Corp.
1 Examination Report g%&/ Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure Examincr/ Level VCR Supervisor Date Component /Pipinn System ISO Drawinn No. Surface Condition Type of Particles Manufacturer Type Batch Number Wet Dry Visible Flourescent _ Current Machine Mfr.
- Type /Model l Serial No.
AC DC HWDC . l Magnetization Coil Prods Yoke Continuous Amps. Spacing Spacing Residual No. Turns Amps. Weld / Item Comment,s NRI RI Sat Unsat o O n
. 5C
_ \ \ \ ')
/AN \ \ u m f \\ \> ) \ MV
! . 5 M \ \\ < V l C N\ \ \\ \\ \ l
~
n \ k\\ \\\W ( E \ \> \ W , V T\ F l Nv lv l 1 t l t l O l Form MT-301 2/82
Figure 17 L ISI 4.3 p j s a vs. Magnetic Particle i_ \/ Virginia Corp.
\ %d /
Y MM Mide hd ' I l
\
Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure Examiner / Level Date Component / Piping System VCR Supervisor Wald No. ISO / Drawing No.
- Circumferential Length of Weld :
- Start Point Magnetic Particle Inspection !
l I I I l l 1 I
' I I t
_____+____ _ q____ I 9 weld l l ____+_ _ __4-___ t g , , I I I I i i i I 0* 90* 180* 270* 360* Remarks Form MT-302 7,g7 k
/m\
( g Virginia Corp. The (804)266-8741 P o So= '474 T V ( y 7 .e am 5809 Lakeside A,.. ( v Rachmond, Virginia 23228 Procedure
Title:
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION OF WELDS BY CONTINUOUS NETHOD UTILIZING WET, FLUORESCENT MELIiki
. . EBASCO SERV!CEO li'COilP0fiATED QLAIn't nu v c..n.,v.a l Procedure No.: ISI 4.4
, This pocument is: gaene-es mt:= t en-t o e= .,-c o-,s c
- n. .,
.te.-
Plant Site: Waterford No. 3 "a **':P= *4 *a vs .
] Rejected: Remse an. Resu6eit.
au s c; l
.~.,..._.:.,,,
Customer: Louisiana Power and Light 1 "*,""j',,'" ,"* ;']"',=* Ebasco Services Inc. - Agent =*ia = -n w w ene m.anto,,
= =ae,=in e e.,n .,,n v: ,,,
~
- a. p ration: 7 6 M" " B
- f. . . . . . _ . .. _ _ _
,,i lr i Approved for Use DAf:... L-1.,7 ,.e , ., g Customer: / Rev. Date: Rev. Date: j , Prepared by: .N--6 Mwe s Prepared by: Reviewed by: O !^ m 44 E- Reviewed by: Reviewed by: 72/# M )1 M&~ - Reviewed by: j (~ e' Custoner: , Rev. 3 Date: f, too /st 9 Rev. Date: Prepared by: d hf -- Prepared by: Reviewed by dC- G/ mz- Reviewed by: Reviewed by: 'MN w% d eviewed by: Customer: f~ / Customer: Rev. 2 Date: 3/1/81 Rev. Date: n-Prepared by: y Prepared by: l Reviewed by: 'lb dM = LvL777- Reviewed by: l 1 Reviewed b _M Reviewed by: i Customer: i -f / # * / N _5 bb / 'Ti "2.a l . 5 Customer: 2' " 7._ . - . .
' ~ ~~
Proc. No._ ISI 4.4 Rey 2 EIJe Virgtuta Corporation of Echmonb Date: 3/1/83 Pagel_of 22 1.0 Scope 1.1 This procedure describes the requirements for the performance of magnetic particle examination of ferromagnetic weldments in piping 4" diameter and greater, and adjacent base metal for indications open to the surface, using continuous method and longitudinal magnetization as produced by yoke technique. Wet, fluorescent medium is to be used with this procedure. This procedure is written in c.ompliance with ASME code, Section XI, and the requirements of ASME code, Section V, Article 7. 2.0 References 2.1 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, 1977 edition with addenda through summer, 1978. 2.2 ASME Section V. Article 7, 1977 edition with addenda through summer, 1978. 2.3 The Virginia Corporation of Richmond Procedure 4.1, Written Practice for the Qualification and Certification of NDE I Personnel, Rev. 3, dated 3/6/81. j 2.4 The Virginia Corporation ISI 1.2, Preservice Inspection Documentation (latest revision). l 2.5 Preservice Inspection Program Plan. l l 2.6 The Virginia Corporation Procedure VC-QA-103, Generation and Control of Procedures for Waterford No. 3 Preservice Inspection (latest revision). 3.0 Personnel Requirements 3.1 Personnel performing examinations to this procedure shall be qualified and certified to at least Level II, in accordance with reference 2.3. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) may be employed as assistants. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) shall not independently evaluate or accept the results of a magnetic particle examination. l
ISI 4.4 ggy= 2 Proc. No' EDe Virgtnta Corporation { of Richmonb Date 3/1/83 Page 2 of 22 4.0 Equipment and Materials 4.1 Magnetizing equipment shall be electromagnetic yokes capable of producing longitudinal magnetization by A.C. current. 4.1.1 This equipment shall be calibrated at least once every twelve months, and following major repair, periodic overhaul, or damage. 4.1.2 Electromagnetic yokes shall be Parker Research Corp. , Model DA-200 contour probe, or approved equivalent. Yokes shall have a calibrated lif ting power of at least 10 pounds for A.C. at the maximum pole spacing to be used. A calibration sticker shall be affixed to the yoke, and shall state the serial number of the yoke, the maximum pole spacing, the data of calibration, and the person responsible for calibration. Minimum pole spacing vill be three l l (3) inches, and yokes will not be used with pole spacings beyond that stated on the calibration sticker. 4.2 All examination medium materials shall be supplied with batch number and certification attesting that the medium material was manufactured in accordance with ASME Code, Section V. i Fluorescent mediums -shall be such that the particles emit l a brilliant fluorescence when exposed to a suitable " black j light". The degree of brilliance shall provide adequate i contrast with the similarly exposed background of the surface being examined. 4.2.1 Wet, fluorescent mediums shall be provided in prepared bath containers (spray cans). 4.2.2 The following wet, fluorescent medium materials, or approved equivalent, shall be used. 4.2.2.1 Magnaflux Corporation No. 14 AM l I
- - - Proc. No' ist 4.4 gey 2 Efje Vtrstnia Corporation OfRIC$monb Date: 3/1/83 Page 3 of 22 )
4.3 When fluorescent particles are used as the examination medium, " black light" (light in the near ultraviolet range - 3300 to 3900 A* of wave length) shall be used to expose the particles and cause them to fluoresce. The light shall have been activated for at least five minutes prior to use in the examination. 4.3.1 Suitable intensity of " black light" at the surface under examination shall be determined using a meter which is sensitive to light in the ultraviolet spectrum, centered on 365nm (3650A). Two readings shall be taken: the first without a filter and the second with an ultraviolet (365nm (3650A)) absorbing filter over the sensing element of the meter. The second reading is deducted from the first and the difference shall be a minimum of 2 800,uoW/cm , 4.4 A magnetic particle field indicator (MPF1), see Figure 1, shall be available to determine or verify the suitability of examinations, equipment or materials, as may be necessary. The HPFI may be used to determine or verify parameters such as: 4.4.1 Adequacy and/or direction of the magnetizing field. 4.4.2 Fluorescent suitability of fluorescent particle mediums and their compatibility with the " black light" being utilized. 4.4.3 Range (extent of surface area) that may be examined and interpreted for any single " shot". 5.0 General Requirements 5.1 Lighting 5.1.1 The adequacy of " black light" intensity shall be verified in accordance with paragraph 4.3.1 at least once every eight hours of continuous operation, and whenever the work location is changed.
, , , Proc. No. m44 Rev 2 Efje Virgtnta Corporation I I of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Pagec of 99 5.1.1.1 The work area lighting shall be subdued, shaded or darkened as necessary to allow easy recognition of particles when they are being exposed to " black light".
5.2 Surface Preparation 5.2.1 The surf ace area to be examined, plus at least one inch on all sides, and the contact area for yokes, if outside,this area, shall be dry and free of dust, dirt, scale, grease, or other matter that would interfere with the examinations. 5.2.2 "As-welded" surfaces, following removal of slag, shall be considered suitable for magnetic part!.cle examination without grinding if this does not interfere with interpretation of the test results and if the weld contour blends into the base metal. l I 5.2.3 Surface irregularities that, in the opinion of the examiners, would mask or hamper interpretations shall be corrected. 5.2.4 Precleaning and surface or area preparation, if required, shall be the responsibility of the contractor. 5.3 Examination Area 5.3.1 The examination area shall be the veld surf ace and adjacent base metal on each side of the weld edge, as required by Figures 1 through 13. 5.3.2 The specific welds or other areas to be examined shall be as defined in the preservice inspection plan. 5.4 Surface temperature shall not exceed 135'F when using wet mediums. l I
Proc.No. ISI 4.4 q,v 2 Efje Virginta Corporation of Richmont Date: 3/1/83 Page s of 22 6.0 Examinations 6.1 Examination shall be conducted by the continuous method. The part shall be bathed with the inspection medium to provide an abundant source of suspended particles on the surface of
~ the part and terminating the bath application simultaneously with the initiation of the magnetizing current. Thus, there is no application of the inspection medium while the magnetizing current is flowing. Typically, there may be some overlap relative to cessation of bath application and the flow of magnetizing current.
6.1.1 The wet prepared bath shall be sufficiently agitated prior to application. 6.2 Examination shall be conducted in two directions such that the lines of flux from one examination are approximately perpendicular to the other. Orientation of the lines of flux shall be such that the surface examined is examined for indications parallel and transverse to the weld axis. 6.3 Examinations shall be conducted with sufficient overlap to assure 100% coverage of the area required to be examined. Succeeding examinations shall overlap the appropriate area of the preceding examination by at least one inch. 6.4 Examination for Parallel and Transverse Indications 6.4.1 A longitudinal field in two directions, 90* to each l other, shall be induced in the part with an alternating current electromagnetic yoke in accordance with l requirements of paragraph 6.4.3 and a setup similar to Figure 14. l 6.4.2 The area of examination shall be limited to within i. t of the pole spacing on each side of the yoke. Minimum pole spacing shall be three inches. O I
Proc.NO' ISI 4.4 ggy 2 Efje "t7ttgtnta Corporation l I Of R(Chmonb Date' 3/1/83 Page 6 of 22 6.4.3 The adequacy of the magnetizing field may be determined by positioning the MPFI (Figure 15) on the surf ace to be examined. The flux intensity, or field strength, is suitable when a clearly defined line, or lines, of particles form across its copper face when the particles are applied simultaneously with the magnetizing force. 6.4.3.1 If the line, or lines, are not formed, or are not formed in the desired direction, the magnetizing technique, equipment, or medium shall be changed or adjusted so that the required examination is achieved in accordance with this procedure. 6.4.3.2 Satisfactory definition of the line, l I or lines, on the MPFI verifies the adequacy and suitability of the technique and equipment. l 6.4.3.3 The adequacy of the field shall be , determined with the MPFI in both the 1 parallel and transverse directions with respect to the weld axis. 6.4.4 Following the determination of field adequacy, the entire area to be examined shall be sequentially examined, being careful to allow sufficient overlap as detailed in paragraph 6.3, and as depicted in Figure 14. 6.5 Demagnetization of weldments is not required. 6.6 Post examination cleaning, associated with the test, . hall be the responsibility of the contractor.
ISI 4.6 Prec.No. qgy 2 EI.Je "t7ttginia Corporation of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 7 of 22 7.0 Evaluation and Recording of Indications 7.1 Discontinuities at the surface are indicated by the retention of examination medium. However, localized surface irregularities due to machining marks or other surface conditions may produce false or nonrelevant indications. 7.2 Broad areas of particle accumulation or nonrelevant indications which could mask indications of discontinuities are unacceptable, and those arcas shall be cleaned and re-examined. 7.3 Reportable Indications 7.3.1 The indications in the table below, occuring in the examination area, are considered relevant and are to be recorded and reported to the customer or his agent within 24 hours. Nominal Wall Reportable Description Thickness /Other Indications Ferromagnetic welds g;.312" xl/8" piping > . 312" to 2. 0" r3/16" 7. 2.0 and over 71/4" Ferromagnetic vessel .625" to 2.0" r3/16" supports and support 2.0" and over p l/4" members for piping, valves, and pumps Pressure retaining welds r2.0" pl/4" in pump casings and valve 2 bodies 8.0 Documentation of Examination 8.1 All data relative to the examination, including any reportable indications, shall be reported in accordance with references 2.4, and on forms similar to those shown in Figure 16 and 17. O
- - - - Proc No.
e YSI 4.4 Rey - 2 Ef.Je TTtrgtnta Corpcratten OfEICDm0HD Date' 3/1/83 Page 8 of_22
, SURF. EX AM. AREA' A-B s \o PROFILE OF VALVE BODY' g;,, VESSEL N02ZLE, OR pn.
I , in. [} PUMP CONNECTION p A,, / * ', , B v v - g. O INNER SURFACE NOM. PIPE SIZE LESS THAN 4 IN.
, SURF. EXAM. ARE A A-B PROFILE OF VALVE BODY,
- f. VESSEL NOZZLE, OR
<- l .--+ <-l -
PUMP CONNECTION pm. p in.> p . A, s / 8 v v \ r i f x v l l NOM. PIPE SIZE 4 IN. AND GREATE R , l Fig. IWB-2500-8 l l Similar and Dissimilar P.ctal Welds in Piping Figure 1 ,
Proc. No. Ist 4 4 Rev-_ 2 Ehe Virginia Corporation
. of Richmond Date:_ 3/1/a3 Page 9 of 22 l
. i >
vo// 0
~
0 i
&p%lr, &"%p c
u w . s/ 8
\
m, e - A 3 g % [ cr z
,y o g gri . .-s '
E U
$ N /
l/ ~ 2 BRANCH
* ~
CONNECTION 8 I l I d a =
$ \( %
~ ~
b u I
$ N ,
v w k {N I \ WELD JOINT 'es^ e b
" O
> t 4ys g N 9
%_ d w 5 Y C f Fig. Ik'B-2500-9 Pipe Branch Connection Figure 2
=
Proc. No'_ ISI 4.4' Rey 2 Efje '97ttgtnta Corporattan of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 page 10 of 22 "o 4,
& ' 9 .
d4 A#
#@j) #O #
&9, r .
.7 ,
A W {
~ ~
~ m /
}
E , /
$ i t +- I e 7 t ;
_ _ _, BRANCH ( CONNECTION k i i s 2 , O O -t I l o g , 2 i e u ,- \ \ E E 5 S gA E. V NN rd 3 o . +/ g 3 Y N 13 5 e W N w ~e% . m ~
).
-+ t (-
Fig. IWB-2500-10 Pipe Branch Connection Figure 3
,,-,-----,.----c . - - - , , , , - , ,--v, - - , - , - - - - . , - , - , , , , - , , - -
ISI 4.4
, , . Proc. No. ggy 2 Efje E,rgtnta Corporatton of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 11 of 22
&U o# ;
69 f Yo U) & *
#+
A \ w ~ A
@ z w 2 - -- ? w C z $ l IN. '
F } ;n I< l l l 0 - _ 4_ , BRANCH L CONNECTION
->' <- l IN, E 5 , -
H \ h
- trA o W l\
s E e a p Q. LL ed o f
\ 2 d em N /
w b \
-s v ^ %
IWB-2500-11 ( } Pipe Branch Connection Figure 4
- I '
ISI 4.4 Proc. No.- ggy__ 2 Efje TTirgluta Corporation of Ekhmonb Date' 3/1/83 _ __ Pa g e 12 of22 N0ZZLE SIZES OVER 4 in. NOM. PlPE SIZE VESSEL THICKNESS . , .1/2 in.OR LESS h EXAMINATION SURFACE,A-B A o 1/2 in, v 1/2 in.
~
B T t J. ( l l l l l E X A MIN ATION SURFACE, A-B 1/2 in.
,A ,
- l. .. e Y T T t
k J. 1 Fig. IWC-2520-3 Nozzle to Vessel Welds l l l Figure 5
ISI 4.4 Proc.NO. ROV- 2 '
'Efje Virgittia Corporatiott of Richmonb Date'. 3/1/83 Page 13 of 22
^
l
~
N l l l l
. 1 Exam Surface A-B b
^ . : i f 7 j T ha.
x ( l Exam Surface A-B q..
~
^
9 : B 1' l T Q
- IWC-2520-4 Noz::1c to Vessel Welds Fig. 6
Proc.No. Isi4 4 2 Efje Vttgtnta Corporation Rev'_ -; of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page u.of _ 22 COMPONENT C~- A o 1/2in. 1/2 in. 1/2in. ALL AROUND d b % COMPONENT \iBJ ,.
. 1
, E SUPPORT 1/2 in. 1/2 in.
t j f B" 'C h 1
B SUPPORT
[,
/ 3
.-O- 1/2 in.
. ~ *A ALL AROUND EXAM SURFACES A-B AND C-D EX AM. SURFACES A-B COMPONENT #
v t / 2 in.BE YOND WELD t.RE A { g . A ki 1/2 m. CCMPONENT yB C C k,'
'h 1/2 in.
C C
=
STAUCTURAL SECTION SUPPORT B f ,
=--OB4 SUPPCRT A, 1/2 in.
1
) t E X AM. SURFACES EX AM. SURFACES
.A-B A-B PL ATE AND SHELL TYPE LINE AR TYPE
) SUPPORT WELCS SUPPORT WELOS l g g Fig. IWC-2520-5 Integrally Welded Component Supports l Figure 7 1
, IJB Yirgillia 60rpGratiG11 ~ i of Ekhmonb Dato: 3/1/83 Page is of_22 EXAM. SURFACE A-B ,
[ PROFILE OF VALVE BODY, VESSEL N0ZZLE,OR
?/2 in. 1 PUMP CONNECTION 1/2 in. 1/2 in. k A, / ,.e ,
INNCR SURFAOC NOM. PIPE WALL THICKNESS, t : 1/2in OR LESS [ PROFILE OF VALVE BODY, / E X A M. SURFACE . VESSEL N0ZZLE OR PUMP CONNECTION
,g 1/2 in. 1/2 in. I I
/
A. / 8
,,n ,
l
}
[, i ( // \
\ -
i I / x u a NOM. PIPE WALL THICKNESS t CVER 1/2 in. IWC-2520-7 Welds in Piping I I Figure 8
Proc.No ISI 6.4 Rey 2 - Efje T8ttgtnia Corporation i Page 6 gf 22 Of Michmoilb Date' 3/1/83--
' EXAM. SURE ,,
C-D 4 I N N O,, * *
,C T 'T 1 l
l l l 1 -- - 1 ( p.- s. . MEASURED ALONG SURFACE 5' 5' E X AM. SURF. F A-8 'i Fig. IWC-2520-8 Welds in Pump Casin; and Valve Bodies d l Figure 9
. l l
Pr .N. 4.4 aev 2 4 : Eh8 EiEI.J iniR 80rp0!aliOH ' Of EICDmonD Date' 3/1/83 Page _17 of 22
~
EXAMINATION SURFACE AROUND BRANCH GONNECTION , A-B 1/2 in. A n
/+d +- 1/2 in.
~
U , ,8
~
! !. \ N, _
5 $ l tt \
> e l'
j BRANCH , j q? . g , CONN.
, I l
=
0 r - - g - S , 1/2 in. m = ' 4 O
$ b
! -s E --* , +-- i/ 2 in. l E j, 3-wl
~.n.<m l
Fig. IWC-2520-9 Branch Conneciton Welds l l I Figure 10
,-,c, --
. .. Proc. No. Ist 44 Rey 2 TEfje Wttstnia Corporation 3/1/83 22 ,e 3 Of MIC$m0!!D 0010' .Pago 18 k)
TYPE r PUMP (SECTION K) PUMP CASING , W. ,
$ .. l 3 DISCHAllGE $ m '
5 i. w l c w4 $ $ N < .$ 5 m
' I y G $ $
g 4
- w <
" u " v
\ VELD t i JOINT E - - - - -
E _._ _4 .*_
,s n 3 O 4 O l
.5 R_
1 i IWB 2500-16 PUMP CASING WELD 2 l nn. ii 'O
. U , .v
- g 7 oO zO 2o N U
en MCQM%2,Q.'" 8O~~%$ e r , . OSP WN5*w S g Eg T$,G ~e Oe-Y
#r<m oO< s42 ./
- S .
E'g" 8a5M h htN S S $Qx t r>$m @$mA .
, <>qm l
M. A X Q E E P C A A F R E 14 .
. tI U R O p 4 S A m L- l a h _' .
x .
. , +f E (- D B
e - 1 I h bf c A N Q i a lv *. ^l - f a r e ur S A l n
.%B f 't
'C l
i M
' Y. .
A X Ar- Il
,'I E
_ , - M
- in. + -
E C L
<- iz l8E,>l 86fY A 3 D F A R E U R -
K L S A [ Ji!h'l + in
*h -
+ ID-178 l* <
J y -- I 3 J - h i s.- - s c
'4 r e r
w . t 9* ,l s - - EE N IF N
' i
_ n nm mNe c:m
^ "
~
$ m> o* - -
$4$o j>r% aoO< EE 6 N
~ -
f"
.I
.", , . . Proc.No._ ISI 4.4 Rgy 2 a (E!je Virgtitta Corporatiott Of Mithin0nb Dato: 3/1/83 Page 20 of _ 22
.O '
()
.d A
-w -
a 4
-g It '
WELD
-I" '
8 UTTERING 0 Si
~U
~~ g (a) D*'
~ Id3 A
.$7
-ju 4 q Q A
.d t
-Im WELD BUTTERING
.it
-> st 4 -W
' D'3 4 g D
~ '
v-v (el
. . ~
A -
-iu ID) .s A
n 4 -lu,
.5 7
-Im L.-q $t D -[N 3
l
-.~
SURFACE EXAM. AREA A-D IWB-250018 CONTROL ROD DRIVE Il0USING WELDS Fig. 13
P No. 1st 4.6 Rev= 2
$ht Y i!ginig COEP E8 M of R@m:mb Date: 3/ /83 page 21 og 22 g
YOKE POSITIONING FOR WELD EXAMINATION ILLUSTRATIVE ONLY I 3 2 4-
. s a r,ox
\.. . . .
l to be l l examined : weld x m
/
_ _ _ \_ 2 4 1 3 1" overlap PROBE POSITIONS SHOWING 2 DIRECTIONS 90 TO EACH OTHER AND I" OVERL AP PING ON SURFACE TO BE EX AMIN ED Figure 14
- ...,.._me ww-,---~ -----w,,--*--.4,-,,p---- -.yy
i i Proc.No._ ist 4.4 Rey, 2 tL.fje 1T;rgtnta t torporation _ of Richmonb Date: 3/1/83 Page 22 gf 22 ( I EIGHT CARBON STEEL PIE SECTIONS. FURNACE BRAZE TOGETHER Y ,3
\ ..
g l ,' NONFERROUS HANDLE OF
\ g /
y i ANY CO*4VENIENT LENGTH f I / s e' l s- ARTIFICIAL FIAW 8 l. BRAZE WELD OR WECHANICALLY ATTACH l NONFERROUS TRUNNIONS i ( l l COPPER PLATE. AB3UT CLOIO TH4CK l 1I c l l l ILLUSTRATIVE ONLY I 1 l I Figure 15 Magnetic Particle Field Indicator
.~
Figure 16 ISI 4.4
/- \'* Magnetic Porticle
(--.l ' virginia corp. q } t i/ a<h=*ad Examination Report g%d/v Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure Examiner / Level VCR Supervisor Date Component / Piping Svstem ISO Drawinn No. Surface Condition Type of Particles Manufacturer Type Batch Number Wet Dry Visible Flourescent ; Current Machine Mfr. Type /Model Serial No.
- AC DC HWDC Magnetization Coil Prods Yoke i Continuous Amps. Spacing Spacing Residual No. Turns Amps.
esu s W Results Weld / Item Comments NRI RI Sat Unsat i 1 A
- \(
n\ \ \ 9 A\ n \\ \ \ M A\ . \\ " / \ M\/ ( \ \ O k \\ \ V n \ \ \\ \ \\ \\) ( W \ b \\ \W k T\ # N JV v Form MT-301 2/82
~
Figura 17 ISI 4.4
/ \a Magnetic Particle p j , 13.
I ) \/' Virginia Corp.
/ ''""*"d Weld Indication Record
%d Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure Examiner / Level Date Component / Piping System VCR Supervisor Wald No. ISO / Drawing No.
- Circumferential Length of Weld
- Start Point Magnetic Particle Inspection i I I I I I I I
' I I l t i l l I (
weld ) 9 4____ l t g , , 1 I I l l 1 1 I I 0* 90* 180* 270* 360' Remarks Form MT-302 ,,,,
4
% +
4
< - I-j
[m\ g 3, Virginia Corp.
. tans)266 s74
- C 8** Nd 4
(s(,/s j . , - amoe tak. a Av.. Relunend, Vnginia 23228 Procedure
Title:
VT-I VISUAL EXAMINATION ESASCO SERVICES 4 '
'NCORPORATED QUALITY .
u mDAM(f A Ya ENGINEERING Procedure No.: ISI 5.1 This Documentis:
%.t & - wi .ma. . . e c__ _-_ _--___-_ r Q Reviewed With Comments .e '
Noted: Incoroor.w Commeetg ,
- and Resutwnst: Proceed Wittn Plant Site: Waterford #3 '**'* '
O new.ed: neve..no ne.umnies
, NOTE: I ae 4e., av ens. doewn.ne, wrm oc without comments, 6s for generat como. .ne. with in. iieets.
Customer: Louisiana Power and Light se=nications ow .ad m n. wey Ebasco Services, Inc. - Agent
$*C,',",e,C"g'..".'75,'*,7
_.....n..._....
;^ t -^ -
Co p ration: - B:
, n,e. 6/-27'97 Approved for Use l
Custoner Q Q I E g Q Q Il V j ,gy
/l ff
[
</
g [g ff ' i Rev. O Date: 6/25/82 V u l Rev. . Date: _ Prepared by: 6 *-r-_ Prepared by: Reviewed by:. O -" ^ ^ - / / 771 ' Reviewed by: Reviewed by_ M Reviewed by: j Customer: Rev. Date: Rev. Date: Prepared by: , Prepared by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Revierwed by: Customer: Customer: Rev. Date: Rev. 'Date: Prepared by: Prepared by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Reviewed by: Customer: Customer:
. . . . . Proc.Flo. 'er s' Rov =
Efje "tTtrginta Corporatton 6/23/82 4 of Richmont Date: Page of 1 h 1.0 Scope 1.1 This procedure is applicable to, and describes the requirements for, category VT-1, Visual Examination of Nuclear Plant Components by the Direct and Remote Methods. This procedure is written in compliance with the ASME code, Section XI. c. 2.0 References 2.1 1977 edition of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, with addenda through summer, 1978 - 2.2 The Virginia Corporation Written Practice for the Qualification and Certification of NDE Personnel, NDE 4.1, Rev. 3, dated 3/6/81 2.3 The Virginia Corporation procedure, 151-1.2, (latest revision), Preservice Inspection Documentation. ( 3.0 Personnel Qualifications ' 3.1 Personnel performing visual examina'tions only, shall be qualified and certified to at least Level II in accordance with ref erence Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level I-Ltd) nay be ' 2.2. I employed as assistants. Level I and/or Level I trainees (Level 1-Ltd) shall not independently evaluat'e or accept the results of a visual examination. 3.2 Certified Level II Liquid Penetrant, or Magnetic Particle examiners preforming examinations of welds afe considered to be sufficiently knowledgeable to perform visual visual examinations of pipe and component welds to the require-ments of this procedure as an adjunct to their principal assign-ments. If, however,the examiner is to perform and sign-of f VT-I examinations, he shall be certified to Level II certification in visual examination. 4
- 4.0 General Requirements
, 4.1 Surf ace cordition - Visual examinations that require clean surf aces, cr decontamination for valid interpretation of results, shall be preceded by appropriate cleaning processes.
1
. 1 1
, , , , Proc. No. Ist 5.1 gey, n o EIje 't7ttstnia Corporation 6/25/82 J Date: Page 2 of 4 of Rf4mont 4.2 Replication - Surface replication methods shall be considered acceptable provided the surf ace resolution is at least equivalent to that obtainable by the visual observation.
4.3 Area of Examination - The area of examination shall be 100 percent of the readily accessible, exposed portion of the item or part to be examined, unless modified by the Preservi.ce Inspection Plan. 4.4 Equipc}ent - Equipment to be used may include, but shall not be limited to, mirrors, lighting, visual aids such as telescopes, periscopes, borescopes, fiber optics, T.V. cameras and recorders, and photographs. Permanent records may be made by photograph or video tape of the area being examined, or any anomalies noted. 4.5 Lighting - Lighting, natural or artificial, sufficient to illuminate the area to be examined, is required. O)
'- 4.6 Resolution - Both direct and remote visual examination resolution shall be considered adequate when the combination of access, lighting and angles of vision, either unaided or corrected, can resolve a black line,1/32 of an inch wide or less, on an 18 percent neutral gray card placed on the surface to be examined, or in a situation similar to the area to be visually examined.
! 5.0 Examination 5.1 The VT-1 visual examination shall be conducted to determine l the condition of the part, component, or surface examined,
'including such conditions as cracks, wear, corrosion, erosion, or physical damage on the surfaces of the part of components.
5.2 Examination method 5.2.1 Direct - The direct visual examination method i shall be used when access to the area of interest, without personal injury or excessive radiation exposure, is sufficient to place the eye within
.N..-,-.-..--.---..----------------------------------------I A N~
l l Proc.No. Isl 5.1 qq, o Efje E,rgm, ta Corporation 7 Of R M Date* 6/25/82 page 3 of 4 24 inches of the surface to be examined, and at an angle of no less than thirty degrees with the surface to be examined. Mirrors may be used to improve the angle of vision. 5.2.2 Remote - the remote visual examination method may be substituted for direct, visual examination if personal injury or excessive radiation exposure could result if direct visual examination was used. For this examination method, use may be made of equipment as detailed in paragraph 4.4. Any systems of equipment used shall demonstrate the ability to provide resolution at least equivalent to that obtainable by direct visual observation. 5.3 Examinations performed may be inclusive of, but not limited to, the following items. 5.3.1 Welds - The area examined shall be the veld and the adjacent base metal for at least one wall thickness beyond each edge of the weld. The general condition of these areas shall be noted, including such conditions as scratches, wear, cracks, weld are strikes, or corrosion. The identity and location of specific welds to be examined shall be identified in the Preservice Inspection Plan. 5.3.2 Bolts, studs, nuts, washers, threads in base material and ligaments - May be examined either in place or when disassembled. The identity and location of specific bolted connections to be examined shall be identified in the Preservice Inspection Program Plan. tlIl
, , , . Proc. No. 151 s.1 Rey,o o flEfje Virgtnta 00rporattolt C 4
~
i of Richmonb Date: 6/25/82 Page' of 5.3.2.1 In-place examination - Studs, nuts, and bolts shall be examined to ensure they remain tightened in place. The
+ exposed surfaces of stud threads, nuts, and bolt heads shall be examined to ensure they are free of cuts, dents, or cracks.
5.3.2.2 Disassembled examination - Threads shall be examined to ensure that they are free of burrs, deformations, wear, galling, or cracks. Bolt shanks, head root radii, and shanks shall be examined for evidence of wear, galling, cracking, or flaking. r
'x. /
5.3.3 Valve internals shall be examined for any burr , scratches, errosion or worn areas. Any of these conditions shall be reported on forms VT-401, VT 402 or VT-403 in accordance with paragraph 6.0. 6.0 Reporting
~
6.1 All data relative to the examinations, and reportable indications, shall be reported in accordance with Virgi .ia Corporation procedu're' 151-1.2, "Preservice Inspection
~
Documentation", and on forms similar to those in Fi.'., urn s 1, 2 and 3. 6.2 Supplemental sketches or photographs used to report e r 'itions or discontinuities shall be pernanently identified to C.e system and cocponent. U
. --l 1
Figure 1 ;
}pg\ .
V.isu 1 Excm.ination Rep 3rt !
,p g, Virginia Corp. for t \,/ f .eakn- a VT-l
/ ks f Category I > i Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure Examiner / Level Date Component / Piping System ISO Drawing No. VCR Supervisor l Weld / 5'vn m 5 a e,it e. Item NRI RI Com ants v 4,,,3 3 34,% v
/\
s \L ~
-\\\)
A n \\ \ \ M A \ .\\ " / \ M V
' \ J' K \\ \ V n \ k \\ % \\ \\>
' W \ b \\ \W k T\ M" Nv JV i
i l
. . . . . w r . . ,, ,
- Figure 2
/$ [em\ g j< n Vjrginia Corp. Visual Exomination i/ y
\%=*! of Aktunend Wald Indication Record Customer Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedare Examiner / Level Date Component / Piping System VCR Supervisor Weld No. ISO Drawing No.
; Circumferential Length of Weld ;
Start Point Visual Inspection l I I I l l l l 1 l l t
,~
gl ' ____ +____+____w____ I I weld 1 _ _ _ _ _ +____ +_ ___4____ t 1 : 1 I I I I I I I I 0* 90* 180* 270* 360* Remarks
/1 a\L m\ \ \ >
-(\sG\\\\ M
\ M t \\ ./ " \ 'V
_ i s \\ \~ \\ \\ \
/ G \ h \\ \\ \UV
( N \ u \U"
> n f
W' I e ' L) f'er m v 7 4 0 3 2/82
........-.--...:.- --=--- -- ~' ~
Figure 3 [mkm j-D,gCorp. Visual Ex min' tion V _. Indication Record
%s j I
,5
( Customer' Plant Unit Loop / Zone Procedure Examiner / Level Date Component / Piping System VCR Supervisor Item No. ISO / Drawing No. i i'; kc-i Coc:ments: d i: g I 1 n- ,
><a -
k}}